SlideShare a Scribd company logo
“Steve walks beside us telling us stories, drawing images, crack-
ing jokes and pointing out the evidence that human intelligence can
deliver so much more than we allow it … a welcome guide to the
learning journey.”
     Marilyn Hamilton, Ph.D., C.G.A., Founder of Integral City

“Weaving Collaborative Intelligence (CQ) into organizations is an
idea for it’s time. Instilling CQ in the learning and actions of all
employees of an organization is a vital resource to engage everyone
in the real work. Joyce’s book is a must read.”
        Dr. Stephen Hobbs, author Help Them to Help YOU Lead

“Stephen delights in bringing us to a richer realization, and more
complete picture of our collaborative intelligence. A practical book
that points out the skills that enable us to master our own collabo-
rative capacity.”
                        J. Brian Woodward, Ph.D. Senior Faculty,
                Leadership Development & Leadership Learning Lab,
                                          The Banff Centre, Canada

“Get out of autopilot and read this book. Full of wisdom and insight,
you may not think about work and the difference you can make, in
quite the same way ever again…”
         Paul Belcher, Trainer, Consultant and Coach, ABL World

“Stephen has the uncanny ability to make the complex understood.
Teaching an Anthill to Fetch is about liberating human potential.
Insightful as it is practical, the author puts forward a simple set of
higher order rules that organizations can use to succeed, regardless
of what the future might bring. …rediscover the unbounded resilience
that lies at our fingertips when we come together and collaborate
effectively.”
                 Clifford Wessel, Performance Consultant & Coach
“Immediately useful…. Teaching an Anthill to Fetch is a contempla-
tive practice for building a better life.”
                                    Don Hill, Media Thought Leader


“Anyone who enjoys a good story will certainly relish the Irish lilt
of Joyce’s voice which comes through on each and every page.”
         Michael K. Mauws, Ph.D., Associate Professor, Business
                            Policy & Strategy, Athabasca University


“Teaching an Anthill to Fetch provides a valuable path to strengthen
the emergent survival skill — collaboration. With novel features
like “Go Deeper” and practical “Tools”, this is a new road map to
make Collaborative Intelligence really work @ Work!”
            Roger Gullickson, President/CEO, MVP Collaborative


“Teaching an Anthill to Fetch is a must-read. This book provides
valuable insights that will benefit any organization undertaking change
and wanting to get the most out of its most important asset — its
human resources.”
                          Rick Thrale, Community Futures, Alberta


“[Teaching an Anthill to Fetch is] … a practical handbook with sug-
gestions and exercises to help us to improve our team’s “Collaborative
Intelligence”. A great addition to the canon of leadership literature.”
             Peter McNab, author of Towards An Integral Vision


“This book will help managers and team leaders see the learning
terrain more clearly … an appreciation of the awesome power of
collaborative intelligence.”
        Will Black, executive coach, SourceS of Executive Action
Teaching
 an Anthill
    to Fetch
Developing Collaborative
  Intelligence @ Work



STEPHEN JAMES JOYCE
Stephen James Joyce, 2007

Attribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5
You are free:
to Share — to copy, distribute and transmit the work
to Remix — to adapt the work

Under the following conditions:
        Attribution. You must attribute the work in the manner specified by the author or
        licensor (but not in any way that suggests that they endorse you or your use of the work).

        Noncommercial. You may not use this work for commercial purposes.


        Share Alike. If you alter, transform, or build upon this work, you may distribute the
        resulting work only under the same or similar license to this one.

• For any reuse or distribution, you must make clear to others the license terms of this work.
• Any of the above conditions can be waived if you get permission from the copyright holder.
• Your fair use and other rights are in no way affected by the above. A complete version of
  this licence can be found at <www.creativecommons.org.>.


ISBN-10: 0-9780312-0-2
ISBN-13: 978-0-9780312-0-6
Printed and bound in Canada
First Printing

Library and Archives Canada Cataloguing in Publication
Joyce, Stephen James, 1959-
    Teaching an anthill to fetch : developing collaborative intelligence @ work /
    Stephen James Joyce.
Includes bibliographical references and index.
ISBN 978-0-9780312-0-6
1. Teams in the workplace. 2. Cooperativeness. 3. Group decision making.
4. Group problem solving. I. Title.
HD31.J69 2007           658.4'022         C2007-901053-9

Editor: Catherine Leek of Green Onion Pubishing
Interior Design and Electronic Page Composition: Kim Monteforte of
     WeMakeBooks.ca
Cover Design: Dianna Little
Cover Image: © Ron Elmy/Firstlight
Dedicated to Sandy, Zoey and Leland,
  the most wonderful people in my life.
For all the love and joy you have given me.
 'Teaching an Anthill to Fetch: Developing  Collaborative Intelligence @ Work'
2


         Acknowledgments

A number of people gave me specific input that strengthened this
work and I would like to thank them — Judy Kidd, Brian Woodward,
Ken Lowe, Keith Webb, Don Hill, Gary McPherson, and Dan Dybl.
    This book has taken form because of the excellent skill and
guidance of a number of other people: my editor, Catherine Leek of
Green Onion Publishing, who acted as mentor and editor and guided
me through the process so gracefully; Kim Monteforte for her won-
derful help with production and lay-out; Dianna Little for her patience
and dedication and for creating a super cover design; and Jane
Atkinson, my coach, for helping me to stay focused and “find my
lane”. Thanks guys it has been an enriching and joyful journey.
    Finally to the most important person in the entire project —
Sandy my highly talented and supportive partner. Without her this
book would never have seen the light of day.
 'Teaching an Anthill to Fetch: Developing  Collaborative Intelligence @ Work'
TABLE OF CONTENTS



A Word or Two About this Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                   ix
An Introduction of Sorts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .             1

Chapter 1: ASSUMPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                            5
               CQ TOOL 1: Checking Assumptions . . . . . . . . . . .                      27

Chapter 2: PERCEPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                           29
               CQ TOOL 2: Developing Perceptual
                                Flexibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   56

Chapter 3: SELF-MASTERY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                             59
               CQ TOOL 3: Self-Mastery and Eliciting a
                                Well Formed Outcome . . . . . . . . . . .                 87

Chapter 4: COMMUNICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                                93
               CQ TOOL 4: Exploring the Conversation Café . . . 117

Chapter 5: CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
               CQ TOOL 5: Building Connection
                                Through Appreciation . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Chapter 6: CREATIVITY & FLEXIBILITY . . . . . . . . . . . 149
               CQ TOOL 6: Developing Creative Capacity . . . . . 166

Chapter 7: MEANINGFUL PARTICIPATION . . . . . . . . 171
               CQ TOOL 7: Exploring Values to
                                Discover Meaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
viii   TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH



       Chapter 8: BUILDING HIGH CQ TEAMS . . . . . . . . . . 193
                        CQ TOOL 8: The LEADing Change System . . . . . 200


       So Where Are We Going . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

       Bibliography . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
       Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
       Go Deeper Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

       Speaking and Consulting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
       Take the CQ Challenge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
       About the Author . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
2


            A Word or Two
            About this Book

Teaching an Anthill to Fetch: Developing Collaborative Intelligence
@ Work has been designed to be a practical tool for developing CQ
in the workplace. Toward that end, we have provided a number of
navigational tools.


                 There are a number of places throughout the book
                 where we provide a “Go Deeper” feature. These are
                 opportunities to explore the ideas covered in more
                 depth through the Web site www.anthillsite.com.
                 Here you will find web links connected to various
                 topics.


CQ Tool          Exercises, called “CQ Tools”, are placed at the end
                 of each chapter. These are designed to develop
                 deeper collaborative intelligence and will challenge
                 and motivate you and your team.
 'Teaching an Anthill to Fetch: Developing  Collaborative Intelligence @ Work'
2


            An Introduction
                of Sorts

Ants, and all other insects that live in colonies, appear to be hard-
wired to serve. By doing so, they ensure their survival. An anthill
can survive and feed itself in some of the most hostile environ-
ments. No single ant knows how it all works — nor does it need to.
Individually, ants are not that smart, but together they are very
intelligent. The ant serves the anthill, which in turn serves the ant.
The community the ants create and work to support is well equipped
to cope with the challenge of change. In other words, the ant and
the colony it belongs to is a good example of high level collaborative
intelligence (CQ).


    Collaborative Intelligence (CQ) is defined as the
    capacity to harness the intelligence in networks
    of relationships.


    Jim Donehey was the CEO of Capital One, the credit card com-
pany, when he coined the phrase, “You can’t teach an anthill to fetch.”
He was referring to the task of helping his organization of 1800 peo-
ple adapt and respond to a very competitive and rapidly changing
marketplace. The challenge facing Doheney was how to focus the
attention of the entire organization around vital business objectives.
2   TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH



        Whether we are working inside a small team in a non-profit
    organization or in a large, multinational conglomerate, dealing with
    change is the ongoing challenge. Change forces us to adapt. Our
    adaptability defines how successful we are in dealing with change
    and how resilient we are.
        Resilience is our ability to bounce back and recover from adverse
    conditions. It is the innate ability to respond resourcefully to
    challenges in our environment. Ray Kurzweil, author of The Age
    of Spiritual Machines, has calculated that the next century will be
    accompanied by 20,000 years of technological progress compared to
    today’s rate of change. Therefore, our ability to adapt and respond
    to change is going to play a crucial role in the success of our species.
        As the pressure to deal with change increases upon individuals,
    teams, and organizations, resilience will become more central to
    business. Tapping into individuals’ and teams’ natural resilience will
    become an essential element of business survival and success. As
    teams become increasingly virtual, productivity increases will be
    required; leadership skills will be demanded from more and more
    of the team’s membership. Our capacity for resilience will be tested
    on a daily basis. However, when groups of people adapt and respond
    collectively incredible things happen. This is where collaborative
    intelligence becomes vital.
        Nature is a vigorously adaptive system. The evolution of life
    is the history of adaptation. Ants have adapted to the challenge of
    building supportive colonies by applying some very simple rules.
    The argument of this book is that, for humans there are some
    simple “rules” that can enable us to work much more effectively
    together. These rules are much more like skills that we already have
    onboard and that we simply need to further enhance. Given the
    right circumstances, people and teams can embrace and develop
    these skills. By doing so, they are expanding their collaborative
    intelligence (CQ).
AN INTRODUCTION OF SORTS      3



  So What If You Could Teach an Anthill to Fetch?

This book takes a skill-building approach to the development of the
CQ of teams. Each chapter ends with a skill-building exercise (CQ
Tools ). The elements making up the development of CQ are:


 1. Assumptions
 2. Perception
 3. Self-Mastery
 4. Communication
 5. Connection
 6. Creativity/Flexibility
 7. Meaningful Participation
 8. “High CQ” Teams


    We must begin within ourselves and so we begin in chapter 1
by checking assumptions. Choosing those ideas that will serve us
and our team has a fundamental impact on the success of all other
activities. Those assumptions will determine what sort of percep-
tions we have. Our perception of situations and other people affects
how we respond to what happens to us. To adjust assumptions and
manage our perceptions requires self-mastery. Self-mastery enables
us to make the most of our personal resources. However, with all
the self-mastery in the world, if we are unable to communicate effec-
tively with others, we will be unable to affect the world around us.
    Now we can move beyond ourselves to the bigger world and
others. With great communication skills, we are able to build deep
connection with others. Through connection, we create personal
and team alignment, focusing our individual and group energies
more effectively. This action raises productivity and helps create a
stable team with higher levels of CQ. A team with deep and effective
connection will be able to tap into greater levels of creativity and
4   TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH



    flexibility. These can be further enhanced through skill-building
    exercises. Creative and flexible teams are able to adapt and respond
    to a rapidly changing environment.
        When the going gets tough, people (and teams) need to know
    there is purpose to what they are trying to achieve. Meaningful
    participation provides a sense of purpose and direction.
        The Chinese have a proverb, “May you live in interesting times.”
    There is no debate that this has become true for us. How to deal
    with these interesting times is a lively and important debate. One
    thing is true, only when we can bring more of our CQ into play, will
    we be able to manage the levels of change occurring within business
    and society today. By increasing our collaborative intelligence, we
    truly are “teaching an anthill to fetch”.
1


                 Assumptions




                   To a worm in horseradish,
                the whole world is horseradish.

                         YIDDISH PROVERB




The sea squirt provides us a cautionary tale. When it is born, it floats
through the open oceans seeking a place to make its home. Once the
sea squirt finds a solid piece of ocean floor on which to attach itself,
it does a peculiar thing. The sea squirt eats its brain. Having achieved
its objective, a firm anchor within the ocean, it no longer needs its
brain. You may know people like the sea squirt. They have a firm
anchor in life or at work and, apparently, have long since consumed
their brains. Zoologists say that the sea squirt shares 80% of our DNA.
Some people probably share more than that. The sea squirt assumes
that nothing is going to change in its environment and that it will no
longer need to make significant adjustments. This may work for the
sea squirt, but human beings can’t afford to follow suit.
6   TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH



                    The Collective IQ Paradigm

    Our society is changing rapidly. Intellectual intelligence (IQ) and
    emotional intelligence (EQ) are necessary but not sufficient in order
    to thrive in this world. Increasingly, we are expected to be able to
    harness the power of the group or network to achieve objectives.
    Collaborative intelligence, or CQ, has become increasingly important.
    The term “collaborative intelligence” was coined by William Isaacs
    in his book, Dialogue and the Art of Thinking Together. He defines
    CQ as the ability to build, contribute to and manage the power found
    in networks of people.
        The development of our collaborative intelligence requires us
    to embrace a new paradigm. This new paradigm involves viewing
    all living things as deeply connected — an idea called “entangle-
    ment” in quantum mechanics. It follows then that there exists a
    collective intelligence to which we all contribute and to which,
    potentially, we all have access. Here is an example of what I mean.
    A room with 30 people in it, whose average age is 35, represents
    over 1000 years of life experience. Imagine the level of this team’s
    CQ when processes that are designed to tap into the vast amount
    of collective life experience of this group are put into place.
        Recently I worked with a group of mid-wives who had been
    experiencing some team challenges. In the past they had been a
    very resilient team, overcoming many significant challenges. More
    recently the team members had found themselves at odds with
    each other. Furthermore they had decided that a single individual
    was the source of all their problems. Rather than try to replace this
    person, the director decided to work with the team and attempt to
    resolve the issue. After the team had taken part in a facilitated dia-
    logue around some of the pressing issues, they began to realize that
    they had all played a part in the circumstances leading up to the
    problems. Once this fact surfaced, they were able to explore exercises
ASSUMPTIONS      7



that enabled them to reconnect as a team. During a follow up ses-
sion, it was reported that they had begun to function as a resilient
team once more. We cannot begin to embrace a new paradigm unless
we are willing to loosen our grip on the old one.


        Acts of individual leadership are ineffective for
        changing a paradigm. It is a community-building
        process that must challenge and transform a
        collective worldview.
        GOZDZ


    Strengthening our CQ is more than simply learning to get along
with each other. It requires that we begin to look at ourselves in a
new way. It demands that we see ourselves as deeply interconnected
with all of life and especially with all of humanity. Embracing this
way of thinking will have noticeable effects on how management
and teams operate. The significant challenges facing our societies
can be overcome if we embrace our deep connection and then
act accordingly.
    The pressing issue is how do we tap into the CQ we all need as
individuals and teams to meet the challenges of the future? At the
most fundamental level, natural systems, of which we are a part, are
cooperative rather than competitive. Competition takes place within
the larger context of a highly cooperative system. In this way CQ is
already a part of nature. As human beings, we express our collabo-
rative intelligence in certain places, especially when we are placed
in extremely challenging situations. Fire fighters, police officers, and
emergency response teams, for example, report high levels of closely
cooperative synchronized team behavior when things get tough.
These are examples of CQ coming to the surface and enabling teams
to behave resiliently. Throughout this book we will discover that
CQ is a central tenet of all resilient systems, teams, and individuals.
8   TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH



                     Assumptions and Behaviors

            If you try to change your behavior without first
            changing the underlying structure causing that
            behavior, you will not succeed. This is because
            structure determines behavior, not the other
            way around.
            ROBERT FRITZ


    One of the most persistent assumptions about business is that
    we can only prosper with a strong sense of competitiveness. Other
    companies in the same industry are viewed as the enemy to be
    beaten, out-maneuvered or destroyed. When we look closely at
    natural systems, however, we find a different story.
        Fritjof Capra put it like this in The Web of Life, “Detailed study of
    ecosystems over the past decades has shown quite clearly that most
    relationships between living organisms are essentially cooperative
    ones, (my emphasis) characterized by coexistence and interdepend-
    ence, and symbiotic in various degrees. Although there is competition,
    it usually takes place within a wider context of cooperation, so that
    the larger system is kept in balance.” If natural systems hold the
    key to developing our own resilience, then we have to take a new
    look at the role competition and cooperation play in human systems
    (politics, business, etc.).



            GO DEEPER
            Natural Systems: www.anthillsite.com
ASSUMPTIONS     9



                      Water — What Water?

Within the Zen tradition there is a story about two fish. One fish
tells the other of a strange experience it had.
    “I was swimming along and noticed a tasty morsel. I grabbed it,
but a sharp, shiny, hard thing got stuck in my mouth. Suddenly, I
was pulled from the water and the next thing I knew I was in a whole
new world. A great big thing grabbed me and pulled the sharp, shiny,
hard thing from my mouth and threw me back into the water.”
    The other fish looks shocked and asks, “Water? What water?”
    The last animal to discover water would be a fish, just as we are
the last ones to discover our assumptions about reality because we
are so immersed in them.


        ANY assumption can be made, but not all
        assumptions are created equal, and from their
        deductions you will know them.
        JOHN EIDSER, GLOBAL BRAIN




            Assumption — Checking as a Skill

The first of the seven skills that develop CQ and build resilient teams
is checking and adjusting individual and team assumptions.
Assumptions play such a central role in day-to-day life that, for the
vast majority of time, we never notice them. One of the most impor-
tant things assumptions do, however, is act as building blocks for
our beliefs. There are a number of ways to change beliefs. One of
the most effective ways is check and adjust the assumptions that
support the belief.
    It would be impossible to make it through the day without rely-
ing on some assumptions. Without them, life becomes much too
10   TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH



     complex. Doing the simplest things would become a series of com-
     plex decisions of nightmare proportions. Therefore, we have to make
     assumptions in order to get through each day.


                          How Did I Get Here?

     We have all experienced the phenomenon of driving to work and won-
     dering “How did I get here?” It is almost as if we were in a trance as
     we drove the well-known route. We were running on auto-pilot. Auto-
     pilot offers advantages and disadvantages. This highly-automated
     piece of our behavior may bring us predictable results, and some of
     those results may be highly desirable. Other results may be unwanted
     and problematic. For example, the auto-pilot you use to drive to
     your office enables you to plan the day ahead as you navigate the
     traffic. The downside is that when adjustments to the route are
     required — such as picking up a colleague on the way to work, it
     may not get done. Your auto-pilot wins over and your colleague loses
     out. Other times, you are the one who loses out. How many times
     have you found yourself driving to work when you had intended to
     make a trip to the store?
         Individuals are not the only ones who can run on auto-pilot;
     teams can do it too. Supported by assumptions that go unchecked
     and unchallenged, teams can continue to run the same old routines
     for a long time before anyone notices what’s happening. If the same
     old routine is getting you and your team the results you need, then
     that’s a good thing. If not, then maybe it is time to lift the hood and
     have a peek into what’s driving the team’s behavior.
         We all have experienced times when seemingly endless rounds of
     meetings produce no noticeable results. We find ourselves thinking that
     we’ve wandered into “Dilbert-land”. The definition of insanity is doing
     the same thing over and over again expecting a different result. Many
     times the problem lies with unstated and unchallenged assumptions.
ASSUMPTIONS     11



             Good Servants But Bad Masters

Everyone I meet professionally for the first time receives a piece of
string (it’s threaded through my business card). The piece of string
acts as a reminder for the story I share when they ask me what the
piece of string represents.
    I grew up on a 22-acre farm in the County of Down, Northern
Ireland. When I was ten, my Dad sent me down to one of the pastures
with a portable electric fence. He told me to fence the cows into a
corner of the field. A few days later he came back and told me to go
and take the fence down. “Use it to section off the bulls in the lower
pasture,” he said. “But Dad,” I said, “what about the cows?” He said,
“Oh just put a piece of string around them.” I said, “A little piece
of string isn’t going to hold in a whole herd of cows.” “Just do as
you’re told,” was his reply.
So — liking life — I did as
I was told and replaced the        What shocks me is that as
electric fence with a piece        intelligent human beings we
of string.                         often allow ourselves to be
    A few days later I went        fenced in by a piece of string.
to check on the cows. They
were standing in an area of
scruffy, beaten down grass — hardly anything worth eating. All
around them grew lush, green grass, and the only thing separat-
ing them from it was that flimsy piece of string and their belief that
that piece of string would “shock” them.
    What shocks me is that as intelligent human beings we often
behave exactly like those cows. We allow ourselves to be fenced in
by a piece of string — our beliefs. Rather than enabling us to live
our lives fully, our beliefs often dictate what we can and cannot do.
This is why I say that beliefs make good servants but bad masters.
One of the most common mistakes we make is holding our beliefs
12   TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH



     to be true while refusing to accept all evidence to the contrary. This
     is the very definition of dogma.


                          Software of the Brain

     Running in the background, beliefs (and the assumptions that help
     create them) act like the software of the brain. We don’t notice them
     most of the time and usually only become aware of them when they
     begin to cause trouble, for example, when they prevent us from
     achieving things we really want. In presentations, I ask people to
     put their hands up if they like to be wrong. Understandably, there
     isn’t much response to that request. The truth is, we all like to be
     right, and this is just as true when it comes to our beliefs. Like some-
     thing to which we have habituated, we no longer notice them (water?
     What water?). We begin to treat those beliefs as if they were essen-
     tial truths that really exist, rather than relative points of view that
     we adopted at some point in the past.
         When your computer begins to cause trouble, once hardware
     issues have been ruled out, you then check the software running on
     the computer. So it is with our beliefs and assumptions. Just as there
     are typical things that cause software to malfunction, so there are
     certain types of beliefs that typically cause trouble.



                       Limitations of Our Beliefs

     As remarkable as it is, even the human brain has its limitations. When
     we examine the types of beliefs that typically cause us trouble, we
     find they fall into three categories. We will briefly explore each of
     these now.
ASSUMPTIONS     13



                          Hopelessness

In this case, the desired change is not possible, there is no hope.
Take, for example, a physically handicapped man, who wishes to
climb Mount Everest. Each time he thinks about the task, he also
thinks no one who has his physical challenge has ever done it,
so it’s probably not possible — a wonderful dream, but hopeless.
Another way of thinking about this type of belief is that the desired
change is not possible for anyone; there is literally no hope.


                          Helplessness

In this instance, the desired change is possible for other people, just
not for you. Our physically handicapped man may hear about some-
one else with a similar physical challenge who has climbed Everest.
In this case, however, he might choose to believe that it was possible
because someone else has achieved it, but he would not be capable.
In other words, it’s possible, but he feels personally helpless.


                         Worthlessness

Finally, in this situation the desired change is possible and you are
capable of achieving it, but you are not worth it; you do not deserve
the change. This is possibly the most tragic of the three types of
limiting beliefs. In the case of the physically challenged person con-
templating the ascent of Everest, he may have evidence that it is
possible and that he does, indeed, have a chance at success. However,
he doesn’t think he is worthy or deserves to achieve it and so doesn’t
try (or try as hard as he should).
    If you listen to people talk about their shattered hopes and
unfulfilled desires, you will notice that most of the limiting beliefs
in operation fall into one of these three categories. The point in
14   TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH



     categorizing the beliefs is that if you can spot the type of limiting
     belief in operation, you can make the appropriate adjustments to
     overcome it.


                    Challenging These Limitations

     A simple way to dislodge a hopelessness belief is to “act as if” it
     were possible. Roger Bannister acted as if it were possible to break
     the four-minute mile barrier. He also trained accordingly, rather than
     sitting around waiting to see what would happen. In this case actions
     really can change beliefs.
         In the case of a limiting belief related to helplessness, one of the
     best ways to address it is by searching out a counter example. That is,
     look for those who have already achieved the thing — after all, they
     are living proof that the objective is attainable. Looking to our heroes
     (sporting or otherwise) can be useful for finding appropriate models.
         Beliefs related to worthlessness require that we check the deeper
     reasons we feel unworthy of the desired goal and address that issue.
     Self-esteem is often underestimated in relation to the powerful effect
     it can have on our performance. Negative messages received when
     we were children often determine what we think we deserve and,
     until they have been checked and adjusted, will continue to do so.



                             The Santa Clause

     If you grew up in North America, you probably believed in Santa
     Claus when you were a child. This is “beliefs stage one” where you
     believe everything that you are told. As you grew older you discov-
     ered, usually from older kids, that Santa Claus didn’t exist. This is
     “beliefs stage two” where you realize that some things you are told
     are true and some are not, and it is your task to decide which is
ASSUMPTIONS     15



which. As you got older and had children of your own, you probably
told them about Santa Claus and helped them create that fantasy.
This is “beliefs stage three” — you have now become Santa Claus
(which is why I call it the Santa “Clause”). You realize at this point
that some beliefs can be useful, even if they
are created. At another level, you may even
realize that all beliefs are created. Creating        All beliefs are
the belief in Santa Claus was a beneficial            created and,
thing. The belief enables children and parents        therefore, can
to take part in a centuries-old tradition involv-     be changed.
ing ritual, mystery, and fantasy. However,
holding onto the original kind of belief about
Santa Claus (that he is a real person with a very unusual sleigh and
so forth) into adulthood would not be very useful.



                  Reality Is What We Notice

What we assume about life has a fundamental effect on the way we
interact with it. Everyone knows at least one person who has a very
negative view of life. Such people expect the worst and often they
are not disappointed. Their success in predicting the worst is based
in part on the connection between intention and attention. That is,
our attention is directed by our intention. There is a portion of our
nervous system that plays a role in connecting intention and attention.
It is called the ascending reticular activating system (aRAS) and it is
located in the brainstem. The aRAS acts as a pattern recognition sys-
tem and strongly affects the brain’s arousal. The way this part of the
brain works helps to explain how our thoughts manifest into reality.
    Best-selling author Gary Zukav explains the process succinctly, as
follows: “Reality is what we take to be true. What we take to be true
is what we believe. What we believe is based upon our perceptions.
16   TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH



     What we perceive depends upon what we look for. What we look
     for depends upon what we think. What we think depends upon what
     we perceive. What we perceive determines what we believe. What we
     believe determines what we take to be true. What we take to be true
     is our reality.”
         In other words, the assumptions we make about reality play a
     large part in creating that reality. We make so many assumptions that
     we cease to be aware of them. Becoming aware of the basic assump-
     tions we use can be a tricky process. Seeing through our assumptions
     about reality is an important part of becoming enlightened in many
     of the great spiritual traditions such as Sufi and Zen. There, stories
     and puzzles (known as koans in Zen) are used to enable students to
     break out of limiting assumptions about reality. The story line of the
     movie The Matrix (based on the very same ideas and the principles
     themselves) dates back thousands of years.



             GO DEEPER
             Assumptions about Reality: www.antihillsite.com




          What Do Assumptions Have to Do with CQ?

     What we assume about ourselves, life, and other people has a tremen-
     dous impact on how we operate as human beings. Consider the
     central assumption about resilience — that we are all inherently
     resilient. This assumes everyone has resilience as an onboard capac-
     ity. Making this assumption affects the attitude we take toward
     ourselves and the way we treat others. In turn this affects the level
     of CQ we can tap into.
         Many organizations already operate on this assumption of
     resilience with regard to employee development. An example is
ASSUMPTIONS     17



Appreciative Inquiry (AI). AI is an organizational development
approach that assumes it is more effective to concentrate on what
is working within an individual, team, and company, rather than on
what is not working. A core principle within the Appreciative Inquiry
model is questioning assumptions. Practitioners of AI report that
once the questioning process has begun, people become inspired to
question other previously unquestioned assumptions. Such question-
ing is a crucial first step to any real change within organizations.
The shared assumptions of a group or team have a very strong effect.
Helping a team become aware of its shared assumptions can be the
single most important source of positive change. Some organiza-
tional development programs bring in their own processes and
assumptions. Rather than layering on another set, it makes more
sense to discover what assumptions (useful or not-so-useful) have
created the system that is in operation now.



            Self-Fulfilling Prophets and Losses

Assumptions easily become self-fulfilling prophesies (or profits and
losses when they operate within a business). They act as filters on
our perceptions, and we literally see what we have programmed our-
selves to look for. In turn, our perceptions of events will determine
our own responses. Our responses have specific effects and usually
provide further evidence to support the original assumption.
    For example, suppose you suspected someone (made an assump-
tion about them) of being dishonest. This assumption would cause
you to filter all your observations of that person for dishonest
behaviors. This affects the other person, who may wish to reassure
you that he is honest. The more the person tries to convince you of
his trustworthiness, the more you become convinced that he has
something to hide. The original assumption about his dishonesty
18   TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH



     enabled you to redefine the meaning of his behavior. Voilá — the
     power of self-fulfilling prophesies!


                             Figure 1.1
                 The Self-Fulfilling Prophesy Cycle


             Assumptions                            Perceptions




                                Self-fulfilling
                                 Prophesy
         Evidence                                           Events




                                Assumptions




           What Do You Believe about the Problem?

     It is very tempting, when faced with a problem, to stop and ask
     “What do I or we need to do to solve this problem?” This question
     addresses the challenge at the level of behavior and, although there
     is no harm in this question, it does not get at the deeper issues. A
     more fundamental and useful question to ask is, “What do I need to
     believe in order to solve this problem?” Maybe we are having diffi-
     culty with someone who reports to us or with someone to whom we
     report. It is useful to ask, “What assumptions am I making about
ASSUMPTIONS     19



this situation/person?” Often, we discover that something we are
assuming is helping to create the problem in the first place.
    It’s easy for us to develop assumptions that limit our resilience.
For example: “this team won’t support me” (so you never ask for it);
“that person hates me” (so we look for evidence to support that);
“I can’t achieve this objective” (which affects how much effort we
put in). I am sure you can think of many more you use with yourself
and others.



              Gary McPherson — A Testament
               to the Power of Assumptions

Gary McPherson’s life is a testament to the power of assumptions.
Gary was a fun-loving, athletic nine-year-old boy when, in 1955, he
was struck down with Polio.
    For the next 34 years of his life, Gary would live in hospital and
would require the use of a ventilator that would allow him to breath.
In the early days of his illness, many of the medical staff around him
continued to believe that Gary would not survive. Yet over the years,
Gary continued to defy the odds, even as he lost many of his friends
from the ward in which he lived. He discovered that some people
with his condition had learned to “frog breath”, a method of draw-
ing air into the lungs without using the diaphragm. Gary identifies
this as the single most important thing he did that enabled him to
regain a certain amount of his independence. No longer dependent
on a ventilator to breathe for 24 hours at a time, Gary had managed
to wrestle more freedom for himself and he left the hospital at age
43 while continuing to use a wheelchair for mobility.
    Gary explains that in the early stages of his hospitalization,
he heard that life expectancy for someone with his condition was
five years. He recalls living his life in five-year increments and
20   TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH



     being surprised when he reached his fourteenth and nineteenth
     birthdays. By this time, he explains, he felt pretty good and began
     to think, “well I’m still alive, maybe I should think about doing
     some things”.
         When talking to Gary, you quickly get a sense of someone who
     is focused on what he can do, as opposed to what he can’t. The
     assumptions Gary uses are based around possibility and persist-
     ence. He confesses that he negotiates with himself around what he
     can shoot for and then decides upon the increments for which he
     will aim.
         Gary didn’t set out as a 19-year old, almost totally paralyzed by
     Polio, to become the Executive Director of the Canadian Centre
     for Social Entrepreneurship. Nor did he envision himself playing a
     key role in shaping services for people with disabilities in Alberta.
     Serving eight years as the President of the Canadian Wheelchair
     Sports Association (CWSA) was not on his mind either. In the early
     years of his illness, Gary probably never imagined he would become
     an adjunct professor or guest lecturer with an Honorary Doctor
     of Law degree. However, his assumptions about his situation
     and the options open to him supported each small step toward an
     amazing career.
         Gary is now married with two teenage children and talks about
     entering politics. He says that because his kids are older, he has
     more time on his hands. It is a truly humbling experience to sit and
     chat with Gary as he talks about plans for the future. Most of them
     are centered upon what he can help others achieve.
         In conversation, Gary is quick to mention the powerful effect
     assumptions have had in his life. The assumption that by serving
     others we heal ourselves has helped Gary to make significant contri-
     butions to society. Along with that is the assumption that you can find
     humor in everything. It is difficult to sit very long with Gary with-
     out being drawn into his expansive sense of humor. His philosophy of
ASSUMPTIONS     21



life has a central assumption that has become a mantra for Gary —
“You see what you look for — so choose carefully what you look for.”
    Amid all the committees and commitments Gary undertook he
still found time to write the story about his battle and eventual vic-
tory against tremendous odds. With Every Breath I Take sheds light
on the heart and spirit of a remarkable man.



        GO DEEPER
        Gary McPherson: www.anthillsite.com



A great deal of anecdotal evidence demonstrates that people are
able to sustain themselves in challenging conditions and situations.
There are definable traits that can be identified, and we all have
them. This book explores a specific set of skill-building exercises
that make it possible for us to develop these traits further. In the
process we expand our CQ.



               Assumptions About Resilience

Since this chapter is devoted to an exploration of assumptions, it
makes sense to state clearly some of the assumptions that underpin
the approach taken in this book.


  • Change is a constant process.
  • Our ability to adapt to change is the central role of resiliency.
  • Resiliency is the ability to adapt, bounce back, and recover in
    harsh or challenging conditions.
  • Resiliency is an innate capacity that we all have.
  • Certain definable traits make up our capacity for resilience.
22   TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH



       • Traits of resilience have been identified and we are able to
         strengthen them further with specific exercises.
       • Resilient teams are built from resilient individuals.
       • None of us are as smart as all of us — a resilient team further
         strengthens its individual members.
       • Everyone wants to make a difference with their lives. Work is
         a great place for that to happen.


         Exercises that challenge you to re-assess what you assume about
     certain things will enable you and your team to become aware of
     the dangers of auto-pilot thinking.
         Just as limiting assumptions can cause all sorts of problems to
     the individual and team, a well thought-out and consciously chosen
     assumption can be equally liberating and empowering. Prior to
     May 6, 1954, it was assumed that the four-minute mile was impos-
     sible. Roger Banister forced everyone to revise that assumption. The
     revised assumption generated a new belief.


             [Red Queen] “Let’s consider your age to begin
             with — how old are you?”
             “I’m seven and a half, exactly.”
             “You needn’t say ‘exactly’,” the Queen remarked.
             “I can believe it without that. Now I’ll give you
             something to believe. I’m just one hundred and one,
             five months and a day.”
             “I can’t believe that!” said Alice.
             “Can’t you?” the Queen said in a pitying tone. “Try
             again: draw a long breath, and shut your eyes.”
             Alice laughed. “There’s no use trying,” she said,
             “one can’t believe impossible things.”
             “I daresay you haven’t had much practice,” said the
             Queen. “When I was your age, I always did it for
ASSUMPTIONS     23



         half an hour a day. Why, sometimes I’ve believed as
         many as six impossible things before breakfast.”
         LEWIS CARROLL, THROUGH THE LOOKING GLASS


    Joseph Campbell, authority on world mythology, once stated
that many people reach the top of the ladder only to find it leaning
against the wrong wall. I would like to add that there are two other
types of ladders: the ladder that was chosen too short for the desired
effect (right wall, ladder not long enough) and the ladder lying on
the ground (uncommitted to anything, it serves no one, and may
actually trip someone.) Consciously choosing beliefs and assump-
tions that will serve you in your
life is like choosing a ladder. It is
important to lean it against the        You need to ask yourself,
right wall and aim it in the right      “Is your ladder leaning
direction for you.                      against the right wall
    Once positioned, ask your-          and is it long enough?”
self if the ladder is long enough.
Is your belief strong enough to
enable you to achieve your goal? Have you committed yourself to
achieving the goal? Have you actually leaned your ladder against the
wall? In other words, have you committed to do something about
the belief you have chosen?



       Good Questions Rather than Easy Answers

Asking questions is something few of us developed as a skill as
we grew up. For most of us, our educational experience consisted
of being told to remember the right answer. The focus was clearly
on the production of answers to a relatively fixed set of questions
(tests and exams). There was little attention given to the creation of
24   TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH



     good questions. Yet, throughout history, practically all of the major
     scientific breakthroughs came from people who were fascinated with
     a particular question and all the possible answers, rather than a
     search for one right answer. Einstein asking himself what it would
     be like to ride a beam of light brought him to one of the greatest
     discoveries of the 20th century — the theory of relativity.
         Using the right set of assumptions has a huge impact on our
     level of resilience. Asking good questions is an important step toward
     checking our assumptions about our own resilience. Testing what
     assumptions are presently running means asking the right questions.
     Questions direct our curiosity and our energy.
         Best-selling author Peter Block claims that “we define…our
     future through the questions we choose to address.” In chapter 4 we
     will look at the topic of questions in much greater detail and more
     specifically how they can enrich our communication (and, therefore,
     connection) with our team.


                      Hitting a “Whole” in One

     Increasingly, people are seeking fulfillment in the non-material, psy-
     chological, and spiritual aspects of life. This movement up Maslow’s
     hierarchy of needs applies to life in general, but also to work.
     More and more employees and team members wish to “transform
     themselves” personally as well as professionally.
         There is an outstanding opportunity for companies who are
     willing to offer their employees training and development opportu-
     nities that help grow the whole person. It could also be viewed as
     a chance for the company to evolve their people from the inside out.
         Many companies have already seized the opportunity to grow
     their people in this way. In Nancy and Kevin Freiburg’s book, Guts,
     John Mackey, CEO of the Whole Foods Company, is quoted as say-
     ing, “I don’t see any conflict between wearing our hearts on our
ASSUMPTIONS   25



sleeves and running a company that is serious about profits. In fact
we feel there is a profound synergy between the two. Both are about
responsibility.” By walking its talk, Whole Foods has gained a place
on Fortune’s list of the 100 best companies to work for in the U.S.
six years running.



        WHERE WE’VE BEEN
        • The assumptions we make deeply affect our personal and
          professional lives.
        • Our beliefs are created from our assumptions.
        • Group assumptions are at play within teams at all times.
        • To create sustainable, lasting change, we must identify the
          assumptions behind our behaviors.
        • All beliefs are created, therefore all beliefs can be
          changed.
        • Good questions are a great way to challenge and change
          limiting beliefs.
        • Successful business operations and teams are based on
          useful assumptions/beliefs.



        WHERE WE’RE GOING
        The assumptions we make and the beliefs that radiate out
        from them have a profound effect on the way we see the
        world. Our perceptions are colored by what we think. The
        next chapter will show how perception plays a central role
        in the unconscious processes of resilient individuals. We will
        also look at how important perception is in building resilient
        teams and how developing CQ relies on how we see just as
        much as what we see.
26   TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH



     Questions to consider are:


      • What assumptions could you make that would transform your
        own resilience and that of your team?
      • What shared assumptions would enable your team/place of
        work to become an adaptive, vibrant center for human and
        business growth?


        The following exercises will enable you and your team to explore
     important questions such as these.
ASSUMPTIONS   27




                  CQ Tool                 1

                  Checking Assumptions




Checking assumptions can be a very important first step
before a team launches into a project together. In many cases
it negates the need to stop later and discover that members’
assumptions are working at odds with each other.
    The following exercise enables team members to explore
the assumptions that may be in operation as the team gathers
(metaphorically speaking) around a task or project.


Note: for purposes of this exercise a context has been chosen.
You may wish to use this as a “practice session” and move onto
a more pertinent issue once you and your team feel they have
mastered the stages and process.


STAGE ONE: The team is divided into groups of four to eight.
Each group places a piece of flip chart paper upon the wall in
landscape format. Divide the page into three equal columns. The
heading “Assumptions” is written at the top of the middle column.


STAGE TWO: Give the project team the task of brainstorm-
ing a list of assumptions for planning a team retreat (e.g., that
it must be out of town, it must be held during weekdays, etc.).
A specific and short time period (five to ten minutes) is allowed
for this stage.
28   TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH




       STAGE THREE: The team is asked to choose between three
       and five of the most interesting or controversial assumptions
       and circle them (one minute for this task).


       STAGE FOUR: Write the word “Valid” into the header of the
       right-hand column. They are now asked to use the chosen
       assumptions to explore whether the implications/consequences
       of these assumptions are valid. In short, answer the question
       “What if they were valid?” (five to seven minutes for this task).


       STAGE FIVE: The group is asked to place the word “Invalid”
       as the heading for the final (left-hand) column. Exploring the
       same chosen assumptions, this time answering the question
       “What are the implications/consequences if these assumptions
       were invalid?” (five to seven minutes for this step).


       STAGE SIX: The group is asked to reflect upon the exercise
       and comment upon what they noticed. Some questions the
       facilitator can use at this point are:


         • What did you notice about your own assumptions?
         • Were you surprised by some of the assumptions other
           people had?
         • If you had the opportunity to explore the invalid options
           of assumptions you agreed with what effect did that have?
         • How could this process help teams form strategies
           around a project?
2


                    Perception




          It’s never enough just to tell people about
            some new insight… Instead of pouring
         knowledge into people’s heads; you need to
           help them grind a new set of eyeglasses
           so they can see the world in a new way.

                       JOHN SEELY BROWN




In chapter 1, we explored how assumptions affect the adaptability
and resilience of you and your team. We also considered how relative
perception really is. Our reality is based upon what we notice, which
in turn is heavily based upon our assumptions. Our assumptions pro-
vide stability to the reality that we create on a moment-by-moment
basis. The process is largely unconscious. However, even when we
do change our assumptions about things, we retain our old ways of
looking at things. We continue to wear our old prescription as it were.
    This chapter is about how we look at things, about how
our perception affects our resilience. We will also explore how our
30   TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH



     perception and awareness affect our ability to collaborate with
     others. In other words, how we perceive others will determine
     whether we choose to collaborate or not. To this extent our percep-
     tions determine our collaborative intelligence.
         In this chapter we will examine five important elements of
     perception.


      1. Attention can be harnessed and focused — our attention
         affects our experience of our life.
      2. Perception as an active process — what we see depends on
         where we look.
      3. Filters can be changed — they select the information that
         reaches the conscious mind.
      4. Perspectives change our awareness — the perspective we
         take determines what we see.
      5. Frames can help us become more flexible — how we frame
         our perceptions affects the meaning we form.


             Difficulties strengthen the mind, as labour does
             the body.
             SENECA


         Changing perceptions has had a huge impact on my own life. In
     1995, while living in Northern Ireland, I was involved in a road accident
     that almost cost me my life. I was standing beside my car on a narrow
     country road, when a speeding car skidded on black ice and rammed
     into my parked car. The force of the crash pushed my car over top
     of me. Miraculously I slid under my car as it glided over the road —
     I “came to” lying underneath it. It was still on its wheels and I had
     somehow slipped through the space between the car and the ground.
         Months later the full impact of the accident was discovered. A
     disc in my back had been torn apart by the injury and a consultant
PERCEPTION     31



was explaining to me that I had degenerative disc disease. I was
told that the condition “will only get worse”. (Now, there is a nice
belief system.) He offered to speed up the process for me to receive
a handicapped sticker!
    Maybe you can imagine what I felt like as I walked (painfully)
out of his office. What the consultant had said was slowly sinking
in. He had inadvertently helped me form a perception of myself as
a “cripple”. I mentally formed a long list of things I could no longer
do because of my injury. A number of years passed as I lived my life
surrounded by things I couldn’t do because of my back.
    I was living a “half life”, both personally and professionally. What
I didn’t realize was that the assumptions I had created as a result of
my conversations with medical staff had left me with very strong
(and limiting) filters through which I perceived my life. There was
no particular moment of “enlightenment”. Instead, an evolution of
frustration brought me to a point where I realized I had to change.
    I decided I needed to do something to prove to myself that I was
capable of moving beyond my injury. If I threw my heart over the
fence, I thought, the rest of me might well follow.
    Then one day I heard of a group of people planning a hike in the
Andes in Chile, South America. This had been a life-long ambition
of mine. Images of the glaciers and watching condors sail over head
occupied my mind.
    The next day I went to see a personal trainer in the local gym.
I asked him if he knew anyone with my sort of injury that still
worked out. He said he had quite a few clients. I signed up and
started with small exercises. At that time I could not stand up for
longer than ten minutes without my right leg going numb and intense
pain in my lower back. With great professional advice from Paul, my
trainer, and lots of physical training on my behalf I was able to make
the trip to Chile. The transition from “cripple to climber” was brought
about by a change in how I perceived myself. Sounds simple!
32   TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH



     However I had to do a number of things to help the change take
     place in my self-perception. I realized that wishing alone would not
     change anything.



                                1. Attention

     Three pounds of tofu hidden inside a bone box; you could eat it with
     a spoon and it’s the most important thing in your life. It’s your brain
                                    of course and its only connection with
                                    the outside world is a set of senses that
     Q: Three pounds of             feed it information. The human nerv-
     tofu in a bone box?            ous system is amazing. Through our
     A: Your brain.                 five senses we process approximately
                                    11 million pieces of information every
                                    second. Our eyes send 10 million sig-
     nals to the brain each second and together have more computing
     power than six Cray computers connected together.
         So of what is our brain capable? Researchers in this field have
     attempted to calculate how much information we can process
     consciously, but by all estimates it is not much. The most opti-
     mistic figure is 40 pieces out of the 11 million pieces per second (Tor
     Norretranders, The User Illusion).


                               Up Periscope

     One way of thinking about how this vast amount of information
     gets filtered to a small fraction is to think about our conscious mind
     as a periscope. Our lives are effectively made up of those 40 pieces
     multiplied by the number of seconds we live. Where we point the
     periscope determines our awareness. The auto-pilots mentioned in
     chapter 1 come into play here. They determine, to a large degree,
PERCEPTION    33



where we habitually direct our attention. In order to tap into greater
depths of our own resilience, we will have to revisit these old pat-
terns of perceiving; check the settings on the auto-pilots. Are they
optimal for where we want to end up?
    All great athletes know that their performance is highly depend-
ent on where they place their attention. A good sports coach spends
a lot of time working in this area, helping the athlete to harness his
or her attention. The old eastern expression “energy flows where
attention goes”, implies that our energy follows our attention. What
we attend to grows and proliferates. Often we believe that it is the
things we are not attending to that cause us trouble. Frequently it
is the other way around. So when you or your team is faced with a
particular challenge it may be useful to stop and ask, “What are we
attending to that has helped us create this problem?”
    “Rubber–necking” is a great example of this phenomenon. It is
defined as the tendency to look at accidents to the extent that you
become one. According to the American Automobile Association,
between 25 and 55% of all road accidents are caused by distracted
drivers. We have all seen other people do it and, in all probability,
we have been guilty of doing it many times ourselves. We give our
attention to an accident we are
passing and don’t attend properly
to the road ahead. With only so          “What are we attending
much attention at our disposal,          to that has helped us
splitting our attention means we         create this problem?”
have less available to devote to
driving our own car. This princi-
ple is also important when we are dealing with challenges either
individually or in teams. Directing our attention is vital when we
need to have our energy flow in a certain direction.
    Questions are a great way to focus your attention. You can help
your team members direct their attention by asking the right
34   TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH



     questions. One of the differences between a good team leader
     and a great one is that a good team leader asks some good ques-
     tions (rather than providing easy answers) and a great team leader
     asks great questions (and supports the team in forming their
     own answers).
         Although there is a large unconscious component in how we
     organize our attention, we can, with conscious control, move our
     attention. Meditative practices are really attention-training systems.
     This is one of the reasons meditation can be so helpful in building
     emotional balance. You are effectively training yourself to control
     your own attention. Our society has become a noisy place to live
     in — with many distractions and advertisers clamoring to catch and
     hold our attention for as long as possible. Our attention is a pre-
     cious resource that we must look after carefully otherwise it can be
     hijacked or dissipated by external forces.


             Unless a person knows how to give order to his or
             her thoughts, attention will be attracted to whatever
             is most problematic at the moment: it will focus
             on some real or imaginary pain, on recent grudges
             or long-term frustrations. Entropy is the normal
             state of consciousness — a condition that is neither
             useful nor enjoyable.
             MIHALY CSIKSZENTMIHALYI, FLOW


         The quote from Mihaly Csikszentmihalyi conveys the need to
     use our attention as a form of energy. By channeling attention toward
     something useful, we are doing two things: 1) Not allowing any of our
     valuable energy to be wasted on harmful or wasteful activities; and
     2) we are bringing it all to bear upon the important task of creating
     what we do want to happen.
PERCEPTION    35



        GO DEEPER
        Attention: www.anthillsite.com



    Team mission statements can serve the same function. They help
the team members harness the collective attention around specific
objectives, drawing people around a common purpose.
    Many businesses go to a great deal of trouble to create visions
for their company. One of the benefits of a business vision is that
it focuses attention on what is important to the company. Ideally
the business vision orchestrates the attention (and energy) of the
whole organization.
    Our resilience is dependent, in part, upon how we use our energy.
Therefore how we organize attention will have a large impact on our
resilience. Mihaly Csikszentmihalyi, in his book Flow: The Psychology
of Optimal Experience, goes so far to say that “attention is our most
important tool in the task of improving the quality of experience.”
When I think of directing attention what comes to my mind are
images of cairns (piles of stones) that people build to show the path
up a mountain. In a similar way the Inuit people have used special
rock formations called “Inukshuk” for centuries as a way of pointing
the traveler’s attention along a safe route.
36   TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH



         This chapter is about building cairns to harness our own atten-
     tion with the purpose of establishing a more optimal experience. By
     marshaling our attention we will be more resilient. Exploring this
     process as a team will enable your team to harness its collective
     attention. The result will be a more resilient team.



                     2. Perception Is Projection

     How we see things has a great deal to do with how we feel about
     things. When we have strong emotions about something we often
     project these outward onto events that are occurring around us.
     For example, if I become angry about something in the morning,
     I may notice many other things during my day that also make me
     angry. Emotions have powerful affects on what we notice. It is
     a common misconception that perception is a passive process
     carried out by our senses. The scientific evidence points to per-
     ception being an active process closely tied to the flow of our
     emotions. Choosing how to view an event is one of the secrets
     of emotional mastery. (We will visit this topic in greater detail in
     chapter 3.)


             Enlightenment is waking up to the illusions
             contained in the belief we have been fed since birth:
             the belief that whether or not we are at peace
             depends upon what we have or do in the material
             world. It is discovering for oneself, as a personal
             experience of life, that whether or not we are at
             peace depends on our perception and interpretation
             of events.
             PETER RUSSELL
PERCEPTION    37



    When Captain Cook first arrived on the shores of what is now
North America, the Arawak Indians were reported to be unable to
see his ships. What they saw we will never know, however, the prin-
ciple has modern examples much closer to home. A young woman
who moved from the Philippines to North America did not recog-
nize that some of the people she was meeting had red hair (she had
never met someone with that color of hair in her home country). It
was such an uncommon sight in her native land that she was liter-
ally unable to “see it”. Months later she began to notice that some
people had a hair color that was new to her. She then began to notice
that even people she was very close to in her new country had red
hair. The distinction for red hair had not been important where she
had grown up and it took some time for her perceptual system to
rewire for its existence.
    These are rather dramatic examples of a process that is going
on inside each of us all the time. We see things when we are ready
to see them. This has an impact on how resilient we are. For exam-
ple, what might you not be seeing that is going on within your team
or life, for that matter? Are some limiting assumptions “invisible”
because we have not looked for them? Shifts in what we can see
come with shifts in our awareness. The exercises at the end of this
chapter are designed to cause shifts in your awareness. In doing so
they will enable you to see things differently.
    But what has the story of the invisible ships got to do with our
resilience? Maturana and Varela are well-known researchers in the
field of physiological psychology. They have demonstrated that our
perceptions are heavily biased toward the use of already-on-board
information. In other words our perceptions at any particular moment
in time are based on 20% new information — fresh from the envi-
ronment, so to speak — and a whooping 80% of onboard information.
The 80% represents information our nervous system has stored
about the environment. Our nervous system patches together the
38   TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH



     20% new and 80% old to create an experience of reality. Such a recipe
     of sources leaves us very prone to errors.
         Optical illusions are great examples of how easily our nervous
     system is fooled. Look at the illustration in Figure 2.1 and notice
     how easy it is to see a white triangle that is not there?


                             Figure 2.1
                   Can You See a White Triangle?




         The white triangle in Figure 2.1 is caused by a combination of
     the 80% of onboard information and the 20% new information. Our
     brain is attempting to make sense of the image and completes it
     for us. This particular illusion also can be used to explain how our
     assumptions help build our reality.
         Now in Figure 2.2, each of the little pies represents an assump-
     tion/belief that we have onboard. Our brains complete the picture for
     us and assure us that the space in the middle is reality. Within every
     team there is a “reality” being created by the shared assumptions of
     all its members. These in turn shape our perceptions that we then take
     to be our “reality”. If a team wishes to change its reality, then the
     assumptions and perceptions need to be examined first.
PERCEPTION   39



                        Figure 2.2
              Is the White Triangle Clearer?

                           Assumption 1




                            ‘Reality’




            Assumption 3                  Assumption 2




      What You See Is What You Choose to See

Being able to shift our attention from one perception to another
is known as “perceptual flexibility”. Perceptual flexibility can be
demonstrated using the necker tube experiment.


                        Figure 2.3
                 Necker Tube Experiment
40   TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH



         Look at Figure 2.3 and notice which plane seems to be the one
     closest to you. Now bring the other plane up into the foreground and
     allow the first plane you chose to fall into the background. Some of
     you may be struggling; others will find it a very simple task. With a
     little effort you will be able to switch the tube between the two per-
     spectives. Typically once someone has done this they will be able
     to choose the kind of tube they see. This is an example of how we
     express our perceptual flexibility.
         So far we’ve discovered that our reality is a construct. Physicists
     assure us that the concept of a solid physical world “out there” is,
     at best, a nice idea not supported by research. Philosopher and
     physicist David Bohm often said, “Thought creates the world and
     then says, ‘I didn’t do it.’”
         This can be unnerving and reassuring depending upon how you
     look at it (there’s that perspective thing again). The world we live
     in was created and is continually being created, to a large extent, by
     what goes on in our own nervous system. This further emphasizes
     the ancient wisdom that if we wish to change the world we must first
     change ourselves.
         And yet it is so tempting to point outward to all those things
     (including people) that are the cause of the problem. It’s even more
     attractive when it is a team of people that is not performing well or
     an organization that is functioning poorly. The implications for any-
     one in a position of leadership are pretty obvious so I won’t labor
     this point.



             GO DEEPER
             Perceptions: www.anthillsite.com
PERCEPTION     41



                     3. Filtered or Instant?

With the massive amount of information arriving at our nervous
system from the outside, it’s not surprising that our brain has to fil-
ter it. Effectively our nervous system is tuned to notice some things
and ignore a lot of others. The software running this process is
informed by filters for dangerous things. Once our basic needs —
things we can eat, drink or mate with — have been satisfied, or dan-
gers safely avoided, a different set of filters become active. These
are designed to search for ways that higher needs can be satisfied,
for example those related to social belonging and self-esteem.
Maslow’s hierarchy of needs shows one possible set of filters that
our nervous system can sort with.



        GO DEEPER
        Maslow’s Hierarchy of Needs: www.anthillsite.com



    We could view filters as one of the reasons goal-setting is such
a successful process. By setting goals we are setting intention. Setting
intention is like programming our nervous system to filter for things
that are important to our goals in the environment.
    Perceptual filters are just as active in the workplace as they are
outside it. They determine, to a great extent, how we perceive others.
There are a wide range of personality profiling systems that provide
insight into how people behave. When someone is profiled as an
“INFJ” or a “strong blue”, that label is used to explain why they are the
way they are. With this set of filters personality is very often conceived
as a static thing that changes little. The concept of character and
building character is often not factored into how companies manage
their human resources. In real life we know people do change, either
42   TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH



     through self-directed re-invention or as a result of events occurring
     in their lives (for example becoming a father or mother). Profiling
     systems, like all filters, can have liberating and restricting effects.



             GO DEEPER
             Building Character: www.anthillsite.com



         For a long time psychologists have known about the Fundamen-
     tal Attribution Error (FAE). When interpreting other people’s behavior
     FAE causes us to over-estimate the importance of basic personality
     traits and under-estimate the significance of situation and context.
     In this case the filter for personality traits is stronger than those for
     situation or context. Simply put, FAE causes us to form stereotypes
     and can lead to various forms of bias. Sexism, racism, and ageism
     are examples of biased perceptions. We tend to see what we want
     to see. Optical illusions are a great example of how unreliable our
     perceptions can be (see Figures 2.1 to 2.2).


             We do not see the world as it is, we see it as we are.
             MARCUS AURELIUS


         If we wish to change the world (or another person or a team)
     we must first ask, “what changes do we need to make within our-
     selves?” Choosing to look at a person or situation from a more
     productive perspective will automatically enhance our CQ. By look-
     ing for places where collaboration is possible we will find more.
         Being able to restructure our perceptions of reality is a fun-
     damental aspect of our own innate resilience. Social psychologists
     Daniel Gilbert and Timothy Wilson suggest that we have our own
     “psychological immune system” that acts to protect us from threats
     to our (psychological) well-being. “When it comes to maintaining a
PERCEPTION    43



sense of well-being,” they say, “each of us is the ultimate spin doc-
tor.” The ability to put a spin on our perceptions can just as easily
hold us stuck as liberate us. This is where assumptions (especially
about ourselves) have such an impact on perception.



              4. Perspective — What We Find
                Depends on Where We Look

Within the Sufi tradition there are many stories about a mystic joker
called Mulla Nasrudin. One such story relates how a good friend
finds the Mulla on a dark night on his hands and knees underneath
a street lamp crying. His friend enquires why he is crying. The Mulla
explains he has just lost his gold coins; his life savings are gone.
The friend immediately feels sorry for the Mulla and gets down on
the ground to help look for the coins. After a period of fruitless
searching the friend gets up and asks, “Mulla can you remember
where you were standing when you dropped your coins?” “Oh yes,”
replies the Mulla. “I was down there in that dark alleyway.” “Why
in heavens name are you looking under the street lamp then?” his
exasperated friend asks. “Because there is more light here,” the
Mulla replies.
    I find this story funny and tragic
at the same time. The Mulla is doing       Optimal perception is
exactly what we do so often. He is         as much about where
looking for the answer where there         you look as it is
is the most light rather than where he     about how you look.
really knows the answer lies. More
specifically I have often attempted
to find the cause of some problem in the environment — out there —
rather than looking where I knew the problem to lie — inside myself.
The knack to optimal perception is not only how we look but
also where.
44   TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH



                    It Looked Bigger in the Store

     Colin Turnbull, in his book The Forrest People, relates a story about
     a Pygmy he had befriended while traveling through the African con-
     tinent. This Pygmy had lived his entire life in the thick jungles of
     East Africa. Turnbull took the Pygmy to the Serengeti, the great
     open plains that border the jungle and showed him the wild life
     of the plains. The life-long forest dweller asked, “what insects are
     those?” referring to the water buffalo that were a long distance
     away. When he was informed that the “insects” were water buffalo
     he laughed out loud and called Turnbull a liar. The Pygmy’s per-
     ceptual world was biased so heavily toward the short distances of
     tropical jungle life that he could not conceive that these buffalo
     were real.
         The environment in which we live and work undoubtedly affects
     our capacity to see. We become accustomed to the perspectives
     available and don’t even realize that we have been conditioned.
     Therefore anything that enables us to change our perspectives will
     inevitably change what we are able to see.


                  An Elephant by Any Other Name

     This is not the only way that our perceptions can be restricted. I am
     sure you are familiar with the story of the six blind men around the
     elephant. This story originated in the eastern philosophical tradition
     and is a metaphor about reality and our own incomplete grasp of it.
     Each of the six blind men touch a different part of the elephant and
     the zoo keeper asks them what they think an elephant is. The blind
     man holding onto the trunk says that an elephant is a snake-like
     thing; the one holding onto the ear, a fan-like thing; and so it goes
     on, each of the blind men defining the elephant by the part of its
     anatomy with which they are familiar.
PERCEPTION     45



    From a psychological perspective we have at least three per-
spectives we can use to view our own reality. The first position is the
perspective of us standing in our own physical space, looking out
through our own eyes. This perspective is also associated with using
words like “I”, “me”, and “myself” when referring to our feelings.
When we describe an experience from the first position we tend to
re-experience the feelings of the event as if we were in our own body.
Typically when we think of the event we do not see ourselves in
images of the experience.
    The second position is being able to assume someone else’s
perspective in an experience. We take on the other’s perspective
seeing and hearing what they see and hear. When we explore this
perspective deeply we will also be able to imagine what they feel
like. This perspective is the basis of empathy and can be a power-
ful tool in discovering what it is like to be another person. One of the
greatest benefits of this perspective is that it enables us to under-
stand the other person’s world better and to communicate more
effectively with them. The experience is often described as “walking
a mile in their shoes”.
    The third position is characterized by the fact that we are not
associating with anyone in the situation. We are not assuming the
perspective of being inside our own body, nor are we imagining being
in the body of anyone else. The perspective is that of “a fly on the
wall” floating free from feelings and able to observe events and
the behaviors of ourselves and others in a totally detached way. This
is a very effective perspective to take when we wish to separate
ourselves from our own individual feelings and the feelings of others.
    None of the perspectives is any better than the other. They all
serve a useful function. People who explore all three perspectives
of an event are better informed than someone who explores only
one (typically first position). Exploring all the perspectives is also
described as using perceptual flexibility.
46   TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH



         Once again the three perceptual positions are:


      1. First Position — looking through our own eyes;
      2. Second Position — stepping into someone else’s shoes and
         looking through their eyes; and
      3. Third Position — viewing the situation as if we were a
         disembodied eye witness or “fly on the wall”.


         Most of us have a preferred perceptual position. For exam-
     ple first position is, understandably, the most common position.
     The perspectives involved with each of these positions are sim-
     ply perceiving habits. With them come habits of thought. The
     great news is that they can be changed and expanded with skill-
     building exercises.
         The difference in the quality of the three perspectives is signif-
     icant. First position obviously contains more information about the
     feelings we have associated with the event. You will have access to
     information about physical sensations, feelings, and even smells and
     tastes. If the event was positive, then first position enables us to
     access the positive feelings related to it. However if the event was
     negative, maybe first position is not the best place from which to
     process it. After all who wants to make themselves feel bad?


                         Choosing How to See

     I ran a stress management clinic for almost ten years in Northern
     Ireland. Many clients would explain that events in their past were
     making them feel depressed, scared, or sick. When I asked them a
     few questions about how they thought about those events, I discov-
     ered that most of the time the client was re-living the events and
     running them in their mind from first position. It was not surprising
     that they had to seek professional help. When I taught them the
PERCEPTION    47



perceptual positions exercise, they discovered they had options in
terms of from where they processed a memory (first, second or
third position).
    Asking our brain to change how it operates is a little like trying
to write with our non-dominant hand. For most of us the process
is messy at the start, but with
practice it becomes easier. The
pay-off for developing the ability       Asking our brain to
to take different perspectives is        change how it operates
an increased ability to understand       is like writing with our
a situation, to be able to look at       non-dominant hand.
it from two or three perspectives
instead of just the same old one.
The exercise at the end of this chapter will help you learn how to
use the three basic perspectives more systematically.
    My mother used to tell me that an ounce of skill is better than
a pound of knowledge. And knowing about the perspectives and
not using them is a lot like knowing CPR but being unwilling to
administer it — tragic.
    When exploring the three perspectives, we begin to realize there
are three truths.


 1. We have a choice about which perspective we use to process
    a thought from the past, present or future.
 2. Each perspective provides advantages and disadvantages.
 3. Exploring all the perspectives better informs us about the event.


    Leonardo de Vinci considered the first way he looked at a prob-
lem to be too biased towards his usual perspective. To overcome
this bias he would look at the problem from one perspective, then
another, and then another. With each change, he said, his under-
standing would grow. A closer examination of de Vinci’s anatomical
48   TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH



     diagrams provides ample evidence that he never drew something
     from just one perspective. The effect of adding understanding by
     systematically using different perspectives may be why the different
     perspectives have been called “the three keys to wisdom”. Even a
     blind man having taken the time to explore an elephant from many
     perspectives is much closer to wisdom than someone vigorously
     clutching just one part.



               5. Frames — We’ve All Been Framed

     Frames refer to the set of interpretations we choose to surround a
     particular event. If someone were to offer me a mint I could frame
     this gesture as an act of genuine friendliness and generosity. I could
     also frame it as a subtle way to suggest that I had bad breath. In
     most circumstances social etiquette prevents us from asking what
     the offer of the mint implied. We are left to perceive the event in
     a way that fits with our overall understanding of the situation. Our
     perceptions will determine how we operate in the situation as well.
     We could ask ourselves a useful question: “In what way can I choose
     to perceive this situation that will further enhance collaboration?”
     By answering this question we are developing our CQ.
         Everyone has experienced interpreting someone’s behavior in
     one way, only to find out later that their perception had been flawed.
     If reality is such an undependable construct, should we not just
     choose the frame that best allows us to be the most resilient? In
     other words, if we assume (use a frame) that a statement someone
     makes to us is well-intended, the frame has a particular effect. By
     framing their statement in a positive way we are indirectly creating
     a situation that is cooperative and friendly.
         If, on the other hand, we frame someone’s remarks as ill-intended,
     we will convey this in our tone of voice and body language. That may
PERCEPTION    49



set the scene for a situation that is defensive and non-friendly. The
actual intention of the other person is almost immaterial.
    We cannot control other people, as much as we would like to
think we can. The bottom line is that we can only be responsible for
how we feel. So frames can be exceptionally useful when we wish
to change the way we feel about something such as a memory or
another person’s behavior. Changing the frame we use is called
“reframing” and, along with perceptual positions, is another one of
the tools that enables us to be more resilient. The secret is to choose
a frame that enables us to respond most resourcefully. The end
result is that we are able to take control of a situation rather than
allow it to control us.
    Let’s look at an example. Greg has discovered his boss, Jeff, has
plans to ask him to work the weekend. He presupposes that this is
because, of all the people that work in his department, Jeff likes
Greg the least. This assumption leaves Greg feeling resentful toward
Jeff and anxious about how he will be able to say “no” to the request.
An alternative perspective Greg could take is that Jeff has chosen
to delegate the work to him because he is the most skilled and reli-
able person. This set of assumptions (making up a frame) leaves
Greg feeling valued and honored to be asked. Whether he really
wants to work the weekend is immaterial at present. What is most
affected will be the interaction between himself and his boss. Whether
Greg says yes or no does not really matter. The overall outcome was
reframed by Greg. He could have displayed feelings of resentment
and put Jeff on the defensive. Either way Jeff will either feel more
comfortable with his refusal, or will have begun to appreciate Greg
more for saying yes. By reframing the situation Greg did not have
to lie to himself or pretend things that were untrue. What he did
was change the frame he used long enough to see how the situation
played out. In this situation the CQ of both parties probably rose
simply from choosing a different frame.
50   TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH



        Any event or situation can be a good thing or a bad thing
     depending on how it is perceived. Highly resilient people have per-
     ceptual flexibility, enabling them to choose how they view a set of
     circumstances.
        Often they will reframe a situation several times to enable
     them to maintain a sense of autonomy or control. This is called
     multiple reframing. A great example of this process is found in the
     Zen tradition.

            THE FARMER AND HIS STALLION
            There is an old Zen story about a farmer who
            bought a fine stallion one Monday at market for a
            good price. His neighbors came to admire it and
            all said “How fortunate you are!” To which the
            farmer replied
            “Maybe…”


            On the Tuesday the stallion escaped through a gap
            in the fence and ran away to the hills. Now all the
            neighbors said “How awful — what a catastrophe.”
            To which the farmer replied
            “Maybe…”


            Then on Wednesday the stallion returned to the farm
            with a small herd of wild mares behind him. This
            time the neighbors were ecstatic — crying, “What
            luck! How marvelous.”
            To which the farmer replied
            “Maybe…”


            On the Thursday the farmer’s only son was breaking
            in the wild mares when one of them threw him and
PERCEPTION    51



        he broke his leg. In the evening the neighbors talked
        of “the tragedy and misfortune.”
        To which the farmer replied
        “Maybe…”


        On Friday the Emperor’s army came looking for able
        bodied recruits to fight and almost certainly die in a
        War in the North…the villagers said to the farmer —
        “how fortunate for your son”, the farmer replied…


    The principle behind this story is that perception is a highly rel-
ative process. Maturana, the Chilean biologist, suggests that when
we forget our relative view of reality, we lose our capacity to live
together. He goes on to state that when one person or group insists
that only they see “what is really going on”, they are actually making
a “demand for obedience”. There are many examples of this process
going on in the world today. Indeed most, if not all, international
conflicts are caused by groups of people being certain about their
own version of reality.
    The demand for obedience worked successfully throughout the
industrial era with organizations built upon power hierarchies. Now
that we are entering the era of collective intelligence, where coop-
eration and CQ are premium skills, such demands are less effective
and often very harmful to a team’s overall resilience.


                    Emotional Perceptions

        We’re not passive observers of an external world;
        rather, we know our world through interacting
        with it, and our emotions can limit or enrich that
        interaction.
        HUMBERTO R. MATURANA
52   TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH



        Maturana’s observation leads us to the following question: “How
     are we choosing to interact with the world?” By looking for the bad
     or negative influences, we discover a limited and one-dimensional
     world. This emphasizes the power of perspective in building the
     CQ of groups and teams to which we belong.


            Neuroscientists have discovered strong evidence
            that human intelligence, human memory, and human
            decisions are never completely rational but are always
            colored by emotions, as we all know from experience.
            CAPRA, THE WEB OF LIFE


        One factor that cannot be ignored is the part our emotions play
     in our perceptions. In fact research in this area demonstrates a
     connection between our success and general sense of happiness.


            After interviewing 100 of the most successful and
            happy people they could find… The research found
            that each and every one of the 100 people had a
            special capability — to look for and find what is
            good in him- or herself, in others, and in all
            situations of life.
            ENCYCLOPEDIA OF POSITIVE QUESTIONS


        Emotions also play an important role in our level of self-mastery.
     The wisdom of this chapter can be encapsulated by the “Four Noble
     Truths” found in Buddhist philosophy.


      • We all experience suffering in one way or another — mental,
        physical, emotional, spiritual.
      • We create our own suffering. It is a consequence of our desiring
        things to be other than what they are.
PERCEPTION    53



  • It need not be this way. We have a choice as to how we
    perceive the world and live our lives.
  • There are systematic ways to go about changing how we think
    and perceive.


    There are many ways to change how we think and perceive. The
methods offered at the end of this chapter have been very success-
ful with tens of thousands of people. Of course, nothing will change
unless you are willing to try them.



                Mirror, Mirror on the Wall

How we perceive ourselves determines how we operate in this world.
Our self-perception is part of our relationship with ourselves. The
relationship we have with ourselves is the
most fundamental and abiding relationship
we will ever have. If we are highly judgmen-         Change starts
tal with ourselves it will almost certainly be       with the self.
translated into a habit of being judgmental
with others. The place where change starts is
the self and nowhere is it more true than our perception of ourselves.


        When I view myself as a time-sensitive product,
        valued for what I produce, then I have made
        depth, extended thought, and the inward journey
        marginal indulgences. Instead of doing what matters,
        I spend my life doing what works. It increases
        my market value and postpones the question of my
        human value.
        BLOCK, THE ANSWER TO HOW IS YES
54   TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH



         The quote from Peter Block’s book, The Answer To How Is Yes,
     defines the challenge we all face in a rapidly changing society. What
     is our human value? Does my personal journey have any impact
     upon my professional development? Without developing ourself as
     a human being (rather than a human “doing”) we will fail to grow
     professionally in a sustainable fashion. Along with this is the task of
     developing our CQ, our capacity to tap into the energy of groups and
     networks, supporting others as they strive to achieve their outcomes
     and achieving our own, in the process.



             WHERE WE’VE BEEN
             So we’ve explored the topic of perception in connection with
             resilience and the development of CQ. From this chapter
             we learned that:


             • Perceptions are relative and become habits of seeing;
             • Our attention is an important asset and used carefully can
               strengthen resilience and raise CQ;
             • We use filters to select what we attend to and what
               we ignore;
             • We can change the way we operate with others by changing
               our filters;
             • Perspectives are ways of looking at things and we need
               to practice using different perspectives to increase our
               perceptual flexibility; and
             • Frames are ways we interpret perceptions and reframing
               can help us respond more resourcefully to challenges.
PERCEPTION   55



WHERE WE’RE GOING
Biographies and autobiographies of great people point
clearly to a distinct connection between how they saw the
world and how they behaved in it. In this chapter we
explored one half of the equation. In the next, we explore
the other half — self-mastery. We will also examine ways to
expand our own self-mastery and the part that can play in
developing resilience and raising CQ.
56   TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH




                           CQ Tool                2

                 Developing Perceptual Flexibility




       This exercise achieves a number of things. It enables partici-
       pants to discover for themselves specific processing capacities
       of the mind. The realization that participants have a choice over
       which processing capacity they use to review past events and
       plan future ones.


       STEP ONE: Close your eyes and think of a pleasant holiday
       you have experienced. Notice the pictures/images as you recall
       this event.


       Note: There are two different perspectives from which you
       can run your memories. One is where you are watching your-
       self in the memory (fly on the wall). This is called the Director’s
       Perspective. The other is when you are actually in the pic-
       ture seeing things with your own eyes. This is the Actor’s
       Perspective.


           Director’s Perspective: When you are running a memory
           from the director’s perspective, you are taking a dissociated
           position. You are seeing and hearing things from a position
           removed from the scene. Typically, when you run memories
           from this position, your feelings about this memory tend to
           be diminished or absent altogether.
PERCEPTION   57




    Actor’s Perspective: When you are running a memory from
    the actor’s perspective, the memory is running as if you
    were re-living the event within your own body. You do not
    see yourself in the pictures. Typically, you will have a height-
    ened awareness of the feelings associated with that memory.


STEP TWO A: Notice the image you created. Are you in direc-
tor’s perspective where you see yourself in the picture? (If you
cannot, then go to Step 2B.) In this case, to explore the actor’s
perspective, imagine stepping into your body in the event.
Notice what it is like to be inside your own body. To help, you
may like to imagine things like warmth or coolness or feelings
of relaxation, etc.


STEP TWO B: Notice the image you created. Can you see
things and hear things as if you were there? If so, you are run-
ning the memory from actor’s perspective. In this case, imagine
stepping out of your body and notice what it is like to be watch-
ing yourself in the event. You may notice the lessening of the
feelings associated with this memory.


Note: Now you have had an opportunity to switch perspectives
from where you normally run that memory. The advantage of
being able to switch perspectives is that you can choose to have
more or less feelings associated with the event.


STEP THREE: Practice switching from one perspective to the
other. Doing this expands your perceptual flexibility. Try the
exercise with other events. Notice by switching to the director’s
perspective, challenging or upsetting events become much more
58   TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH




       comfortable. They lack most (if not all) of the negative feelings
       that accompanied them originally. Likewise, if you had been
       running pleasant memories from the director’s perspective, you
       will discover the memory has many more pleasant feelings to
       be enjoyed by switching to the actor’s perspective.
3


                  Self-Mastery




       Socrates demonstrated long ago, that the truly
       free individual is free only to the extent of his
         own self-mastery. While those who will not
          govern themselves are condemned to find
                   masters govern over them.

            STEVEN PRESSFIELD, THE WAR OF ART




In chapter 2, we explored the part perception plays in our resilience
and in building resilient teams. Perception also plays a central role
in our ability to develop self-mastery. In this chapter, we will explore
how to develop greater self-mastery and how developing it will affect
the creation of resilient teams. We will also examine the connection
between self-mastery and further enhancing our CQ.
60   TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH



                              The First Furrow

     When I was ten years old my mom sent me with tea and biscuits
     down to the fields where my father was plowing. When I got there, he
     had just started a new field and was half-way down the first furrow.
     I decided to wait until he came back up the field. He took ages —
     every now and again getting off the tractor to tap something, or adjust
     part of the plow. By the time he returned to my end of the field I had
     begun to wonder just how long it was going to take him to plow the
     whole field. “Dad,” I said, “I have watched you plowing the first
     furrow and if it takes you as long to plough every furrow, it’s going
     to take you all day to plough this little field.”
         “Well son that was the first furrow of the field — it’s the most
     important, because it sets the pattern for the rest of the field.” He went
     on to tell me that when it came time for me to plow a field and if I
     found I didn’t like the pattern when I had finished, I should check the
     first furrow and I would usually find that the problem started there.


             In reading the lives of great men, I found that
             the first victory they won was over themselves…
             self-discipline with all of them came first.
             HARRY S. TRUMAN


         On reflection, I realize my dad was sharing a valuable insight. So
     often we become aware of patterns in our lives that we don’t like.
     Sometimes we even try to fix the pattern — the one that’s “out there”
     somewhere — when really the first furrow is where the pattern is
     set, within ourselves. In human relations (and communication) the
     human heart is where the first furrow is cut. How we relate to our-
     selves sets the tone and the shape of the cut line for the ones to
     follow. It is easier to look outside ourselves than look inside. Often
     an ounce of change made within easily outweighs a pound of change
     made without.
SELF-MASTERY    61



    The first furrow connects personal
development (the responsibility to develop        An ounce of
ourselves) to professional development.           change made
To pretend that they do not affect each           within easily
other is naive. A company may wish to             outweighs a
hire the person’s skills, but inevitably          pound of change
they end up with the person’s attitudes in        made without.
the bargain.


        Sustained great results depend upon building a
        culture full of self disciplined people who take
        disciplined action, fanatically.
            A culture of discipline is not just about
        action. It is about getting disciplined people who
        engage in disciplined thought and who then take
        disciplined action.
        COLLINS, GOOD TO GREAT


    The metaphor of the first furrow emphasizes the responsibility
we each have for our own behavior and how much this behavior
depends upon the relationship we have with ourselves. Building
greater trust with others is one thing, building greater trust in our-
selves is another. Close examination of resilient teams uncovers
that they are made up of individuals with great levels of self-mas-
tery. Not only does this ensure that everyone pulls their weight, it
also means that each member is a good role model for the rest of
the team. High levels of self-mastery are also associated with peo-
ple who have high CQs, in that they actively pursue collaboration
with others.
    The most obvious question is, “How do we develop greater self-
mastery?” First let us look at what are the most important skills
that make up self-mastery.
62   TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH



      1. Perceptual Flexibility
      2. Making Meaning
      3. Emotional Management
      4. Mental Models
      5. Leadership and Followship
      6. Intention
      7. Persistence
      8. Alignment
      9. Self-Expression

         In the following pages we will discover how each plays their part
     in building self-mastery and how to strengthen our own sense of
     it. The truth is we already have a great deal of self-mastery at work
     in our lives. It is made up of a composite of the nine elements men-
     tioned above. Consciously making improvements — even small
     ones — in these nine areas will enable us to deepen our self-mastery.



                       1. Perceptual Flexibility

     In chapter 2 we explored how we can use multiple perspectives to
     enable us to choose how we looked at things. Choosing how to see
     something is exercising perceptual flexibility. Individuals with
     high levels of self-mastery choose how they look at things in order
     to deal with them more effectively.

             No occurrences are so unfortunate that the
             shrewd cannot turn them to some advantage, nor
             so fortunate that the imprudent cannot turn them
             to their own disadvantage.
             DUC DE LA ROCHEFOUCAULD


         Perceptual strategies are evident in the way people approach
     life. Highly resilient people display strong optimistic strategies.
SELF-MASTERY    63



This may not be exhibited as the classic “rose-tinted glasses”, rather
it is demonstrated as a deliberately chosen, useful perspective.
Within resilient people this manifests as the ability to turn practically
everything that happens to some advantage.
    Here are some of the features that distinguish optimistic strate-
gies from pessimistic ones.
    When something pleasant happens to someone using a pessimistic
perspective, they:

  • credit luck;
  • predict it can’t last; or
  • localize the effect.

    When something challenging happens, they:

  • blame themselves;
  • generalize to other areas of life; or
  • predict the future based on their present conditions.

    We have all used these strategies from time to time in our lives.
However, it is obvious that if we were to apply them to everything,
the consequences would be pretty tragic.
    On the other hand when something pleasant happens to some-
one taking an optimistic perspective, they:

  • take some credit for the effect;
  • look for a positive trend; or
  • generalize the effect.

    When something challenging happens, they:

  • remember that there is no failure, only feedback;
  • take it as an exception to the rule; or
  • consider it as an isolated incident.
64   TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH



         The same incident, challenging or pleasant, is treated quite dif-
     ferently by the two types of strategies. The next time something
     happens to you that could be considered unpleasant or pleasant,
     stop and consider what strategies you are applying. Strategies are
     like habits of thought and, as such, old ways of dealing with things
     will be the first to impose their will. We only have to stop and ask
     the question “How else could I approach this?” to begin the process
     of breaking free of our old habits.


                               Foul Ball or Strike?

     People with high levels of self-mastery have the ability to create use-
     ful meanings for events in their lives. The story of the three umpires
     illustrates this point.
         Three umpires are discussing how they approach umpiring. The
     youngest among them explains that he “calls them as they are”.
     The next umpire states that he “calls them as he sees them”. The
     oldest and craftiest of them says that “they are as I call them”. The old
     umpire realized that he was able to define the game by choosing how
     to see the play. In effect he is choosing the meaning of what he sees
     and he knows it.
         Scientific evidence suggests that the strategy of perceptual
     flexibility provides benefits that go beyond the psychological. In
     a study authored by Christopher Peterson of the University of
     Michigan (Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 1989,
     p. 55), it was shown that there appears to be a direct link between
     illness and pessimism. The study examined how subjects viewed
     events in their lives. Following the test group over a 35-year period,
     the study showed that subjects with negative interpretations were
     consistently sicker than their more optimistic peers. These kinds
     of findings have been replicated many times since. It is not sur-
     prising to find that psychonueroimmunology (the study of how the
SELF-MASTERY    65



mind affects the body) is one of the fastest growing areas of research
in medicine.
    Because resilience not only relates to our minds but also to
our bodies, one strongly impacts the other. I know several people
who do all the right things for their body — vitamins, good nutri-
tion and regular exercise — but unfortunately they harbor negative
emotions and beliefs about their health. Their thought patterns may
be negating much of the positive physical care by suppressing their
immune system. If we can make ourselves sick or well with our
thoughts, we can certainly make ourselves less or more resilient
with them.



        GO DEEPER
        Mind Body Connection: www.anthillsite.com




                     2. Making Meaning

        A Native American elder once described
        his own inner struggles in this manner:
        Inside of me there are two dogs.
        One of the dogs is mean and evil.
        The other dog is good.
        The mean dog fights the good dog all the time.
        When asked which dog wins,
        he reflected for a moment and replied,
        The one I feed the most.
        GEORGE BERNARD SHAW


    Viktor Frankl’s Man’s Search for Meaning and The Unheard Cry
For Meaning were written as testaments to this deceivingly simple
66   TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH



     idea — we are the meaning makers. During the Second World War
     he was held in several different concentration camps. His experience
     there brought him to the realization that all his “freedoms” had been
     taken from him, except the freedom to choose what the experience
     meant. This insight probably saved Frankl’s life and those people
     who embraced his approach. In Frankl’s own words, “the sort of
     person the prisoner became was the result of an inner decision”
     and that decision centered on creating a meaning for himself. By
     changing the meaning he could change the way he responded to the
     horrible conditions in which he found himself. This led his captors
     to change the way they treated him and the other prisoners who
     participated in this strategy. The result was that Frankl was able to
     wrench something of great value from very dire circumstances. Upon
     his release at the end of the war, this series of insights led him to
     develop a new psychotherapy, called Logotherapy, which has had
                                        a significant impact on clinical
                                        practice. The central tenet to this
     Choose a meaning that              form of therapy is that no matter
     makes you feel more                what happens to you, you always
     resourceful and resilient.         have the freedom to choose what
                                        it means to you.


             To an ordinary man everything is either a curse or
             a blessing, but to a Man of Knowledge everything
             is a challenge and an opportunity.
             TEACHINGS OF DON JUAN


         Just as you can choose from what perspective to look at some-
     thing, you can also choose a meaning that makes you feel more
     resourceful and resilient.
SELF-MASTERY   67



       GO DEEPER
       Making Meaning: www.anthillsite.com




             3. Emotional Self-Management

Most of the time we manage our emotions quite unconsciously. The
importance of emotional self-mastery has been firmly established
through the work of Daniel Goleman and his concept of Emotional
Intelligence (EQ). When faced with challenging situations and chal-
lenging people, expressing EQ obviously becomes more valuable.
However, emotional self-mastery is just as important during times
of high performance.



       GO DEEPER
       Emotional Intelligence: www.anthillsite.com



       You don’t drown by falling in the water;
       you drown by staying there.
       EDWIN LOUIS COLE


   Mastery over emotions is a central element of highly resilient
people. Our emotions provide us with the power to act and are an
important source of self-nurturance. Fear is the most common prob-
lematic emotion. Many successful athletes report how they managed
to turn their fear into a source of energy enabling them to achieve
great accomplishments. (The exercise at the end of chapter 2 (Per-
ception) can also be used to harness your emotions.) Our emotional
response to a situation is directly related to how we perceive it.
The feeling of excitement when taking a seat in a roller coaster is
68   TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH



     biochemically identical to the feeling we have before we sit down
     in the dentist’s chair. What differs is how we perceive the two events
     and consequently how we interpret the feelings. In other words if
     we wish to change the way we are responding to a situation, we can
     change the way we look at it.
         Emotional self-management is also closely related to self-esteem.
     Nathaniel Branden has described self-esteem as “the reputation we
     have acquired with ourselves”. He goes on to say that “There is no
     value-judgment more important to man — no factor more decisive
     in his psychological development and motivation — than the estimate
     he passes on himself.”



             GO DEEPER
             Self-Esteem Survey: www.anthillsite.com




                            4. Mental Models

     The fourth aspect of self-mastery is mental models. These are deeply
     rooted assumptions and ways of thinking that guide the way we think
     about the world. They are described as mental because they exist in
     our minds and models because they are constructs created as a result
     of our own experience of life. They are often used as maps to navigate
     our future experiences. Everyone has them and, like the Zen fish, in
     chapter 1, we don’t notice them most of the time. One thing is cer-
     tain — they are ours and they affect the way we respond to our world.
         In the practice of systems thinking, changing mental models is
     considered to be the only way to eliminate a problem, rather than
     just solve it. When we solve a problem it may reappear again. When
     we eliminate it, that particular problem will never reappear (don’t
     worry there are plenty others) because we have changed our mental
SELF-MASTERY    69



models with respect to the issue. Mental models are created out of
beliefs and based on our assumptions (chapter 1).
    The reason we explore this topic here rather than under assump-
tions (chapter 1) is that mental models are more than just beliefs and
they have such a profound impact. The secret to improving self-
mastery through mental models is to develop systematic ones. Delib-
erately chosen mental models will help achieve the objectives we set.
    In their book The Art of Systems Thinking, Joseph O’Connor
and Ian McDermott suggest following simple rules to enable you to
have more systemic mental models.


  • Admit your mental models are your best guess at the moment
    and be on the lookout for better ones.
  • Have wide interests
  • Be comfortable with ambiguity.
  • Be curious about, and pay particular attention to, experiences
    that seem to contradict your mental models.
  • Have a wide time horizon to look for feedback.
  • When confronted with a problem, look at the assumptions you
    are making about the situation as well as the situation itself.
  • Look for relationships, how events fit together.
  • Look for loops and circles of cause and effect, the effect of
    one cause being the cause of another effect.


    Choosing our mental models is the mark of highly resilient and
successful professionals. The concept of CQ is a mental model. As
a result of adopting it we begin to look for ways to increase collab-
oration and actively seek ways of building stronger relationships.
The “assumption-busting” strategy explored in chapter 1 is particu-
larly good at altering mental models. Too often we wander around
the world without checking the filters we use to process events and
relationships in our lives.
70   TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH



                    5. Leadership and Followship

     Leading and following are two behaviors that have created the
     greatest number of theories and books in relation to business. For
     a group of individuals to function together some leading has to be
     going on and some following. That’s the simple part over. Traditional
     models of command and control involve a distinct hierarchy of
     command. Orders are issued from the top and fed down through the
     hierarchy to the lowest levels. Since the dawn of the industrial rev-
     olution this system has been considered to be the only way people
     could be organized around work.
         The mechanistic view inherited from Newton’s model of the
     universe probably encouraged this view of how people work. The
     mechanistic view also implied that the lowest levels of the organi-
     zation had the least knowledge and was in the worst position from
     which to make decisions. Managers at the top were considered to
     be in a better position because they had the “big picture”, enabling
     them to make executive decisions that became a set of directions
     to the lower ranks. In such a system, the personal initiative required
     from people at the front line was generally very low. We are still
     occasionally told “I’ll have to ask the manager”, indicating the person
     has not been granted the decision-making power necessary.
         The command and control method of management and busi-
     ness innovation is proving too cumbersome for forward-thinking
     companies. Many are discovering the advantages of using “bottom–
     up” intelligence. This perspective takes the view that people at
     the front line are in a better position to make decisions because
     they are closest to the changing environment. More enlightened
     companies are realizing that to survive they are going to have to
     become much more adaptive to the changes occurring in the mar-
     ket. The bottom-up model (which we explore in greater detail in
     chapter 5) also requires team members to have adequate levels
SELF-MASTERY    71



of self-mastery. Without it they will not be able to exercise their
initiative when required.
    Bottom-up processing makes it possible for companies to
increase speed and effectiveness of service by enabling the front-
line staff to deal with practically anything they encounter. More and
more companies are realizing the advantages of allowing front-line
staff to have the power to make more decisions. It enables the com-
pany to flatten their own structure, making do with less middle
management. Another outcome of bottom-up processing is that
high levels of self-reliance are required of everyone in the company.
This in turn places more emphasis on all the team members’ levels
of self-mastery.


       Yin and Yang                    In a truly self-organizing
                                       system, the part of the
The concept of followship has          team that is in the best
been with us for a few years. It       position to act and has
is defined here as the ability to      the greatest amount of
follow and support the efforts of      knowledge will lead.
a self-organizing team. In a truly
self-organizing system, the part
of the team that is in the best position to act and has the greatest
amount of knowledge will lead. This means that within a resilient
team leadership frequently flows through the membership depending
on where they are in the process. As conditions change leadership
may shift many times. During these transitions each individual needs
to be able to shift from followship to leadership and back to follow-
ship as the situation demands. The skills involved in good followship
are as outlined below.


  • The ability to see what needs to be done and do it when it
    needs to be done.
72   TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH



       • Flexibility in behaviors to support fellow team members as
         they shift from follower to leader.
       • An awareness of the team as a functioning whole where each
         individual is willing to lead and to follow as circumstances
         dictate.
       • A capacity to build collaborative relationships that support
         the team and the individuals that make it up.


         These skills could also be considered as core in the development
     of our CQ and the CQ of any team to which we belong.



                                 6. Intention

     Intention is one of our most valuable assets. It has a huge impact in
     the area of setting outcomes. In other words, how our intention has
     been set has a significant effect on how likely it is that we will achieve
     our outcomes. For example, setting the intention to build collabora-
     tive relationships will automatically make it much more likely that
     such relationships will be created.
         Properly formed intention enables the creation of a well formed
     outcome. Resilient individuals with high levels of self-mastery fre-
     quently achieve their outcomes. Laurence Boldt said, “You wouldn’t
     think of building a new home without a blueprint. Yet many of us try
     to live our lives without a clear sense of the results we are after.”
     There are probably many people reading this book right now who
     have extensive plans and objectives for their next vacation, but have
     given no such attention to what they wish to achieve with their team.
         The benefits of a well formed outcome are the following:


       • We notice what is useful for our objective.
       • We remember what is useful to our objective.
SELF-MASTERY    73



  • Our objective determines our selection of perceptions.
  • Our objective affects our thought patterns.
  • Our thoughts and perceptions can help us reach our
    objectives.


    Of course the more clearly defined our outcomes/objectives are,
the more likely it will be that the benefits will materialize.
    There are two types of objectives — away-from and towards. An
away-from, sometimes known as the problem-focused objective,
motivates us to solve the problem or achieve the objective by getting
away from something or reducing something.
    A department trying to reduce absenteeism is a good example
of an activity which is away-from. Certain strategies and policies
are implemented to get away from high levels of employee absences.
The other side of the coin is how the department could be run to move
towards high levels of employee engagement. Strategies designed
to create a workplace that people love to come to will also have the
effect of lowering absenteeism. In this example the objective was
basically the same but the intention formed was quite different. The
question has changed from “what do we want less of” to “what do
we want more of”. In that switch, what has changed is the perspec-
tive taken and the strategy adopted. Towards strategies are also
known as solution-focused.
    Robert Fritz, in his book The Path of Least Resistance, explains
that away-from outcomes are poorly designed because they do not
take into account how human beings are motivated. In the case of
away-from outcomes, as he sees it, each time a portion of the objec-
tive is achieved, the less motivation there is to continue, like a moth
flying away from the light because of the heat. At some point the heat
diminishes and causes the moth’s attraction for the light to once
again override. Thus the moth is caught in limbo until it collapses
of exhaustion.
74   TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH



         Many organizational challenges exist only because they have
     been phrased and approached in an away-from manner. In other
     words they were not designed for success; they were designed to
     avoid failure. For example a company focused on getting out of debt
     may end up using different strategies to achieve that objective, than
     a company that plans to maximize revenue. Reducing debt is, after
     all, only half the story. The pressure to reduce debt will ease as the
     debt falls, therefore progress slows and it takes longer to achieve
     the outcome. All companies want to make a profit and a towards
     objective (such as maximizing profits) creates more of the desired
     result as it gains its objectives.
         A salesperson with the target of selling 50 cars each month is
     motivated by the number sold that increases as the month passes.
     Notice that they are not motivated by the number they still have to
     sell, although some people choose to motivate themselves that way.
     Neither of these approaches is good or bad.
         Fritz’s comprehensive research in this area clearly shows
     that most successful people are motivated by things they were
     building rather than things they were tearing down (except dem-
     olition experts of course). Fritz uses the term “creative tension”
     to describe the process of connecting a desired goal to the pres-
                                                 ent reality. Imagine an
                                                 elastic band stretched
     Successful people are motivated             between two points. The
     by things they were building                very act of connecting
     rather than things they were                them with an elastic
     tearing down.                               band will make it more
                                                 likely that the two will
                                                 be drawn together. Also
     being drawn towards something (e.g., profit) is much more moti-
     vating for most of us than being pushed away from something (e.g.,
     debt). This is one of the main reasons why the concept of creative
SELF-MASTERY    75



tension and well formed outcomes are more successful than away-
from strategies.




    Addressing the South African people, Nelson Mandela spoke
much more about creating a rainbow nation than he did about tak-
ing down the apartheid system. Intuitively he knew that if they had
focused on taking it down, at the end of the process all they would
have left was a large and dangerous political hole. So instead he
focused their energy on the creative tension existing between where
they were as a fledgling nation and where they wished to end up. The
result was the rainbow coalition that amazed the world by creating
a largely peaceful transition.
    All well and good, but we live in a complex world where objec-
tives and outcomes are not always of our making. Many times they
are handed to us or to our team. The argument here is that no
matter in what form they are presented, we can choose to apply a
towards or away-from strategy to them. (For a method of creating
well formed outcomes, see the exercise at the end of this chapter.)
The solution-focused approach, builds beautifully into the strength-
based/appreciative approach as both emphasize that we “find what
we look for”.
    Using intention is also called “beginning with the end in mind”.
It can be explained best with the story of the young soldier. A young
soldier is found in the barracks by his captain. He is pulling all the
bunks apart, emptying all the cupboards, pulling up the rugs and
making a horrible mess. The Captain says, “Son, what are you doing?”
The young soldier says, “I’m looking for a piece of paper.” He says,
76   TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH



     “Well, you’re making a mess and you better stop it or I’ll put you on
     a charge.” The soldier totally ignores him and continues tearing the
     barracks apart. Eventually the Captain says, “Look, son, that’s the
     last time I’m going to warn you.” But still it goes on. So he calls
     the military police and they whip him down to the brig to let him
     cool off for a while.
         He’s only in the cell for a few moments when the jailor hears a
     commotion in the cell. There is the soldier moving anything that isn’t
     bolted down. The jailor shouts in through the door, “What are you
     doing, Private?” The soldier says, “I’m looking for a piece of paper.”
     The jailor says, “Well there’s no piece of paper in there, buddy. You
     just stop making such a fuss.” The young soldier ignores him and
     continues to ransack the cell.
         The jailor decides to call up the army psychiatrist. “We’ve got a
     real cookie down here Doc, you gotta see this guy. He’s something
     else.” The psychiatrist says, “Well, send him up.” The MPs bring him
     up to the psychiatrist’s office. The young solider is only in the office
     a few seconds when he starts pulling everything apart. The psy-
     chiatrist asks him what he is doing. The soldier says, “Looking
     for a piece of paper.” A few sessions later, the same scene play-
     ing out each time, the psychiatrist becomes exasperated and says,
     “Look Private, I have decided after much reflection that you are
     not cut out for the army, and the army is not cut out for you. I am
     signing your dismissal.” He hands the young soldier the dismissal
     form and the young man says, “There’s the piece of paper I was
     looking for.”
         Reflect on this for a moment. What if the captain asked the
     soldier, “What are you doing?” and this young soldier said, “I’m try-
     ing to get out of the army.” Do you think he would have been
     discharged? I don’t think so either. In this story the intention the
     young soldier had set enabled him to navigate the Captain, the jailor
     and the army psychiatrist. He remained focused on what he wanted
SELF-MASTERY    77



(the piece of paper) rather than what he did not want (to be in the
army any longer).


                    Using Our Signal Lights

One final thought around the topic of intention is the need for us to
broadcast our intention. Once you have developed a well formed
outcome, you must find ways to broadcast it and then be sensitive
to your environment as it responds to that announcement. On the
highway, for instance, we switch on our signal lights to let other
drivers know we wish to change lanes. So it is with life: if we wish
to change lanes we should allow others to know of our intention.
Think of the number of times when you set an intention and suddenly
resources became available to you that you didn’t know existed. This
had more to do with you broadcasting your intention than it had to
do with miracles.
    Designing outcomes and setting our attention implies we are
willing to take personal responsibility for ourselves and our behaviors.
This is another important element of the self-mastery underlying
the resilient individual. Setting positive intention is also about a
central part of further enhancing our collaborative intelligence. By
actively seeking positive outcomes with others, we are raising our
CQ at the same time.
    Viktor Frankl once said that the United States should have built
a statue of responsibility on the west coast to balance the Statue of
Liberty on the east coast. What he was getting at was that we all
wish to have more liberty or freedom and not necessarily any of the
responsibility that comes with that freedom. For instance the freedom
to drive on the public highways is matched by the responsibility to
drive in a safe and courteous manner.
78   TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH



                               7. Persistence

             Nothing in the world can take the place of persistence.

             Talent will not;
             nothing is more common than unsuccessful men
             with talent.

             Genius will not;
             unrewarded genius is almost a proverb.

             Education will not;
             the world is full of educated derelicts.

             Persistence and determination alone are omnipotent.

             ELEANOR ROOSEVELT


         There are two sides to every story. Persistence can be associated
     with stubbornness. Winston Churchill’s call to “never give in” can be
     used by the frog as an excuse to stay in the pan while it simply boils
     to death. Therefore I think an important element of persistence is
                                           the use of judgment in choos-
                                           ing what to hold onto and what
     A great deal of success in            to let go off. Another story may
     life is based upon knowing            help to clarify.
     what to hold onto and                     Two monks are walking
     what to let go off.                   along a path. They come to a
                                           river and meet a pretty young
                                           girl, just standing there won-
     dering how she is going to get across. One of the monks offers to
     carry the girl over the river. After they had all crossed and the monks
     had been walking for some time along the path on their own once
     again, the monk who had watched his companion help the girl said,
     “Brother I have been thinking for some time about this and we both
SELF-MASTERY    79



know that our order forbids us to have contact with the opposite
sex. Are you not concerned for your soul?” The other monk said,
“Are you still carrying her? I set her down two miles ago.”
    One of the monks in this story knew just how long he needed to
hold onto the young girl, the other didn’t. The country and western
singer Kenny Rogers would have described it as “knowing when to
hold em and when to fold em”. In other words there is a fine line
between persistence and stubborn stupidity.
    Sometimes hindsight is the only thing that will tell us the differ-
ence. And sometimes if we hold on for long enough fate steps in.
When I was a young child living on an isolated farm, the summers
were often long and lonely. I lived a considerable distance from my
nearest friend. After working in the fields with my father all day I
often amused myself by exploring a set of old buildings belonging
to a neighbor. One evening I discovered a small hole in a stone wall
supporting an old cowshed. Lying near it on the ground was a metal
stake, the type they used to fasten the roof. I began to chisel a stone
out of the wall with the spike. This became a favorite pastime of
mine during the summer. I would make my way over to the shed in
the evening and knock out another stone.
    Weeks later, toward the end of summer, there had been a storm
with strong winds. My older brother, Pierce, came into the house at
supper time and said, “You’ve knocked Billy Greer’s cowshed down.”
No one at the kitchen table knew what he was talking about —
except me of course. I didn’t know what to say, and eventually got
into a great deal of trouble with my parents over the incident. The
hole I had created, one small stone at a time, had so weakened the
building that a gust of wind came along and finished the job. The
lesson I took from this experience was that you don’t always have
to finish the job yourself — beginning it and working steadily will
allow other factors to play a part — sometimes with spectacular
results. In this case my persistence generated a good thrashing from
80   TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH



     my father, but on the other hand persistence can generate good
     things too.
         Dr. Robert Ornstein has conducted a great deal of research in
     the area of how people use their brains. His research shows that
     when we use both sides of our brains (there is a natural tendency
     for people to use one side predominately), we greatly increase our
     functional capacity. Some subjects increased their performance by
     a factor of ten (X10) when they used both sides of their brain. Brain
     Gym™, stemming from the intensive research of Dr. Paul and Gail E.
     Dennison, provides a series of simple exercises designed to balance
     the use of the two sides of the brain.



             GO DEEPER
             Brain Gym: www.anthillsite.com



         Persistence is difficult to maintain if we do not manage our
     energy properly. We have a finite amount to expend and how we
     focus it depends entirely on how we align ourselves.



                               8. Alignment

     Self-mastery relies on our ability to focus and, in turn, upon our
     ability to create alignment. Alignment enables us to have the great-
     est impact in our lives. Robert Dilts created a model that describes
     our lives as consisting of a series of levels. He called these the
     “logical level” and they are:


       • environment,
       • behaviors,
       • capabilities,
SELF-MASTERY   81



  • beliefs,
  • values,
  • identity and
  • spirit.


    Arranged as a series of concentric circles (see Figure 3.1), the
levels represent different aspects of our lives.


                            Figure 3.1
                      Dilts’ Logical Levels


                             Environment
                               Behavior
                              Capability
                                Belief
                                 Values
                                   nt
                                Ide ity

                               Spiritual




  • Environment. At the outer level, we have our physical
    environment: material possessions, our homes, and the people
    in our lives. This is the part of our life that is most visible to
    ourselves and to others. The environment also contains all
    our relationships. We have accumulated all these things (good
    or bad) from the new level — our behaviors.
82   TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH



      • Behaviors. This level includes everything we do in our personal
        and professional lives. Our behaviors, to a large extent, have
        created our environment. If we wish to change our environment
        we must change our behaviors. Our behaviors are largely
        dependent upon our capabilities.
      • Capabilities. This refers to all the things of which we are
        capable. Not all capabilities become expressed as behaviors.
        For example I might be capable of driving my car at 150 MPH.
        I don’t allow that to become a behavior because I do not like
        the anticipated consequences for myself or other drivers.
        Capabilities are potential behaviors, some become actualized
        and others don’t. The difference between those that turn into
        behaviors and those that don’t is whether there is support at
        the belief level.
      • Beliefs. These store all the things we assume about ourselves,
        others, and the world in which we live. Beliefs are about
        permission. They give it or take it away, depending on how
        they are structured. Often enough we wish to be capable of
        something and when we think about it carefully we find we
        do not have sufficient belief in ourselves. We have not given
        ourselves permission. The beliefs we form rely heavily upon
        the things we value.
      • Values. What we value will affect our relationship to the world.
        We focus our energy around those things that have the greatest
        value to us. We form strong assumptions and opinions around
        our values and, as such, they become the birthplace of most
        of our beliefs. In their own right they are the source of our
        motivation and therefore become very important when we are
        trying to achieve something. If we do not have a belief about
        something, it is unlikely that we will generate any capabilities
        or behaviors related to it. As you can see, each level depends
        on the content of the one below.
SELF-MASTERY    83



  • Identity. Who are we? This can include our ethnic and cultural
    heritage (even if we don’t associate ourselves with it any
    longer). Roles such as father, teacher, and artist often have a
    significant affect at this level. How we perceive ourselves (our
    identity) determines what we value.
  • Spirit. The core of the model represents our spirit. Spirit need
    not be interpreted in any religious fashion. I think of spirit as
    the deepest level of us that knows it is alive in an alive universe.
    At this level it is common for people to be aware of how deeply
    connected they are to everyone and everything. The condition
    of our spirit determines, to a great degree, our identity (and
    so on up the through the layers).
        When people refer to the “spirit of the team” this is the
    level that is expressing itself and probably the level at which
    the team has connected. Everyone has had an experience
    where they have felt this level of connection with other people.
    This is one of the reasons why people who have had spiritual
    experiences sometimes undergo dramatic changes in their:
    beliefs and values; identities; capabilities, and behaviors.


    Alignment is the process of bringing the different levels into
line with each other. This can be achieved individually and also
between individuals in a group, say within a team. Typically changes
made at any of the deeper levels will reverberate, like ripples over
the surface of a pond, out to the environment level. In my expe-
rience using this model with individuals and teams, huge changes
can occur at the surface (environment/behaviors) with just small
adjustments at deeper levels.
    Aligning our own logical levels is not as complex as you might
imagine. One of the most common discoveries people make when
they perform an alignment process is that even very negative and
self-limiting behaviors are attempts to honor a positive value situated
84   TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH



     at a deeper level. For example, someone that is overly strict and
     dictatorial with a colleague who reports to him may find through
     alignment questions that this behavior is based on the value of
     helping the person get the best out of himself. This alignment process
     is featured in the companion workbook.
         Team alignment can be used to help individuals align the
     logical levels together. Of course, good personal alignment is a nec-
     essary first step to good team alignment. Try making a neat bundle
     out of a set of very crooked twigs and you’ll know what I mean.
     There are significant benefits of bringing about this degree of align-
     ment. Many teams are designed more around compliance than
     commitment. We should remember that commitment is a much
     more powerful motivator. The real reason commitment is not more
     common within the corporate world is that most managers and team
     leaders do not have a systematic way to generate it within their
     teams. The logical levels alignment process can be invaluable in
     these circumstances.
         Team alignment also requires us to be actively developing
     our CQ. High performing teams are aligned and exercise all their
     collaborative intelligence around their shared objectives.



                            9. Self-Expression

     At the very beginning of this chapter I shared the story of the first
     furrow and it’s relevance to how we operate in the world, partic-
     ularly with others. The kind of relationship we have with ourselves
     affects the way we use self-expression. The kinds of things we say
     about ourselves lets others know what sort of opinion we have of our-
     selves. Even things we say about others reveal a great deal of
     information, indirectly stated, about how we think of ourselves.
     Being highly judgmental toward another team member probably
     indicates we are very judgmental with ourselves.
SELF-MASTERY    85



    Negative messages we received during our childhood are often
absorbed and replayed whenever we experience an event that chal-
lenges our self-esteem. What we say about ourselves affects how
other people perceive us. Conversely positive messages we received
during our childhood are absorbed and act as a supportive reference
when we encounter challenges to our self-esteem.
    The things we say are based upon how we feel about ourselves.
If we discover that our references to ourselves are less than flattering,
then maybe it is time to reassess on what our self-esteem is based.
    When someone is being highly judgmental of us we can, at the
least, try to avoid them. When we are doing the judging, getting out
of the way is not really an option. Self-expression is important in
another way. How we express ourselves affects how other people
relate to us — as implied earlier in this chapter. If we have a critical
and negative relationship with ourselves this stands a very good
chance of being translated into critical, negative relationships with
our colleagues. Such relationships cannot build resilient teams.
    Communicating our positive regard and respect for the people
on our team will help build a team with strong resilient relationships
and further strengthen our own CQ and that of the team. The next
chapter explores the skill of communication. We will also address a
number of questions. How does our communication affect our CQ
and that of the team in which we operate? How can we build strong
teams that weather change and pull together no matter what?



        WHERE WE’VE BEEN
        This chapter has been about self-mastery and the role it plays
        in developing resilience and raising CQ. The main points of
        this chapter are:


        • Self-mastery begins with taking personal responsibility for
          where we are.
86   TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH



            • Developing our perceptual flexibility expands our
              self-mastery.
            • We are the meaning makers and we define our own
              reality by interpreting it.
            • Emotional self-management is a central element of
              self-mastery.
            • Mental models are useful ways to manage our beliefs and
              assumptions about life.
            • Leadership and followship are two sides of the same coin
              and both are becoming increasingly important in the
              highly dynamic society in which we live.
            • Intention is a potent force for developing self-mastery and
              in reaching our life objectives.
            • Persistence can compensate for shortcomings in other
              areas and is an important aspect of self-mastery.
            • Alignment of energy (e.g., beliefs, behaviors and values)
              serves to strengthen self-mastery and develop CQ
              within teams.



            WHERE WE’RE GOING
            Self-mastery is primarily important to the individual.
            However very few people work in total isolation. The further
            development of self-mastery requires that we know how to
            positively influence others. To do this we must know how
            to communicate effectively. The next chapter explores the
            topic of using communication to strengthen resilience and
            build CQ within teams.
SELF-MASTERY   87




                  CQ Tool                  3

Self-Mastery and Eliciting a Well Formed Outcome




In this chapter we have explored one of the distinguishing
features of someone with strong self-mastery, namely their
ability to create well formed outcomes. The following is a series
of questions which can be used to elicit a well formed outcome.


For this exercise think of something you would like to achieve.
It is important that you choose something that you really want
and that would make a difference to your life — that will ensure
you engage meaningfully with the exercise and be motivated to
follow through. Also as far as chunk size is concerned, world
peace may be a little large (considering this may be the first time
you have ever completed this exercise) and a new haircut may
not have enough going for it to fully engage you. Somewhere in
between will probably work best. Take your time to fully explore
all the possible answers to the questions — the more specific
you are, the more likely the process will work for you.


 1. What do you want? (E.g., is anyone already doing what
    you want to do?)
    ____________________________________________________
    ____________________________________________________
    ____________________________________________________
    ____________________________________________________
    ____________________________________________________
88   TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH




        2. What’s stopping you?
          ____________________________________________________
          ____________________________________________________
          ____________________________________________________
          ____________________________________________________
          ____________________________________________________


        3. Where, When, with Whom?
          ____________________________________________________
          ____________________________________________________
          ____________________________________________________
          ____________________________________________________
          ____________________________________________________
          ____________________________________________________


        4. What resources can you use? People, personal things, and
          things you don’t already have?
          ____________________________________________________
          ____________________________________________________
          ____________________________________________________
          ____________________________________________________
          ____________________________________________________


        5. Time, Money, Effort needed?
          ____________________________________________________
          ____________________________________________________
          ____________________________________________________
          ____________________________________________________
          ____________________________________________________
          ____________________________________________________
SELF-MASTERY   89




 6. What are the present benefits of the present situation?
    (What is the secondary gain?)
    ____________________________________________________
    ____________________________________________________
    ____________________________________________________
    ____________________________________________________
    ____________________________________________________
    ____________________________________________________
    ____________________________________________________
    ____________________________________________________
    ____________________________________________________


Note: In relation to question 6 — present benefits — it is com-
mon for people to have the reaction, “But surely there are no
benefits to the present situation.” This is a natural response;
however psychologists call these benefits secondary gains. Like
the small child that continues to misbehave, knowing that he is
likely to receive another slap from his parent, the secondary
gain is the attention he receives and the form in which he
receives it is less important. In other words the secondary gain
will continue to reinforce the behavior until the child discovers
another way to ensure he can get attention from the parent.
Likewise with things in our lives that we may wish to change —
even with things that on the surface provide no perceivable
reward — there may well be a secondary gain. For example if
someone were frequently avoiding promotion at work, the sec-
ondary gain may be that they will not have to make adjustments
to the relationships they have established with their co-workers.
Surfacing the secondary gain can be a powerful catalyst in
moving forward with a desired outcome.
90   TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH




        7. How will others be affected? (Explore second and third
          positions.)
          ____________________________________________________
          ____________________________________________________
          ____________________________________________________
          ____________________________________________________
          ____________________________________________________
          ____________________________________________________
          ____________________________________________________


        8. What are the consequences? What else might happen if
          you got this outcome?
          ____________________________________________________
          ____________________________________________________
          ____________________________________________________
          ____________________________________________________
          ____________________________________________________
          ____________________________________________________
          ____________________________________________________


        9. What actions will you take? Are others involved? If so
          how can you build in value for them?
          ____________________________________________________
          ____________________________________________________
          ____________________________________________________
          ____________________________________________________
          ____________________________________________________
          ____________________________________________________
          ____________________________________________________
          ____________________________________________________
SELF-MASTERY   91




10. Ecology: does the outcome feel right? Is there anything
   missing? Place yourself into the future having achieved
   this thing and then answer this question again. Is there a
   difference in your answers?
   ____________________________________________________
   ____________________________________________________
   ____________________________________________________
   ____________________________________________________
   ____________________________________________________
   ____________________________________________________
   ____________________________________________________


11. What larger outcomes are supported?
   ____________________________________________________
   ____________________________________________________
   ____________________________________________________
   ____________________________________________________
   ____________________________________________________
   ____________________________________________________
   ____________________________________________________
 'Teaching an Anthill to Fetch: Developing  Collaborative Intelligence @ Work'
4


               Communication




         Communication is the essential medium of a
       creative culture: the communal sea in which we
        all swim. A company that can’t communicate
           is like a jazz band without instruments:
               Music just isn’t going to happen.

                           JOHN KAO




This chapter brings us to the topic of communication and connects
the previous themes of assumption-building, perception-making
and self-mastery. After all, great self-mastery can only achieve so
much if we are working within a team that does not communicate
effectively.
    More specifically, we will look at the role dialogue plays and
examine how questions can serve a vital function in professional
and team settings.
94   TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH



                       Top Down — Bottoms Up

     The word “communication” can have many meanings. In a business
     setting it can refer to persuasion, collaboration, issues manage-
     ment, public relations, or employee communication. Sadly, most
     business training programs do not cover these topics deeply enough.
     These skills are increasingly required to enable flattened organizations
     to operate.
         We are now discovering that the top down, command and control
     management philosophy is giving way to the horizontally structured
     (flattened) company. In this environment good communication skills
     are essential to provide continuity and interaction across teams
     and departments. Communication is the single most important human
     skill and, like anything that is always there, it can easily become
     invisible. Yet communication is one of the central skills to building
     stronger CQ within teams and organizations.
         William Isaacs, president of Dialogos, explains that, “The prob-
     lems that even the most practical organizations have — in improving
     their performance and obtaining the results they desire — can be
     traced directly to their ability to think and talk together, particularly
     at critical times.” Often treated as a soft skill, communication is the
     backbone of every organization and affects everything and everybody
     involved in that organization.
         All personal and professional relationships are built on rapport.
     Rapport is defined as a relationship of mutual understanding or trust
     and agreement between people. It is also described as the process
     of getting “into sync” with another person. Effective communication
     cannot occur without it.
         To expand and develop our communication skills we must first
     become aware of how we are exercising the skills we have right
     now. In this chapter we will explore skills that expand our ability to
     communicate effectively both one-to-one and in groups.
COMMUNICATION       95



                Manipulation or Influence?

Often when people think about learning how to influence others
with their communication, they ask, “isn’t that manipulation?” This
is an important question. All communication is influence, everyone is
influencing everyone else whether they mean to or not. The more
relevant question is, “how do I wish to influence this person?” not
“will I?” Most influence is directionless and without purpose. The
moment we add direction and purpose it runs the risk of being labeled
as manipulation.
    Communication skills are a tool, like a scalpel, for example.
A scalpel can be taken to a hospital and used to save someone’s
life. The same implement could be used to hold up a convenience
store. The sharper the scalpel the more capable it is for either pur-
pose. The most significant factor is the intent of the person holding
the tool. Responsibility rests with the person using the skill, not
with the skill itself. This is where the rubber hits the road — are we
taking advantage of the other person? Or are we seeking to discover
a win-win situation, where the other person gains from the situation
more or less equally?
    In chapter 1, we explored how the assumptions we hold about
life are fundamental to how we operate in the world. In this chapter
I am making a specific set of assumptions about communication. I
am going to ask you to take on these assumptions and use them as
you explore this book. When you have finished the book, only adopt
those that work for you.


  • Rapport is meeting individuals in their map of the world.
    Rapport is defined here as a relationship of mutual trust and
    respect. Rapport is established through matching the other per-
    son’s body language and language patterns and by being willing
    to enter their world rather than inviting them to visit ours.
96   TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH



       • Communication is both verbal and non-verbal, both
         conscious and unconscious. Research in communication
         shows clearly that a large component of rapport is established
         non-verbally. To communicate more effectively we must be
         able to address the non-verbal element first. Not all of our
         communication lies within conscious awareness and the same
         is true for the person with whom we are communicating.
         Communicating respect and positive regard toward the other
         person non-verbally is therefore an important element to
         establishing good rapport.
       • The meaning of the communication is the response that
         you get. This principle is about responsibility in the commu-
         nication dance. We are assuming that if we do not receive the
         response we desire or expect, it is up to us to change our
         communication. Common sense tells us that it is easier to
         change our own behavior, than change that of others (tempting
         as it may be).
       • There is no failure only feedback. The average person
         receives strong messages from very early around the concept
         of right and wrong — it is bad to be wrong and it is good to
         be right. This mind-set creates distinct limitations to our ability
         to communicate and learn. In one sense immediate success is
         much more limiting than failure because exploration ends
         with the success. Failure forces us to continue exploring the
         area for more information.


         In response to a question about becoming discouraged after
     700 failed attempts to create the light bulb, Thomas Edison replied,
     “I have not failed once. I have succeeded in proving that those 700
     ways will not work. When I have eliminated the ways that will not
     work, I will find the way that will work.”
COMMUNICATION       97



  • Behavior is the highest quality information. Every moment
    of every day people are giving you huge amounts of infor-
    mation about their response to your communication. Most
    of this process goes on unconsciously. It is tempting to
    focus only on making sense of their words. The words
    comprise only a small portion of the total message; body
    language and voice tone make up a surprisingly large portion
    of the complete message.
  • If what you are doing isn’t working, do something different.
    This is directly linked to the assumption about failure and
    feedback and the meaning of your communication. If you are
    not getting your point across, it is time to change what you
    are doing so that you can get a different result. More of the
    same (repeating or speaking louder) very rarely achieves
    the desired result.


    Instead of assuming the other person “just doesn’t get it” — take
a different approach.
    These assumptions can have a real effect on how we communi-
cate. For a start, if we do not get the result we want, we are more
capable of taking a different approach; instead of assuming the other
person “just doesn’t get it”. This brings us back to our own flexibility
(which we explore in chapter 7). In other words, assuming that
there is something we can do about the way we are communicating
is much more useful than trying to get the other person to change
their way of understanding.



                        Teeter-Totter Topic

All communication is a balance between relationship and infor-
mation. In business, as in any other area, effectively communicating
98   TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH



     with another person requires there to be enough relationship to
     balance the importance of the information. Professional speakers
     have an old saying that goes “no one cares how much you know,
     until they know how much you care”. This principle is equally valid
     for general professional conversations. If there is insufficient
     relationship, the other person(s) will not care enough about the
     information you are trying to convey. On the other hand if there
     is only relationship and no information, no real progress can be
     expected from the conversation. Everyone has experienced meetings
     where the relationships were great and yet very little was achieved.
     All of the energy went into building and enjoying the relationship;
     little or nothing into the information aspect.




         Generally the more important the information, the more imper-
     ative it is that the relationship aspect is cared for. When we are
     under pressure we frequently forget or accidentally drop the rela-
     tionship piece. Our own emotional state is important; managing
     it when the stakes are high can help direct the conversation in a
     resourceful direction. When we are anxious about how a message
     will be received, we can tip over into information-only mode. If we
     are in a nervous and agitated state, we will communicate this to the
     other person non-verbally. Indeed, they may be so impacted by that
     non-verbal message that they don’t notice the verbal message. So
     we must remember that non-verbals become strong messages in
     their own right.
COMMUNICATION       99



    When we take ownership of the teeter-totter and ensure we hold
the balance between information and relationship, we rapidly become
a more effective communicator. Look closely at very effective com-
municators and notice how they manage this balance carefully.



              Connecting in a Different Way

The balance between information and relationship becomes even
more important when the information has the potential for damaging
the relationship between the people communicating. A study was
conducted with senior executives as they prepared to retire from
their positions. One of the questions the study asked them was to
identify the most stressful part of their jobs. One might expect the
executives to talk about big deals or crucial mergers. This was not
the case. Invariably, the group surveyed talked about the stress of
having to let people go, and of delivering bad news. I think what
this says about communication in business life is that it is not always
true when people say, “it’s nothing personal it’s just business” (true
Godfather-style). It is a natural human tendency to not wish to
disappoint others. The question is what can we do when we have
disappointed others?
    Flemons, in his book Completing Distinctions, talks about how
couples deal with an affair that occurs during their relationship. He
states that, “an affair cannot be forcefully forgotten, cannot be ban-
ished from the history of a relationship, but it can be connected to in
a different way.” In other words, they have discovered another way
to communicate with it, which in turn enables them to communicate
differently with each other.
    Similarly, people within organizations cannot change how they
are relating to each other if they are unwilling to connect to others
in a different way. Holding grudges is often a psychological strategy
100   TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH



      people use to defend themselves from future hurt. However the
      strategy can backfire. A story from southeast Asia relates how the
      jungle dwellers used to catch monkeys.
          The story goes that they would put a fig into a narrow-necked
      earthen jar and leave it at the base of a tree the monkeys frequented.
      The curious monkey would put its hand into the jar and grab the
      fig. As long as it held onto the fig, it couldn’t get its hand out of
      the heavy jar. The monkey’s ability to escape was hampered by the
      thing it was holding onto and easily caught by the jungle people.
      The moral of the story is that it’s unwillingness to let go cost the
      monkey its freedom. We need to ask ourselves what are we holding
      onto that is preventing us from moving on. Holding on can happen
      in teams when members are unable to let go of things that have
      happened in the team’s history. As a result they are hampered by
      their history.



                         Is Orion Always There?

      When I think of changing interpretations of an event, constellations
      come to my mind. Consider the constellation of Orion in the north-
      ern hemisphere — the magnificent hunter of the winter night sky.
                                             The configuration of the stars
                                             has represented Orion the
      We are pattern recognition             Hunter for thousands of years.
      systems — we impose                    Yet if we traveled a few light
      patterns and, by doing so,             years toward it we would
      we also impose meaning.                find that the hunter has dis-
                                             appeared. The stars have not
                                             moved — we have and every-
      thing is different. Before we made the journey those eight stars
      depicted Orion and yet further out in space they mean something
COMMUNICATION      101



different. We are walking pattern recognition systems — we impose
patterns and, by doing so, we also impose meaning. We are the
meaning makers and how we make those meanings, shapes the way
we communicate.
    A more useful question to consider about an event or expe-
rience could be “How can I relate to this in the most resourceful
and useful way?” or “What is the most useful meaning I can choose
from what they said?” This implies there are a number of ways the
event can be interpreted and that we have choice, rather than “what
does that mean?” which implies there is one meaning that we have
to discover.



                 Types of Communication

All communication can be effectively divided in to two types:


  • Intrapersonal — the way we communicate with ourselves and
  • Interpersonal — the way we communicate with others.


    Without adequate awareness and skill at the intrapersonal level,
it is impossible for someone to be effective at the interpersonal
level. A house without a foundation may appear sturdy, however,
when storms rage, it becomes a liability and dangerous to everyone
inside it.


               Intrapersonal Communication

According to the National Science Foundation the average person
generates approximately 12,000 thoughts per day. It is reasonable
to assume that most of us “talk” to ourselves at least as much as we
talk to anyone else; this emphasizes the importance of the quality
102   TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH



      of our intrapersonal communication (self talk). Unfortunately, the
      majority of self talk is unconscious and is therefore operating below
      the radar.



              GO DEEPER
              Self Talk: www.anthillsite.com



          High levels of motivation and clarity rely heavily on the kind
      of message being communicated internally. Negative messages or
      jumbled contradictory self talk lead to demotivation and lack of affir-
      mative action. Becoming aware of the nature of self talk is the first
      step to changing it.
          The simplest awareness device on the market is an elastic band.
      Placed on the wrist, it reminds us that thoughts matter. Twanging
      it when negative thoughts surface helps to begin the process of
      rewriting the scripts we run in our minds.
          Our personal resilience is a reflection of the thoughts we have
      about ourselves and the world in which we live. If we wish to
      strengthen our own internal resilience, we must first check what
      thoughts we are running. Of the 12,000-odd thoughts we have each
      day, very few are critically examined. Most go unchecked or explored
      for relevance. We know in our heart of hearts that change is a constant
      and that the world in which we live today is not the world we lived in
      last year. Yet so many of the assumptions formed a year ago are still
      running our thoughts. They are fundamental to the quality of our lives.


                     Interpersonal Communication

      As we work on further improving the quality of our internal com-
      munication, we can also work on the nature of our interpersonal
COMMUNICATION       103



communication (communicating with others). One of the most
important areas where we can improve our capacity to successfully
communicate with others is with our voice tone. Voice tone plays a
significant part in expressing meaning. Remember when you were
young — the tone of voice your mother or father used could have a
devastating effect. Unconsciously we use voice tone as an important
part of the context of verbal information.
    A great deal of our communication today is conducted over a
phone and body language has little impact on how our messages are
interpreted. On the phone the tone of our voice becomes the most
important source of extra information (meta messages) about what
is being said. Our voice tone is affected by our emotional state and
this explains why emotional self-mastery (chapter 3) is so important.
We may think we can mask or hide strong emotions such as anger
or excitement from the other person, but the truth is we are com-
municating our emotions unconsciously all the time. Assuming this
to be true, it becomes important to decide what emotional state we
want to be in when communicating with a particular person or in a
specific situation. The skills explored in chapter 3 will enable you
to achieve greater emotional self-mastery. The saying that “to mas-
ter others first master yourself” could be altered slightly to say “to
master your communication, first master yourself”.



         Communication at the Speed of Light

Light travels very fast — 186 thousand miles per second, to be pre-
cise. Sound travels at a fraction of this speed — 750 miles per hour.
We have all witnessed thunderstorms and know that we see light-
ning long before the sound of thunder reaches us. So when you say
something, information about what you look like as you say it arrives
much sooner than the actual words.
104   TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH



          When “light and sound” messages match in content we call this
      congruence. Congruent messages are much more effective than
      messages that don’t match or that are at odds with each other. It is
      important for us to be congruent in our communication by ensur-
      ing our non-verbal messages match our verbal ones. Saying we are
      pleased to see someone when we have a doubtful look on our face
      is an example of incongruence. Highly influential communicators
      also ensure their voice tone closely matches the verbal message they
      are sharing.
          When someone responds poorly to something we said, we
      frequently think it was the words we used. Rarely do we think that
      it had anything to do with the other messages added to the words —
      the way we look or the tone of our voice.
          The expression “you cannot not communicate” represents
      an interesting assumption in relation to emotions and voice tone.
      When we are annoyed with someone and we allow that annoyance
      to affect our emotional state, in turn affecting our voice tone, the
      other person inevitably picks up on this information. This may then
      change the direction of the conversation when the person responds
      to the non-verbal messages (voice tone, body language), rather than
      the words themselves.
          Good self-mastery enables us to control our emotions so that we
      are not adding unwanted emotional content to our communication.
      Tone of voice does not go entirely unnoticed at the conscious level —
      people will say, for example, “please don’t use that tone of voice with
      me”. At times like these it is important to separate what the other
      person said, from how they said it. One way to separate the two
      messages — the verbal and non-verbal — is to say, “The tone of
      voice you used makes me feel ‘X’. Is that what you intended?” Often
      the other person is unaware that two messages were delivered. The
      question enables them to clarify what they meant. The process of
      building and maintaining rapport can now continue.
COMMUNICATION       105



    A great deal of communication challenges could be avoided if
we practice checking or testing the meaning of the other person’s
message. One of the most powerful skills is backtracking, where
we repeat back to the person what they said to check our under-
standing.



            Does it Matter Who Is Responsible?

It is a natural human tendency to hold other people responsible for
misinterpreting our communication. This can set off a chain of events
(invisible at first) that could blow up into a misunderstanding, argu-
ment or worse. Some people find the assumption that “the meaning
of your communication is the response that you get” very challeng-
ing. They may respond by saying, “that is so ridiculous. How can
I be held responsible for how someone interprets what I say?”
Actually the point of the assumption is not where the responsibil-
ity lies, but where the opportunity for adjustment lies. We cannot
really do anything about someone’s ability to comprehend what we
are saying. What we can do, is adjust how we are saying it. Highly
effective communicators take responsibility for the effect their com-
munications have and adjust how they say things when they find
themselves misunderstood.
    Team rapport is achieved when everyone is playing the same
tune. Achieving and maintaining group rapport can be a challenge
as rapport tends to ebb and flow. The secret is being able to main-
tain enough rapport for the team to function fully, at all times. Team
rapport should not be mistaken for some kind of “group think”.
Rather it is based upon a willingness to embrace diversity of thought
and a healthy amount of disagreement. General Patton is famous
for the expression, “If everyone is thinking alike, then someone isn’t
thinking.” Differences are valuable; it is how they are assimilated
106   TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH



      by the team that is important. Diversity brings with it multiple ways
      of responding and strong problem solving capabilities which is the
      main facet of all resilient systems.
          A team in rapport is much more resilient and productive than
      one that is not. Team-building exercises are a great way to build team
                                         rapport. However, after the train-
                                         ing session or team retreat is over,
      Differences are valuable;          resilience is maintained day-to-
      it is how they are                 day through good communication
      assimilated by the team            skills. All human behavior can be
      that is important.                 modeled. In other words if you
                                         can, I can and if I can, you can.
                                         This applies to communication
      skills. They can be developed further with specific skill-building
      exercises included at the end of this chapter.
          Most of the time rapport is established unconsciously. We can
      also do certain things to accelerate the process or deepen its effect.
      Typically rapport is achieved by the exchange of a number of non-
      verbal messages. The exchange occurs within the first few seconds
      of meeting. The initial impression that is formed by people is based
      almost completely upon these messages. Some people are very
      effective at creating great first impressions. This is not an acci-
      dent, although they may have no idea how they do it. On close
      examination, they send a specific set of non-verbal messages (a
      smile or a specific tone of voice for example) that helps establish
      rapport quickly.



                               People Like Us

      The first step in building rapport is matching the other person. People
      like people like themselves and the more you make yourself like
COMMUNICATION       107



the other person (though tattoos last a long time) the easier it is for
them to like you. With that attraction comes some very valuable
attention that will ensure they listen to what you are saying. Body
language is the most visible way you can match another person.
Body posture, movements, and rhythm all fit in here. You don’t have
to be Robin Williams to match another person with your body. You
do have to get over the idea of it — and using the words “mimic” or
“imitate” does not help you here at all. The whole purpose of match-
ing the other person is to honor or to meet them where they are and
only to a level that you can feel comfortable also.
    When you watch people closely in public places, such as malls
and cafés, you begin to recognize the dance of rapport. Another way
of thinking about this is that there is a natural tendency toward
entrainment between people. Given the chance we automatically get
into “synch” with each other. It happens unconsciously and most
frequently between people who like each other already.
    The matching I refer to here also applies to voice speed, tone
and volume. Of these, speed is probably the easiest to match.
People generally talk at the speed at which they think. So what
does this suggest? If we wish to help the other person comprehend
what we are saying, it makes sense to listen carefully to the speed
they talk and match that speed. Too fast and they will not pick every-
thing up, too slow and their mind will wander which can be just
as harmful.



                             I See You

The South African greeting “Sowabona” means “I see you”. When
someone says “Sowabona” to you the customary reply is “Ngikona”
or “I am”. Because you see me, really see me, I am. In other words
you are saying “you exist”, “you have value”. Sometimes we have
108   TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH



      been so long in a system (e.g., a family, church, or school) that it is
      almost as if we have become invisible. The system has habituated
      to our presence. At such times it is tempting to treat those around
      us as if they too were invisible. Few things could be so detrimental
      to our ability to effect change and live a productive personal or pro-
      fessional life. Matching another’s body language is a strong subliminal
      message to the other person that you “see them”.



                      Attention-Getting Behaviors

      After establishing rapport, the next task is to gain and hold the other
      person’s attention. You don’t have to be talking all the time to hold
      their attention. Listening carefully enough so that you hear what
      they are saying is a great way to guarantee their attention. Good
      listening is about making your own mind quiet while they talk. If
      you have not tried this before, give it a go. Make your mind quiet
      (harder than it sounds — and practice pays off) while the other
      person speaks. The first thing that tends to happen is that we
      panic that we will not have anything intelligent to say when it
      is our turn. There is a natural tendency to want to impress the
                                          other person with what we have
                                          to say. Personal experience has
      The wisest person in the            taught me that one of the most
      room is the one who                 reliable ways to impress the other
      knows when to listen                person is to really hear what they
      and how to listen.                  say. You may be the first person
                                          who has really listened to them
                                          for a long time.
          Really listening to another person in a group setting can be
      a challenge. There is so much going on and we may have our own
      agenda we wish to have addressed. However in such situations
COMMUNICATION       109



thoughtful listening is just as important as thoughtful talking. The
wisest person in the room is the one who knows when to listen and
how to listen.



                 The Benefit of Great Listening

A client once complained about having to take people from their
work to have them trained in running effective meetings. What he
did not dispute was that their meetings had been quite ineffective
in dealing with ongoing departmental challenges. We did a rough
estimate of how much money was being “invested” in their ongoing
meetings. Calculating the total of the hourly rates of the 11 people
attending the meeting (and without factoring in lost productivity
because people were not at their desks) came to $4,500 per two-
hour meeting. Held twice a month, this amounted to over $90,000
as an annual investment. At this point in the calculations we both
realized that making their meetings more effective would be a very
good investment.
    We explored the dialogue process with this client. Before long
everyone in the team began to talk about things that really mattered
to them. They were also doing this in a way that was respectful of
other people’s opinions. This process has been championed by William
Isaacs in his book Dialogue and the Art of Thinking Together. He
and his partner, Juanita Brown, have also used dialogue (and permu-
tations of the method) extensively with their corporate clients for all
sorts of purposes. Their model of dialogue consists of four elements.


 1. Listening
 2. Respecting
 3. Suspending
 4. Voicing
110   TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH



                                 1. Listening

      This is a simple process that we all think we are so good at. Yet as
      we listen to another person it is so easy to add inferences to the
      things people say. When we do this, we also move into a judging
      mode that may affect what we hear and what we don’t. In this way
      judgments can act as filters. When we allow this to happen we are
      not hearing the other person, we are only hearing our inferences
      about what they said.


                                2. Respecting

      Respecting people’s right to voice their opinion is easier in principle
      than in real practice. The more significant the disagreement between
      people (international disagreements, for example), the more impor-
      tant it is that the parties involved can respect each other’s opinions.
      Isaacs describes the process of respecting as “making room for all
      the perspectives and voices without trying to get rid of any of it”. If
      you practiced the perceptual positions exercise in chapter 2 you
      will have realized that perspective can have a tremendous effect on
      how people relate to their world.


                                3. Suspending

      Suspending is the process of allowing a topic or theme to be sus-
      pended like a pendulum in the middle of the conversation. Suspending
      allows doubt to exist around the topic. It also prevents participants
      from falling into certainty and to access their ignorance more effec-
      tively. Exploring what we don’t know is not always comfortable,
      according to Isaacs. Dialogue will be difficult for people “who know
      what they think and why they think it”. Suspending also helps par-
      ticipants to broaden their attention to other aspects of the issue being
COMMUNICATION       111



discussed. In other words, we are expanding our awareness of other
people and how they relate to the important issues.


                             4. Voicing

The fourth and final element of dialogue can be the most challenging.
It requires us to speak our truth irrespective of who else is listening.
Voicing also involves finding our own voice. It is so easy for us to
speak from memory, saying the same old things we have said maybe
a thousand times. To speak about something in the moment without
knowing exactly what is going to come out, can be a challenge. Doing
so can also provide a liberating model for others present. Finding our
voice can also enable us to say something that is deeper and truer
for everyone present. At this point we are tapping into the collective
intelligence in the room, the things that the group wants to speak.



        GO DEEPER
        Dialogue: www.anthillsite.com




             Commitment Versus Compliance

Leaders often refer to the challenge of achieving buy-in from their
teams. Often this has been caused by the fact that people felt they
had insufficient input. Within a top-down organization this can be
a major challenge. A manager receives a mandate from above to
achieve something. No one had played a part in forming this strat-
egy and, therefore, had no sense of ownership as a result. Now the
manager has the challenge of selling this idea to the people he leads.
It is understandable that some managers apply the same strategy
with those who report to them — drop the project on their lap.
112   TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH



      An organization operating like this will have problems engaging its
      people in projects and initiatives. All is not lost, however. We can
      choose to engage our people through dialogue and through the
      engagement that comes from dialogue. Conversely, if they have had
      no opportunity to play a part in the creation, they are naturally going
      to be left wondering why they should support it.


              People support what they create.
              — MEG WHEATLEY


          In the book Presence, Peter Senge states that “engineers know
      that the best technical solutions often fail to be implemented, or are
      not successful when they are, because of low trust and failed com-
      munication.” So improved team communication goes beyond warm
      fuzzy feelings about team members. There are concrete business
      reasons why it pays to have people deeply involved in creating solu-
      tions to team challenges. According to Isaacs, dialogue achieves high
      levels of collaboration (collaborative intelligence) “by deepening the
      glue that links people together. This ‘glue’ is the genuine shared
      meaning and common understanding already present in a group of
      people. From shared meaning, shared action arises.” This is effective
      communication in action. At the end of the chapter you will find an
      outline of the dialogue process that can be used to great effect in a
      multitude of business environments.
          In an amazingly compact book, The Thin Book of Naming
      Elephants, Sue Annis Hammond and Andrea B. Mayfield claim that
      within a team setting there are three things that are required for team
      communication to be effective. They are (p. 92):


      “1. being curious about how every other person sees the world;
       2. respecting each person’s perspective of the world as unique
          and essential to the group’s success; and
COMMUNICATION       113



 3. making sure every person has a chance to speak and be heard.”


    These factors rely on each other. Some teams practice some of
them and expect great cooperation from everyone. Unfortunately
without all three only partial communication (and consequently
cooperation) is possible.



             Teams that “Speak Their Truth”

I used the dialogue process with a team of managers within a
Canadian health care system recently. One person said, “I love this —
I feel I have the chance to say things I have never felt permission to
say before.” After that expression, others in the group took the per-
mission and said what they also felt. The end result of the session
was a group that reached a place they had not been before in terms
of closeness and commitment. They had taken the opportunity to
share their assumptions and feelings about the team and about the
problems they faced. Sharing assumptions is something we have
already visited in chapter 1, but doing so within the team setting can
improve communication considerably.
    Meg Wheatley, in A Simpler Way, refers to a group of managers
who shifted their definition of “information as power” to “informa-
tion as nourishment”. This helped to remind them that information
is essential to everyone, and that those who have more of it will be
more intelligent workers than those who are starving. The process
of dialogue helps that nourishment to reach everyone.
    David Isaacs and his partner Juanita Brown also evolved the
“conversation café” from the dialogue process. Conversation cafés
are used to explore topics in a public setting. In their book The World
Café — Shaping Our Futures Through Conversations That Mat-
ter, Brown and Isaacs share a simple version of the collaborative
114   TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH



      dialogue process. This can be used in any situation where a group
      of people wish to address challenging issues.



              GO DEEPER
              Conversation Café: www.anthillsite.com




                         That’s a Good Question

      One of the central themes of all these approaches to enhancing
      communication effectiveness is the quality of the questions gener-
      ated. A good coach asks good questions and a great coach asks
      great questions. Peter Block has written a splendid book on asking
      good questions. In The Answer to How is Yes, Block contests “We
      define our dialogue and, in a sense, our future through the questions
      we choose to address. Asking the wrong question puts us in the
      philosopher’s dilemma: We become the blind man looking in a dark
      room for a black cat that is not there.”
          On the other hand asking the right question can have a miracu-
      lous effect whether we are trying to help a friend or facilitating a
      team meeting. A sign that you have asked a good question is the
      other person saying, “That’s a good question”. They are usually silent
      for awhile after that because your question has caused them to think
      new things. Good questions focus our attention and at the same time
      invite a deeper exploration of the issue. The structure of the ques-
      tion determines the direction our attention goes. Because of this,
      it is important that the question is a positive one. Problem-focused
      questions will help us spend more time with the problem, but not
      necessarily bring us closer to a solution.
COMMUNICATION       115



        GO DEEPER
        Good Questions: www.anthillsite.com



    In the Encyclopedia of Positive Questions, the authors (Diana
Whitney, David Cooperrider, Amanda Trosten-Bloom and Brian S.
Kaplin) have provided an entire book devoted to positive questions
that can be used in a variety of situations. To help people appreciate
the benefits of positive questions they suggest asking the following
question (abbreviated version) at the beginning of a team meeting:
“Reflecting back on your entire career think about the most mem-
orable team experience you have ever had…Tell me…about the time
when you were part of a really great team? What made the team
a success?”
    After people have had the opportunity to discuss this ques-
tion for ten minutes in pairs, they are asked to report back about
the experience. One thing that commonly happens is the energy
in the room rises noticeably. When asked to report back about the
effect the question had, participants typically report how inspired
and deeply connected they felt. The authors of the Encyclopedia use
these kind of questions as one of the major interventions in their
Appreciative Inquiry (AI) approach to organizational change.



        WHERE WE’VE BEEN
        In this chapter we have explored how relatively simple and
        easy adjustments to our communication style can help us to
        be more effective in influencing others. The main points of
        this chapter are:


        • Influence and manipulation are two sides of the same coin;
          the only difference is the intent of the communicator and
          that is our responsibility.
116   TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH



             • What we assume about communication and other people
               has a tremendous effect on how successful (or otherwise)
               our communication can be.
             • All communication contains the dynamic of information-
               and-relationship; managing this dynamic is the secret to
               creating productive and positive results.
             • There is often a huge difference between what people say
               and what they mean; getting below the surface is vital to
               successful communication.
             • Some information travels at the speed of light, others at
               the speed of sound; the right non-verbal cues can enhance
               our communication effectiveness.
             • Listening is an attention-getting behavior; great listeners
               are great communicators.
             • Dialogue is a powerful communication process.
             • Questions are the most powerful way to connect with
               others and build rapport; they are also our most potent
               ally in influencing others.



             WHERE WE’RE GOING
             With great communication comes the opportunity to develop
             great connections with other people, teams, and departments.
             Connection is the theme of the next chapter. Some of the
             questions we address in chapter 5 are: How important is
             connection? How can we achieve deep connection within
             a team? What part does collaborative intelligence play in
             flattened organizations?
COMMUNICATION    117




                   CQ Tool                 4

            Exploring the Conversation Café*




  One of the ways highly effective communication can be
  achieved in a team is through deep dialogue. It is common
  for organizations and teams to discover that although they
  thought themselves to be good at communication, they were,
  in fact, only utilizing a small portion of their potential in
  this area. Conversation Cafés adapt two ancient traditions:
  the talking-stick circle and deep dialogue. The talking stick
  ensures that only one person talks at a time and deep dia-
  logue provides the opportunity for participants to speak to
  their own truth in meaningful ways. Dialogue also creates
  an environment that enables those involved to think together
  about a topic.


  Prior to running the conversation café process, it is important
  to have an orienting question that people speak to as a catalyst
  for the conversation. An example for a team involved in pro-
  viding customer service might be “What would it take for us to
  be able to surprise and delight our customers?”



* Special thanks to those at conversation café for their kind per-
 mission to use this guideline for the conversation café process
 <www.conversationcafe.org>.
118   TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH




        Note: At least 50 minutes should be allowed for the process.
        It helps to have someone to volunteer as facilitator to keep a
        gentle eye on the process. Also it is useful to have someone
        acting as a recorder for the conversation, keeping track of the
        themes that emerge. Both of these roles should not prevent
        the volunteers from participating fully in the conversation.


        STEP 1: The facilitator begins the session by reading out the
        six Agreements — six principles common to most dialogue and
        conversation cafés.


          • Suspend judgment as best you can.
          • Respect one another.
          • Seek to understand rather than persuade.
          • Invite and honor diversity of opinion.
          • Speak what has personal heart and meaning.
          • Go for honesty and depth without going on and on.


        STEP 2: A simple process: A “talking stick” (any object that
        has been designated for the task) is passed around the group
        in a clockwise or counter-clockwise fashion. Only the person
        holding the talking stick may talk. Once they have finished they
        hand it to the person next to them. Two rounds of speaking with-
        out interruption introduce a quality of listening and reflecting
        that opens people to themselves and one another. People can
        pass if they like. They can be silent as their way of speaking.
        Then a lively conversation happens, keeping in mind the agree-
        ments to inquire rather than assert and debate. At the end, a
        final “talking stick” round anchors for each participant the gems
        they are taking away.
COMMUNICATION   119




STEP 3: At the end of the session participants are asked to
reflect on the process they have just experienced and share
their thoughts. They are also asked to comment upon anything
that emerged in the conversation which surprised them.
 'Teaching an Anthill to Fetch: Developing  Collaborative Intelligence @ Work'
5


                   Connection




                 Relationships are the essence
                       of the living world.

                       GREGORY BATESON




Whether it is two cells sharing information or two nations negotiating
international trade, connection is an essential factor in how things
play out. Communication is impossible without connection and in
many respects it is the core issue of this book. Connection makes
communication possible; communication makes collaboration pos-
sible which further enhances the state of connection. Connection is
a fundamental principle of all living systems and this includes all
those that make up human society (teams, organizations, etc.).
    In this chapter we explore how important connection is in
building resilient teams and at the same time further enhancing our
own Collaborative Intelligence (CQ). We will also look at the part
CQ will play in the increasingly flattened structures of modern
122   TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH



      companies and the resilient teams that are required to make the
      whole thing work.
          Daniel Goleman’s work around the concept of Emotional Intel-
      ligence (EQ) was a major step forward in the thinking of how we
      operate as human beings. EQ is especially important because of the
      extent to which it was accepted by the business community. The
      concept of EQ has already made its way through early-adopters
      and into the mainstream. It is time for another set of skills to be
      introduced — based upon the ability to collaborate.



              GO DEEPER
              Emotional Intelligence: www.anthillsite.com



                  Celebrating Interdependence Day

      Our universe is built on relationships. Relationships outnumber
      people and create the matrix (social, physical, and psychological)
      in which we live. Quantum mechanics shows us quite clearly that
      everything is connected to everything else. Physicists assure us
      that at the quantum level everything is energy and relationships.
      Connection is an important aspect of our world. Connections between
      nations, organizations, groups, team members, individuals, parts of
      individuals, even the chemicals that make up the human body are
      arranged in complex systems of interdependent relationships. The
      level of interdependence is deep and pervasive, yet people, teams, and
      organizations so often believe they can act with total independence.
          Biologist Lynn Margulis comments that, “independence is a polit-
      ical concept, not a biological concept. Everywhere life displays
      itself as complex, tangled, messy webs of relationships.” In natural
      systems disconnection and isolation usually represent dysfunction.
      The simplest definition of cancer is abnormal or uncontrolled cell
CONNECTION      123



division where some part of the body ignores the shared interests
of the rest of the body. The isolation has become a manifestation
and the cause of dysfunction.
    Maybe some day we will evolve to the extent that there will be
a holiday to celebrate interdependence rather than independence.
The holiday could be a public acknowledgment (and celebration)
of how interdependent we really are.


        Life did not take over the globe by combat,
        but by networking.
        FRITJOF CAPRA


    We live in a world that is not only changing but the rate of change
is accelerating. A tsunami of change is creating a world that places
tremendous pressure on our individual ability to adapt. Resilience
was earlier defined as the ability to bounce back and recover in
harsh or challenging conditions. Certainly, we are all going to have
to become more resilient to handle what is ahead of us. A healthy
level of connection is an important factor in developing resilience.
This is just as true for teams as it is for the organizations they serve.
This makes CQ a vital area of concern for individuals and teams that
wish to develop deeper, more reliable levels of connection within
their organizations.



        GO DEEPER
        Resilience: www.anthillsite.com



           CQ, Community and Organizations

We cannot talk about developing CQ within teams and organizations
and ignore the importance of building community. Building a sense
124   TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH



      of community automatically expands the CQ of a group or team.
      Developing meaningful participation develops community. Chapter 7
      will explore the theme of meaningful participation in greater detail.
      With the development of community within teams and organizations
      the CQ grows proportionally.
          There are important lessons we need to learn about the devel-
      opment of community at all levels of society. At the micro level one of
      the issues that has become apparent and pressing is the shortage
      of skilled people and the challenge of retaining staff. An increasing
      number of business leaders are recognizing that one of the most cost
      effective ways of addressing these challenges is through the devel-
      opment of community within the workplace. No matter what the
      motivation, this is still a reassuring trend. From a business manage-
      ment perspective, people are less inclined to leave a community than
      they are an organization. A community is also a healthier place to
      work — the sense of support is beneficial to everyone’s mental health
      especially when things get challenging.
          A healthy corporate community is much more resilient than one
      that lacks the community factor. So far, this could be viewed as a
      cynical use of community — to simply address a business challenge.
                                               However, once community
                                               does begin to develop within
      The more connected we                    businesses and teams it
      become, the more we realize              tends to transform the way in
      we are all part of a system              which business is conducted.
      that supports us.                        The more connected people
                                               become, the more they real-
                                               ize the degree to which we
      are all part of systems that support each other. The skills explored
      in chapters 1 through 4 enable the further development of CQ
      and this, in turn, increases the community building capacity of
      each individual.
CONNECTION     125



   Kazimierz Gozdz, in his book Community Building, explores
the connection between the creation of learning organizations and
community building. According to Gozdz we can use a series of
questions to ascertain the level of community active within an
organization. Here are some he uses.


 • Is the organization moving toward greater inclusivity of
   information, people, and ideas?
 • Is the organization sharing power effectively, becoming more
   consensual and democratic?
 • At the organizational level, is the community becoming more
   capable of contemplative learning?
 • Is the organization a safe place, a practice field, for exploring
   each person’s full potential?
 • Can the group fight gracefully?
 • Is the group moving toward or away from becoming a group
   of all leaders?
 • Is there a spirit of interconnectedness present?


   What would the answers be to these questions for your team,
department, and organization? Assuming that not all of your answers
are what you would like them to be, how can we change this?
Technology provides some of the answers.
   George Por, Founder and Chairman, CommunityIntelligence Ltd.,
states that technology can and should support the four functions
that our biological systems provide. These are the following:


 • communication;
 • coordination;
 • memory/knowledge management; and
 • learning.
126   TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH



          By helping us to develop these functions beyond our own bio-
      logical capacities, technology is helping us to develop the CQ of
      organizations. This will enable us to manage the social and knowl-
      edge capital more effectively — assets so rarely considered in the
      business world. In other words, technology will play an important
      part in developing the CQ of groups and organizations.
          In relation to the connection between technology, community, and
      resilience, Por states, “Resilience after all is determined by the ability
      of the group to sense what is going on in the environment (business
      and otherwise) and to be able to share ideas with itself about how
      best to respond to the information that is coming in.” Collaboration
      software must service the four enabling functions in order that com-
      plex business groups can further develop and support “community”.
      Literally thousands of highly effective virtual communities exist on
      the Internet already — a quick visit to Google will attest to that.



              GO DEEPER
              Social Software: www.anthillsite.com




                       Collaborating and Resiling

      Al Siebert in The Resilience Advantage makes a wonderful obser-
      vation about resilience. He says that rather than thinking of resilience
      as something someone has (like a smile or a cough), we should
      think of it as something someone does. For this he coined the term
      “resile” — a verb to describe when a person, or any system for that
      matter, expresses its ability to respond in a resilient fashion. Resiling
      is a verb or a “doing” word while resilience indicates something we
      have — a characteristic or quality. So it is with CQ, a group or team
      actively collaborates.
CONNECTION      127



                   Watching CQ in Action

Think of a flock of starlings. In your mind’s eye watch them swirl in
the sky, thousands of individual birds creating an aerial dance that
demands the coordination of millions of wing beats. On the surface
their synchronization appears to be created by each bird’s ability to
respond to the movements of its neighbors. However, high speed
film demonstrates a fascinating fact. These birds do not actually
have the ability to physically respond to the flock. Their nervous sys-
tems are physically unable to respond in the timeframes that make
the dance of the flock possible. This phenomenon is observed in a
wide range of groups, schools of fish, swarms of insects, and even
large herds of animals.
    At a distance watching this group behavior, it would appear that
there is some sort of mass mind in effect. In fact this is actually
what some research scientists contend is at work. Biologist Rupert
Sheldrake has put forward the theory of morphogenic fields to explain
the mass mind or swarm intelligence that the creatures appear to be
accessing. Sheldrake goes on to claim that by tapping into the mor-
phogenic field the birds know which way the flock is going to turn.
Morphogenic fields are created, according to Sheldrake, as a field
of collective intelligence surrounding groups of living creatures.
    Sheldrake is not alone in his search to make sense of this field
effect. Other field theorists include Ervin Laszlo who puts forward
the concept of an “Akashic Field”. This is a much more compre-
hensive theory, attempting to explain the basic structure of the
universe. The fundamental idea is roughly the same, however — a
field of information into which all living creatures can tap, given the
correct circumstances.
    A slightly different example, and no less amazing, is the way cer-
tain insects build their homes. The termite, for example, builds the
largest structures on earth (compared to the size of the builders).
128   TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH



      They create intricate architectural wonders (complete with built-in
      air conditioning) as a group and yet there are no “termite architects”
      nor “termite engineers”. The knowledge of how to construct these
      intricate structures resides within the entire population. Only as a
      group do they have this capability; it does not exist in the individ-
      uals. This is an example of emergence — the appearance of group
      behaviors that were not evident within the individuals making up
      that group.
          Ants are another great example of individual creatures that man-
      age to build and maintain complex colonies without the aid of any
      specialists or even formal leaders. In most species of ant, when there
      is something that needs to be done to serve the anthill, available
      ants switch tasks and simply get on with it. The abilities they have
      together do not exist in individual ants, another example of emergent
      properties. It could also be perceived as evidence that the group is
      forming some sort of morphogenic field into which each individual
      can then tap for guidance in relation to building the nest.
          Remarkable examples of this kind of behavior are cited in A
      Simpler Way (Margaret J Wheatley and Myron Kellner-Rogers) and
      in Emergence (Steven Johnson). These books also represent fasci-
      nating explorations of how the group behaviors of insects provide
      useful insights and implications for human group behavior.


                               CQ and Fields

      The reason we have ventured into field theories is that CQ could be
      considered to be a field of information that exists within groups.
      Developing CQ could be an important step forward for human beings
      and have significant implications for how we operate in groups,
      teams, and organizations. Individually ants are pretty stupid crea-
      tures, but collectively they are very smart. Human beings on the other
      hand are individually very smart and collectively, well? The question
CONNECTION      129



running through this entire book is, “What will life be like when we
are able to emulate the ant by tapping into the fields of intelligence
that already surrounds us?” As CQ rises so
does our ability to access collective intel-
ligence or tap into the fields Sheldrake and      Developing CQ
Laszlo are talking about.                         is an important
    When we are able to tap deeply into           step forward for
our CQ, the question will no longer be,           human beings.
“What can we do?” when faced with global
and personal challenges. Instead the ques-
tion will be, “What can’t we do?” Developing our ability to merge
our intelligences and then tap into that massive resource for the
benefit of the group as a whole could literally transform how we live
our lives and operate within teams and organizations.


                    Systemically Speaking

The systems approach is one of the five disciplines that Peter Senge
champions for sustainable organizational change. “Systems think-
ing”, as he puts it in his book, had been around for some time before
Senge so aptly identified it as a way for business and society to
create and respond to change. Based upon systems philosophy it
promotes an understanding of the whole by examining the link and
interactions between the elements that comprise the whole system.
Systems thinking has given us a way of looking at how relationships
are the building blocks of everything, including any group of people,
whether it is a family or a multinational corporation. This approach
enables us to predict more reliably the possible implications of
making changes to parts of the system.
    More specifically systems thinking permits us to better under-
stand emergent properties. For example think of your car. All the
thousands of pieces have their own properties and capabilities. None
130   TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH



      of them on their own are able take you down the highway. Yet when
      they are assembled together the emergent property is the ability to
      take you where you want to go. Another example is a whirlpool.
      It would be impossible to predict the emergence of this formation
      from the chemical or physical properties of water. The emergent
      property of a whirlpool comes into evidence when a very large num-
      ber of water molecules come together in a specific arrangement. But
      what does an emergent property look like within human systems?
          When a group of people are brought together to work as a team
      emergent properties appear. Individually the members have certain
      capabilities and characteristics. However, as every team leader
      knows, once you have several people working upon a single task a
      number of things happen. One of the most noticeable phenomenon
      is how important group dynamics become. How all these people
      relate to each other effects how productive they are. As far as emer-
      gent properties are concerned the team working together is able to
      solve problems that none of the individual members could.
          Closer to home, and to the theme of this book, emergent prop-
      erties become important when we consider developing CQ within
      teams and organizations. High performance can be considered an
      emergent property of a group of people working together in a cer-
      tain way. For most organizations the $64,000 question is, “What are
      the conditions in which a team becomes high-performing?” One of the
      secret ingredients is to enable the individuals making up the team
      to tap into the field that is created by the team. As they do this the CQ
      of the group automatically increases. A refinement of the question
      could then be, “What can we do to enable teams to more effectively
      trigger the CQ of which they are capable?”



              GO DEEPER
              Emergent Systems: www.anthillsite.com
CONNECTION      131



       The Power of the Collective Relationship

The process of tapping into the collective mind has already been
approached by a number of writers and researchers. In his book
Presence, Otto Scharmer refers to a new type of collective relation-
ship — one in which the individual is further enhanced rather than
diminished. In Scharmer’s words, the individual actually “connects
…to one’s highest future potential.” A concern of many people when
they first encounter ideas about collective intelligence or the collec-
tive mind is that they have to sacrifice their individuality and freedom
of choice. Scharmer and the colleagues with whom he wrote Presence
have tested this concept with a wide variety of groups and organi-
zations. Their evidence points to the emergence of a collective mind
(Sharmer’s term for CQ) in which individuality is strengthened and
enhanced rather than suppressed.
    The synchronicity of firefighting, police, and emergency response
teams cited earlier are good examples. Individual members of such
teams refer to how they felt part of a single mind focused upon a
single objective; invariably the experience is remembered as an
extremely self-enriching and positive one.


            Village Idiot and Collective Genius

Howard Bloom gives us a wonderful example of the power of CQ
among our closest relatives in nature. In his book, Global Brain,
Bloom compares the behaviors of chimpanzees and baboons. Chim-
panzees are more intelligent than baboons; they even make their
own tools. This latter fact further highlights the development of
their individual intelligence. Comparatively the baboon is the village
idiot when left to operate in isolation from the pack.
    On the other hand, collectively baboons have achieved status
as “the most widely distributed non-human primate” in Africa. In fact
132   TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH




      they have been described as the “rats of Africa”, flourishing in an
      environment where their smarter chimp-cousins are rapidly disap-
      pearing. So what are the factors contributing to the baboon’s success?
          One of the most striking differences between chimps and baboons
      is that although the chimps have more advanced brain capacity,
      baboons have much better developed social networks. While chimps
      live in groups of approximately 40, baboons congregate in troops of
      three to six times that size. One of the additional advantages of larger
      groups is that the pack provides greater protection from attack to
      individual members. In larger groups there is also a much more
      expansive social database of knowledge and, I would suggest, greater
      CQ at work. Collaboratively baboons are geniuses when compared
      to the individually smarter chimp. Because of their larger network
                                           they can gather greater quantities
                                           of information about their envi-
      Collaboratively baboons              ronment and adapt to changes
      are geniuses when com-               more rapidly. Their capacity to
      pared to the individually            summon the CQ within their
      smarter chimp.                       troop has then very distinct (and
                                           life saving) advantages.
                                               What baboons are achieving
      shouldn’t really be a surprise. Our own ancestors discovered the
      strength-in-numbers principle very early. Picture the moment in time
      when our cave-dwelling ancestors figured out that taking down a
      hairy mammoth was going to require a large group of fairly well
      coordinated individuals. Even the African expression “it takes a
CONNECTION      133



whole village to raise a child” reminds us that people have relied
upon networks to care for the precious things in life. In our modern
society the importance of connection is being forgotten or lost in
many places. When that occurs there is a disconnection from the
collaborative intelligence that has served us so well throughout
the evolution of our species.
    In Bowling Alone, Robert Putnam catalogs a steep drop in the
levels of participation with others, as displayed by Americans. The
examples of civic disengagement are disturbing — neglected chil-
dren, faltering education, spreading mistrust, ill health, income and
wealth inequality, religious insularity, and disrespect for the law.
This change also displays a shift in our collective values. A shift that
may actually be the source of a great many of our social problems.
With disconnection comes dysfunction it seems. This is just as true
of organizations and the teams within them.
    On the bright side, more and more organizations are recog-
nizing the advantages of developing community. Whether it is within
municipalities and cities, or corporate endeavors, there is a grow-
ing awareness that if we are to solve problems collectively created,
the solutions will be created collectively too. Additionally, the
severe challenges our species face right now, are forcing people
to think about systemic solutions rather than resorting to silver
bullet responses.



        GO DEEPER
        Community Building: www.anthillsite.com



                  Top Down — Bottoms Up

Top-down hierarchical corporate structures are proving to be inad-
equate in the rapidly shifting business and world conditions. And the
134   TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH



      challenge of change is only increasing. Looking back, that highly
      effective troop of baboons could be considered as a single, adaptive
      learning system. Our definition of “adaptive learning system” is any
      entity that learns from its environment and adapts appropriately to
      the challenges presented. Christopher Meyer and Stan Davis, in It’s
      Alive, have made an extensive study of the adaptive learning process
      and isolated the important elements. Applying these to the business
      world, they claim organizations must develop the following six
      basic features.


       1. Self-Organize. Rather than top-down management, bottom-
          up processing should be allowed to govern how the business
          responds to its environment. This means that general principles
          should be allowed to affect how individuals solve problems
          instead of mandating specific responses.
       2. Recombine. This refers to the cross-fertilization of ideas and
          solutions. The team should take full advantage of the diversity
          within the organization and recombine ideas and responses
          from throughout the entire system.
       3. Sense and Respond. Enable the system to recognize significant
          changes and respond appropriately without having to refer to
          many layers of higher authority. According to this principle all
          parts of the organization act as a sense organ for change and
          responses do not have to be centrally coordinated.
       4. Learn and Adapt. Continually learning from the environment
          and amassing a social database of successful adaptations
          will enhance the team. Adaptation is considered to be a
          continual process.
       5. Seed, Select, and Amplify. Many options are tested and winning
          responses and adaptations are reinforced and amplified.
       6. Destabilize. Elements of the random must be continually
          introduced to enable the system to be sustained in an alive and
CONNECTION      135



    adaptive state. Within this principle challenge is considered a
    welcome opportunity for re-invention.


                    Bottom-Up Businesses

An important distinction we must become aware of here is the dif-
ference between top-down and bottom-up processing. Top-down
processing represents hierarchy and command and controls the infor-
mation flow. Bottom-up processing, on the other hand, represents
information flowing up from the grass roots of an organization. All
of these features can be detected in a typical ant colony. This may
explain why anthills are some of the most resilient communities
within the natural world. Entomologists describe ant colonies as a
system that lacks visible hierarchies of command, in other words
they function in a bottom-up fashion. (See Figure 5.1 for a geometric
explanation of the two processes.)


                         Figure 5.1
                    Bottom Up/Top Down




                              Center of
                               gravity




    The question that should be asked is how can we use bottom-up
processing more effectively within human organizations? There are
lots of examples of the systematic use of this type of processing, such
136   TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH



      as the rating system used by Ebay. In the Ebay system members con-
      tribute to each others’ reputation by rating the kind of interaction
      they had while conducting trade. The telephone/text message voting
      system established for television shows such as American Idol is
      another, granted less sophisticated, example of bottom-up processing.
      The point is that as the speed of change continues to accelerate, we
      must be able to learn and adapt more quickly. Bottom-up processing
      is one of the most prevalent ways natural systems respond to the
      challenge of change. The result of increasing the level of bottom-up
      processing will enable companies to achieve their business objec-
      tives with fewer levels of authority. Each individual is guided by a
      few basic principles that enable them to serve the greater good, in
      the best way possible at that particular point in time.
          Meyer and Davis, in their book It’s Alive, referred to leadership
      models used by Marines. In the book, they quote Colonel Van Riper,
      “We are very good at instilling certain behaviors in our Marines,”
      Van Riper states. “They understand our intent, and intent is like an
      algorithm in a computer or DNA in a biological system…Now we
      must instill more tactical principles, so that instead of detailed
      prescriptive orders, everyone on the battlefield would inherently
      understand what to do. Building from the bottom up, we could have
      a much more powerful organization.” Here is a great example of
      bottom-up processing within a human organization. Van Riper goes
      on to describe his leadership style as one that is “in command and
      out of control”. This highly respected commander was essentially
      achieving his objectives by using the bottom-up intelligence of his
      troops. For most organizations a combination of top-down (via guid-
      ing principles) and bottom-up processes, enhanced by CQ, will be
      the best compromise (see Figure 5.1). The balance will depend on
      the organization and the circumstances. The two forces can be
      adjusted to provide the optimal mixture of direction or guidance and
      the ability to respond to environmental changes.
CONNECTION      137



        GO DEEPER
        Bottom-up and Top-down Processes: www.anthillsite.com




                            Wise Teams

So what are the signs we could indentify that would tell us there was
sufficient CQ within our team? In their book, The Wisdom of Teams,
Katzenbach and Smith analyzed the reasons behind troubled teams
and found they had certain common features. I have included some
of my own conclusions after each point.


  • A weak sense of direction: a sign that the top-down/
    bottom-up dynamic was not very well balanced.
  • Insufficient or unequal commitment to team performance:
    evidence that the CQ of the team was not high enough to
    create effective collaboration.
  • Critical skill gaps: this probably boils down to insufficient or
    ineffective training.
  • External confusion, hostility, or indifference: potentially a
    symptom of insufficient CQ within the organization. It could
    also be caused by poorly formulated or communicated (or
    both) team/organizational objectives.


    There appears to be a trend pointing toward a lack of CQ. On
the flip side of the coin, within high performing teams, Katzenbach
and Smith discovered an emphasis on shared leadership roles. In
contrast to clearly focused leadership roles, individual and mutual
accountability was observed as much more important. This is a
clear indication that CQ is an increasingly important factor in team
performance.
138   TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH



              If we raised our expectations then it wouldn’t
              take a crisis for us to experience the satisfaction
              of working together.
              MEG WHEATLEY


                     We Don’t Need Another Hero

      More and more organizations are realizing that what is not required is
      more heroes to save the day as far as their business performance
      is concerned. A hero concentrates the capacity for action around
      themselves and also tends to disempower everyone else (after all
      why would they have to do anything if someone was going to
      save them).
          The DNA that Van Riper referred to negates the need for indi-
      vidual heroes. Rather everyone inherently knows what to do and
      that it is up to everyone to save the day. In Guts, the Freiburgs refer
      to a similar kind of guiding principle as the “heroic cause”. They pro-
      vide examples of heroic causes that have acted as the DNA, guiding
      the overall direction of employees’ attention. Here are some from
      their book (p. 211).


        • Southwest Airlines: We are in the business of freedom.
        • Apple Computer: We want to educate the world.
        • Fannie Mae: We help people achieve the American dream.
        • Medtronic: We relieve pain, restore health, and give people
          longer lives.
        • Schwab: We are the guardians of our customers’ financial
          dreams.


          Of course these statements are similar to vision statements but
      I’m sure you would agree that heroic cause has a much sexier ring
      to it. These grand callings elevate the significance of what people
      are achieving who work within the organization. We will visit this
CONNECTION      139



approach again in chapter 7 as a part of the exploration of meaning-
ful participation — one of the most important emergent properties
of teams with high CQ.



              CoCreation Versus CoReaction

The choice of a heroic cause helps teams and organizations to
co-create their reality by deciding what they want to have. The oppo-
site of this is co-reacting, which is uncoordinated and ineffective
group reaction to unfavorable or unwelcome elements of the envi-
ronment. In true adaptive learn-
ing systems fashion, unexpected
challenges should be opportunities       In true adaptive
for teams to discover more about         learning systems
themselves and the wide range            unexpected challenges
of possible responses they have          are opportunities for
open to them. Teams with low CQ          teams to discover more
tend to see these as instances of        about themselves.
inflexible and predictable pat-
terns of problem solving behavior.
Remember if we always do what we have always done, we will always
get what we have always got, and that might not be what we want.
    The process of co-creation says that one of the best ways a
group (especially business teams) can design their response to
rapidly changing environments can be achieved by enhancing the
quality of conversations. (This topic has been explored in chapter
4 — communication).


        All change, even very large and powerful change,
        begins when a few people start talking with one
        another about something they care about.
        MEG WHEATLY
140   TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH



                        Raising Arizona and Our CQ

      Obliviously CQ is something we should be developing proactively
      in our places of work, rather than searching for when things have
      gotten out of hand. We have talked a lot about the importance of it in
      this book, and the question emerges again; “How do we raise the CQ
      of teams?” There are a number of approaches that can raise the CQ of
      teams. Three of the most robust approaches are the following:


       1. Appreciative Inquiry;
       2. Strength-Based Approach; and
       3. Solution-Focused Thinking.


          Looking at all three models we can see common threads in the
      principles behind each of them. They all take a positive approach
      toward people. They also all focus on creating something rather than
      getting rid of something. Let us look at each individually.


                           1. Appreciative Inquiry

      As we’ve touched on before, AI was originated by David Cooperrider
      of Case Western Reserve University. It is rapidly becoming one of
      the most widely accepted models for evaluating and planning orga-
      nizational change.
          Appreciative Inquiry utilizes a four-stage process focusing on the
      points below:


       1. Discover: The identification of organizational processes that
          work well;
       2. Dream: The envisioning of processes that would work well in
          the future;
       3. Design: Planning and prioritizing processes that would work
          well; and
CONNECTION      141



 4. Deliver (or Create): The implementation (execution) of the
    proposed design.


    The simple act of looking for things to appreciate within systems
is one of the key elements of this model. The appreciative filter is
applied to all levels of the organization, right down to the indi-
viduals that make it up. Rather than being told there is something
wrong with you or your team, the approach seeks out what you and
your team are good at and focuses on building upon that. The AI
approach relies heavily on the generation of questions that are
designed to enable people to find things they are proud of and feel
good about.



        GO DEEPER
        Appreciative Inquiry: www.anthillsite.com



                2. Strength Upon Strengths

The second of the approaches we are going to examine is the
strength-based approach. This has much in common with Appre-
ciative Inquiry. As early as the 1950s the social work profession
recognized the importance of identifying strengths in people. Building
on people’s strengths rather than focusing on their weaknesses
achieves essentially the same thing as AI. The strength-based
approach has been more recently championed by Marcus Bucking-
ham in his book Now Discover Your Strengths. Buckingham’s work
in this area has been informed by the 17 years he spent with the
Gallop Research Organization. According to Buckingham we achieve
several things simultaneously when we build on people’s strengths.
We help the person build upon something they already have com-
petence in, where their confidence is greatest. By focusing on these
142   TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH



      areas we are also building positive relationships within the organi-
      zation which builds healthy levels of CQ.


                        3. Focusing on Solutions

      The third approach is the solution-focused approach. This approach
      is about deciding what we want to have, rather than using our (finite)
      resources to try to get rid of what we do not want. The concept of
      creative tension that was referred to in chapter 3 is a central tenet
      of this approach. The first step in this process is deciding what we
      do want (rather than what we don’t want) and focusing our energy
      upon that. According to Robert Fritz what we do want is the goal.
      This must be then compared with the present set of circumstances,
      referred to as the current reality. Some people mistake this approach
      for some sort of rose-tinted perspective toward problem solving.
      On the contrary if we do not acknowledge the brutal facts of the
      situation, we cannot establish creative tension. Without creative
      tension there will be no movement from what is to what is desired.
      As you can see there are strong similarities between all three
      approaches. The application of any or all of these will go a long way
      in raising the CQ within organizations and teams.



              GO DEEPER
              Solution Focused Thinking: www.anthillsite.com




                   Technology, Connection and CQ

      Developments in technology have extended our ability to connect
      systems and create networks. The impact of the invention of the
      Internet has been comparable to that of the Gutenberg printing
      press. Both enabled a large number of people to affordably access
CONNECTION      143



vast amounts of information. What the Internet also provided was
the ability to connect people with people rather than just people with
information. The immense amount of fiber optic cable installed was
a side-effect of the dot.com bubble and is one of the technological
developments that have had significant social impacts. As a result
of the physical networks set down, a huge matrix of virtual human
networks have emerged. The bubble did indeed burst, however, and
in its wake it left a huge physical network that has transformed the
way we connect with each other and how we do business.
    It seems increasingly obvious that technology, like IQ and EQ,
is necessary but not sufficient for any organization to be able to
adapt to the changes occurring in the business world. In the past
many experts have claimed technology as a panacea for all our
problems. This is not always the case. In conjunction with collabora-
tive software, technology can help us further develop our CQ. Think
about a spider’s web for a few moments — a matrix of finely woven
threads that are collectively (or collaboratively if you wish to view
a spider’s web as a metaphor) able to withstand tremendous pres-
sures. Building teams that emulate this type of strength is what this
book is about and technology has its part to play.
    One of the most important ways humans express their CQ is
through conversation — this has been true for literally thousands of
years and has not changed substantially. With the Internet at their
disposal millions of people are connecting (via chat rooms, forums
or messenger services) with other people they have never physically
met. With a population of one billion, the Internet has, in just ten
years, become the “eighth continent”. It represents the most pervasive
form of technology in our society and is transforming the way we live
our lives and how business is conducted. There should be no surprise
then that it is considered to be a fundamental tool for developing the
CQ of planet earth (as well as the businesses and teams that live here).
    George Por in his article entitled “Quest” states that, “Organi-
zations that will succeed in these times of accelerating changes will
144   TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH



      be social organisms with a collective intelligence to guide them
      through turbulence and transformations.” CQ and technology will
      enable groups to tap into their Collective Intelligence more effec-
                                      tively. Por goes on to claim that in
                                      respect to social capital, “Maximiz-
      With a population of            ing the organization’s human and
      over one billion, the           intellectual capital is the key to
      Internet has, in just           success in the new, knowledge-
      ten years, become the           based economy.” In other words,
      “eighth continent”.             the organization (or team) that can
                                      communicate and collaborate most
                                      effectively with itself and its envi-
      ronment will be the one that will thrive in these times of rapid
      change. In society and business “adapt and respond” will be the
      mantra for years to come. The impact that technology is having on
      CQ can be glimpsed by simply googling “collaboration + software” —
      over 100 million results appear. In the last few years there has been
      an explosion in the applications of technology in this area.



              WHERE WE’VE BEEN
              In this chapter we have explored the very heart of CQ —
              connection. The main points of this chapter are:


              • Interdependence is a much more potent force than
                independence.
              • CQ could be considered to be an emergent property of
                groups of people.
              • Field theories may hold the clue to why none of us is as
                smart as all of us.
              • Isolation tends to be dysfunctional while connection
                promotes healthy systems.
CONNECTION    145



• Top-down and bottom-up processing are important
  forces and finding the optimal balance promotes high
  levels of CQ.
• There are positive alternatives to the old hierarchical
  methods for managing organizations.
• Technology is a strong ally in developing networks of
  connection and strengthening CQ.



WHERE WE’RE GOING
Building connection within teams, virtual and otherwise,
may require assistance from technology; however everyone
knows that it is only part of the story. Building connection
through relationships is fundamentally about people discov-
ering values that they share and the desire to do something
to support those values. In the complex societies in which
we operate, finding ways to honor our values and those of
others often requires creativity. Finding ways to establish and
develop collaboration also demands that we practice high
levels of flexibility. Creativity and flexibility are the themes
of chapter 6.
146   TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH




                         CQ Tool                  5

           Building Connection Through Appreciation




        Appreciation is a powerful force within interpersonal rela-
        tionships, teams and organizations. Any exercise that makes
        people more aware of its significance will have a positive
        effect. For example, when providing feedback to either an
        individual or a team that you are supervising, building appre-
        ciation into the feedback can achieve two specific things. First,
        it gives you an opportunity to attract attention to things that
        you appreciate about their performance. Second, you can con-
        nect this appreciation with a call for making specific changes
        to the performance.
            One of the best ways to achieve this is by using the “feed-
        back sandwich”. The feedback sandwich places an appreciative
        statement about performance before and after a question related
        to improving or changing performance. Here is an example:
            “John I really appreciated the way in which the summary
        of the report you submitted captured the spirit of our program.
        And I wonder what you could do next time to ensure the report
        is submitted on time? And also I noticed that you put a lot of
        care into the physical presentation of the report.”
            Notice in the statement that two appreciative statements
        sandwich a question focused on improvement. They are joined
        by the word “and” rather than “but”. “But” tends to have a neg-
        ative effect upon the listener as it distracts them from the
CONNECTION   147




element of appreciation and causes them to anticipate a neg-
ative or critical comment. The question in the middle clearly
indicates that an answer is required, and that responsibility
for action lies with the person receiving the feedback. By
answering the question they are more likely to take responsi-
bility for making the changes necessary.


STEP 1: In groups of three participants, take turns being
the person providing the feedback (A), the person receiving the
feedback (B) and the person observing the process (C).


STEP 2: The person providing some feedback, A, chooses a
context (e.g., someone is consistently late for work) and pro-
vides some feedback to that effect (e.g., “John you are always
late for work”). B notes what effect this has.


STEP 3: A now creates a sandwich of a question directed at
creating a change in their behavior, sandwiched by two appre-
ciative statements, connected by the word “and”. B notes the
effect this form of feedback has and compares the two. C ensures
A used the correct structure of the sandwich in the second
example and coaches A if adjustments are required.


STEP 4: The group rotates through the three roles until each
person has experienced each role.


STEP 5: As a group spend 5 to 10 minutes discussing the
advantages of the sandwich structure and places where it would
be particularly useful.
 'Teaching an Anthill to Fetch: Developing  Collaborative Intelligence @ Work'
6


   Creativity & Flexibility




        Men are born soft and supple; dead, they are
         stiff and hard. Plants are born tender and
         pliant; dead, they are brittle and dry. Thus
        whoever is stiff and inflexible is a disciple of
      death. Whoever is soft and yielding is a disciple
          of life. The hard and stiff will be broken.
               The soft and supple will prevail.

                              LAO-TZU




Although on the surface our everyday world appears reasonably
stable, extensive scientific research has uncovered a physical uni-
verse that is in continual flux, requiring constant adaptation. To have
successfully emerged in such a universe, life has to be adaptive. The
process of adapting and responding to change requires a genera-
tion of new creative solutions and this demands creativity. In this
particular game, the price of failure is extinction.
150   TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH



          Of the many myths that exist around creativity, one of the most
      prevalent must be that some people are creative and some are not.
      Truth be told, the very fact that we are living systems, ensures we
      are creative. The story of bacteria demonstrates clearly that cre-
      ativity is a principle of nature rather than a recent discovery of Homo
      sapiens. Biologist Lynn Margulis describes changes that occurred
      on our planet approximately two billion years ago (Capra, The Web
      of Life, p. 241):
          “In one of the greatest coups of all time, the (blue-green) bac-
      teria invented a metabolic system that required the very substance
      that had been a deadly poison…The breathing of oxygen is an
      ingeniously efficient way of channeling and exploiting the reactivity
      of oxygen. It is essentially controlled combustion that breaks down
      organic molecules and yields carbon dioxide, water, and a great deal
      of energy in the bargain…The microcosm did more than adapt: it
      evolved an oxygen-using dynamo that changed life and its terrestrial
      dwelling place forever.”
          By being creative, life transformed a poison into an important
      ingredient for its own success. This highlights one of the most amaz-
      ing facets of true creativity — the ability to turn a liability into
      an asset. This is also a wonderful example of collaborative intelli-
      gence — solving a problem by tapping into the combined processing
      capacity of the whole colony.
          Turning liabilities into assets is a useful skill when it comes to
      dealing with human systems. An example of this could be a team
      handling large amounts of diversity (cultural, ethnic, etc.). In this
      instance the diversity could be considered a liability that must be
      overcome (e.g., developing a management style that works for every-
      one). When the diversity that exists within the team is turned into
      the capacity for the cross-fertilization of ideas, the problem-solving
      capacity of the team is expanded considerably. Diversity has been
      transformed from a liability to an asset.
CREATIVITY & FLEXIBILITY   151



    CQ plays an integral part in this process of transforming lia-
bilities into assets. If the members of that team were unable to
collaborate deeply then possibly the liability would have remained.



                      Intelligent Bacteria

Eshel Ben-Jacob and James Shapiro, world-reknown scientists in
the study of bacteria, have demonstrated that E. coli can learn how
to switch from its preferred food source (lactose) to aspirin. This is
a feat similar in kind that would be required for us to switch to the
digestion of tinfoil. What enables this organism to display such
amazing adaptability? Each of the trillions of E. coli in the colony are
acting as individual problem solvers, with one very specific con-
dition: they are all communicating intensely with each other. With
trillions of separate information processors working (in parallel
fashion) on the problem and immediately communicating the results
they are getting, they collaboratively pull off the seemingly impos-
sible. Although the IQ and EQ of an individual E. coli cell may be
extremely low, the CQ of the colony enables it to do things that we
humans would find very difficult, if not impossible.



                         CQ & Learning

I am curious what will be possible when humans have developed
the CQ of our colony to the extent achieved by simple bacterium.
Our level of creativity will have sky rocketed, as Ken Blanchard has
pointed out, “None of us is as smart as all of us”. How smart all of
us can be is determined by our ability to collaborate at deeper levels
than most of us do right now.
    Peter Senge’s concept of “learning organizations” touches upon
this idea of collaborative intelligence although he does not use this
152   TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH



      term. Senge defines a learning organization as, “An organization that
      is continually expanding its capacity to create its future”. Notice
      that survival is not mentioned. Learning (and the creativity that comes
      with it) is considered to be something that should be proactive
                                                and generative rather than
                                                reactive, based solely upon
      Learning is not about having              hindsight, or focused on
      access to information.                    surviving. There is also an
      Learning is about what we                 obvious link between learn-
      do with the information.                  ing and creativity. Learning
                                                is not about having access
                                                to information. Learning is
      about what we do with the information. The scene has been set for
      the transition from the information age to the age of creativity.



                             The Age of Creativity

      John Kao, author of Jamming, states that we are already in the age
      of creativity because we are in the age of knowledge and creativity
      brings value to knowledge. According to Kao we are also in the age
      of creativity because the speed of change demands that we are able
      to reinvent ourselves (this is just as true for teams and organiza-
      tions) and that requires creativity. Kao goes on to point out that the
      new role of management is that of emancipator of creativity, rather
      than controlling it.
          Many companies have already recognized the tremendous value
      in creativity. This can be seen every time a large multinational buys
      up one of its smaller but more creative competitors. In this case the
      larger company is not so interested in the physical equity but rather
      the creative equity. It would make more business sense, in most
      cases, for organizations to encourage and nurture creativity within
      themselves, than buying it from outside.
CREATIVITY & FLEXIBILITY   153



    Teams that exercise high levels of creativity are more resilient
and learn faster and more effectively. So developing creative capacity
within teams achieves many things at once.


                          No Two Alike

The natural world is so creative and so committed to the creative
process that it doesn’t like creating two of anything that are identi-
cal. Out of the six billion people living today, apart from identical
twins, no two have the same DNA. So life loves to invent and rein-
vent. We are most in alignment with our own true nature when we
are inventing and reinventing, particularly ourselves. Unless we are
able to question some of the assumptions we make about ourselves,
as we explored in chapter 1, we are unlikely to be able to do that. For
instance, our assumptions also play a central role in how effectively
we express our creativity. The assumption that you are not creative
prevents you from accessing your creative self. This becomes a
self-fulfilling prophesy with very significant implications. The same
is true when we make positive assumptions about creativity. The
creator of the Stanford Business School course on creativity, Michael
Ray, shares three assumptions about creativity with every student.


 1. Creativity “is essential for health, happiness, and success in
    all areas of life, including business.”
 2. “Creativity is within everyone.”
 3. Although it is in everyone “it is covered over by the voice
    of judgment.”


        To live a creative life, we must lose our fear of
        being wrong.
        JOSEPH CHILTON PEARCE
154   TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH



                        Learning to be Uncreative

      What we attend to expands and grows, so it is with creativity. Some
      of the limiting ideas that surround our creativity were formed dur-
      ing our formal education. I can’t speak for each of you, but creative
      expression was not considered an important activity at the schools
      I attended. If we couldn’t draw we were encouraged to focus our
      energy on other activities. The implicit message was “if you are not
      very good at something, don’t do it”. It did not occur to many peo-
      ple within the education system that a child might enjoy drawing
      whether they were very good at it or not. Doing something for its
      own sake wasn’t considered to be time well spent. Simply put, for
      many people, if they were not naturally artistic, their creativity was
      not encouraged and they were pointed toward the sciences where
      rationality held office.
          Individual creativity is important. Just as you cannot build a
      resilient team out of non-resilient individuals, you cannot make
      a creative team out of non-creative individuals. By more fully
      expressing their adaptability and flexibility — two of the most impor-
      tant aspects of creativity — team members are able to operate more
      creatively together.


              The illiterate of the future are not those
              that cannot read or write. They are those that
              cannot learn, unlearn, relearn.
              ALVIN TOFFLER




                      Creativity Versus Innovation

      We should stop for a moment and make the distinction between
      creativity and innovation. Creativity is defined as the ability to create
CREATIVITY & FLEXIBILITY   155



new ideas and things. Innovation is the application of creativity to
practical problems. Another way to look at the difference is Michael
Gerber’s (The E-Myth Revisited) definition: “Creativity thinks up
new things, innovation does new
things.” Business is obviously more
interested in doing new things. The      The speed that change
speed that change is occurring           is occurring in society
in society and business means the        and business means
mantra for most industries is “inno-     the mantra for most
vate or evaporate”. This probably        industries is “innovate
explains why creativity is rapidly       or evaporate”.
becoming a key factor in business
success.


                  Creativity and Flexibility

Creativity and flexibility are not only important elements of busi-
ness competitiveness, they are also good for employee health and
wellness and staff retention.


        Flexibility and adaptability do not happen just
        by reacting fast to new information. They arise
        from mental and emotional balance, the lack of
        attachment to specific outcomes, and putting care
        for self and others as a prime operating principle.
        Flexible attitudes build flexible physiology. Flexible
        physiology means more resilience in times of
        challenge or strain. Staying open — emotionally —
        insures internal flexibility.
        DOC CHILDRE AND BRUCE CRYER, FROM CHAOS
        TO COHERENCE
156   TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH



          In chapter 5 we explored the significance of team alignment.
      However a team that is connecting deeply and aligning its energies
      will still fail to survive or thrive if it cannot exercise creativity and
      flexibility in the face of external challenges. In his book Good to
      Great, Jim Collins states, “The good-to-great companies faced just
      as much adversity as the comparison companies, but responded to
      that adversity differently.” What was it that enabled them to respond
      differently? They were able to stop, take stock of what was happen-
      ing, and create a response. The difference is the co-creation of a
      response to the challenge versus a knee-jerk co-reaction. Co-creation
      instead of co-reaction.
          With all of the advantages that creativity brings, you would be
      tempted to think that the study of it as a tool within business has
      been going on for a long time. Not so. Only in the last 20 years
      has creativity become a formal part of the business school curricu-
      lum. So we have not been consciously applying the creative process
      within business for very long. This seems strange because healthy
      business is such an inherently creative process. All businesses have
      their origins with somebody and an idea they thought could be a
      business. The tricky part occurs when business people try to quan-
      tify the value that imagination (and creativity) bring to business. This
      may explain the uncomfortable relationship between the two. It’s
      time to get over this and begin to embrace creativity and flexibility
      as important aspects of every business. One of the fundamental
      questions we must ask is, “How can we develop more creative and
      innovative teams?”


              You never change things by fighting the existing
              reality. To change something, build a new model
              that makes the existing model obsolete.
              R. BUCKMINSTER FULLER
CREATIVITY & FLEXIBILITY   157



     Ways of Tapping into Creativity for Business

There are a number of factors associated with developing greater
personal/team creativity and innovation and they are as follows:


  • orientation toward the creative process;
  • the role of great questions;
  • specific techniques/processes; and
  • use of humor.


                            Orientation

As mentioned before, the approach we take toward creativity and
innovation, our own and that of others, has an impact on how suc-
cessful we will be. From an individual perspective it may be worth
while to take up a past-time that provides us an opportunity to
express our creative side. It could be as simple as taking a water
color class or learning to play a musical instrument. Learning a sec-
ond or third language can also have very stimulating effects upon
the human brain. Actions speak louder than words and doing some-
thing that requires we exercise our creativity can be a lot more
effective than simply reciting an affirmation about it.


                The Role of Great Questions

The way in which we define challenges can have a huge impact upon
the way we relate to them. Therefore the questions we formulate
play a pivotal role in framing the issue or challenge. More specifically
great questions can do a number of things, including the following:


  • determine whether we take a problem-focused or solution-
    focused approach;
158   TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH



        • focus our attention on particular parts of an issue;
        • stimulate new ways to think about something;
        • direct the attention of others; and
        • challenge hidden assumptions.


          Each of these effects, in their own right, expands the creativity
      being employed. Formulating questions should be considered as a
      discipline and disciplines require practice. In this instance practic-
      ing the creation of great questions can pay significant dividends in
      terms of, for example, focused and productive conversations, more
      effective meetings, and greater clarity with executive decisions. Meg
      Wheatley has commented that we would all be better off with a
      “little more curiosity and a little less certainty”. Certainty is very
      much like deep ruts in the snow, it will take us to very predictable
      destinations, often the ditch.
          Some of the responsibility for our approach to asking questions
      lies with what we were taught in schools. Our educational system
      encouraged us to supply answers to predetermined questions, not
                                                to pose new questions. How
                                                much larger and more inter-
      How much larger and more                  esting would our conception
      interesting would our                     of the world be if we had
      conception of the world be if             been taught to be experts at
      we had been taught to be                  asking questions?
      experts at asking questions?                  Questions, then, link
                                                us to the very center of our
                                                creative selves. The bacteria
      mentioned at the beginning of this chapter was really addressing a
      question — a question related to its survival and discovering how
      to use oxygen rather then be poisoned by it was the bacteria’s
      answer. Questions have been mentioned a great deal throughout
      this book because they play such a central role in enabling us to be
      more adaptable and resilient.
CREATIVITY & FLEXIBILITY   159



        Because questions are intrinsically related to
        action, they spark and direct attention, perception,
        energy, and effort, and so are at the heart of the
        evolving forms that our lives assume… Questions
        function as open-handed invitations to creativity,
        calling forth that which doesn’t yet exist.
        MARILEE GOLDBERG


    Questions play a role in understanding the assumptions at play
in our lives and the teams in which we work (chapter 1). They help
us explore how perceptions affect the way we respond to the world
(chapter 2). The type of questions we are able to address will have
an impact on our sense of self-mastery (chapter 3) and how effective
our communication is with other people (chapter 4). We shall be
visiting the theme of questions again in chapter 7, when we explore
the topic of meaningful participation.


          Use of Specific Techniques/Processes

There are literally thousands of processes and techniques for gen-
erating creative solutions to problems. Thousands of books have
been written about creativity and how to expand it, personally or
as a team, so we shall not explore that topic in depth here. One of the
main ways to expand creativity is by exploring different perceptual
perspectives. At the end of chapter 2 (perception) there was an exer-
cise involving perceptual perspectives. These perspectives can
also be used to explore a problem or anything about which you
wish to be more creative. This process was developed by Robert
Dilts and was originally modeled from the creativity strategies
of Walt Disney. At the end of this chapter you will find the “Walt
Disney Strategy” exercise and can explore its benefits in relation to
expanding creativity.
160   TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH



              GO DEEPER
              Creativity: www.anthillsite.com




                                 Role of Humor

      There is an intimate relationship between “Aha” and “Ha-ha”. Inher-
      ently all humor is based on some form of creativity. As people laugh,
      they breathe more deeply than normal and send greater quantities
      of oxygen to the brain. The human brain uses over 20% of the body’s
      oxygen, so increasing the supply boosts performance significantly
      and helps learning. A great deal of humor relies upon changing per-
      spectives (or frames of reference) and this is also an integral part
      of the creative process.
          Humor plays a strong social function too. Almost all mythologies
      have a trickster or fool of some kind. One of the roles this character
      plays is to make fun of serious subjects, which provides a release
      of nervous tension. In this case the trickster is acting as a safety valve
      around important and potentially stressful situations. The trickster/
      clown appears often at the most important social/religious rituals.
      American Indian culture has the great rabbit, the coyote, the ravens,
      and the blue jay.
          The fool appears in other cultures as a joker or jester. In such
      a position — masked and playing a part — they can provide valuable
      feedback to the ruling class because they are allowed to disregard
      the norms of the social order.
          In the Sufi tradition, the wise idiot plays an important role in
      helping “seekers” to go beyond the logical mind. The story of Mulla
      Nasrudin and his lost coins in chapter 2 illustrates the point that
      we fail to recognize our own inherent creativity, simply because we
      are looking for it in the wrong place. The techniques and processes
      referred to earlier can help us begin to look in some of the right
      places for our own latent creativity.
CREATIVITY & FLEXIBILITY   161



        Laughter is the jam on the toast of life. It adds
        flavor, keeps it from being too dry, and makes it
        easier to swallow.
        DIANE JOHNSON




               Creativity at Its Natural Best

It is becoming increasingly apparent that if teams and companies
are to adapt to the rapid changes occurring in society, they will have
to tap into their natural creative abilities and turn that capacity into
innovation. Smart companies are already doing that.
    Meyer and Davis provide a fascinating set of examples, in It’s
Alive, where companies have emulated the creativity and innovation
of natural systems to build strongly adaptive businesses.
    One example is the John Deere Company. One of their divisions
manufactures seeders. The business challenge the company faced
was that there were 1.6 million possible permutations for the con-
figurations that could be ordered by customers. Trying to create a
production schedule to optimize work hours and other resources
was challenging, to say the least. John Deere used the services
of a company called Optimax Systems. Using genetic algorithms
Optimax would “breed” the various possible schedules to test for
“fitness” — the fittest schedule would be the one the computers
bred over night before each working day. Using powerful comput-
ers, the breeding process could be repeated over 40,000 times in a
vastly accelerated version of natural selection. The results were
so dramatic at John Deere that suppliers had trouble keeping up
with John Deere’s requirements and production schedules met
target consistently.
    So here we have an example of principles from natural systems
(cross-fertilization) being applied to a real-life business challenge.
Organic aspects of “adapt and respond” practices can be seen in the
162   TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH



      more recent developments of software design. Here the software is
      able to “learn” from its contact with the environment and change
      how it operates in response. The Internet sprang out of something
      called the World Wide Web, the design of which was very much
      affected by the concept of a spider’s web and its inherent flexibility
      and strength.



              GO DEEPER
              Creative Systems: www.anthillsite.com




                              Room for More?

      Developing our creativity and flexibility requires that we are open
      to the “new”. This can be more challenging than it appears. If we are
      not open to new ways of doing things and, more importantly, new
      ways of seeing things, it is unlikely that we will be able to learn
      much. The following story told by Laurence Boldt, in his book Zen
      and the Art of Making a Living (p. 50), illustrates the pitfalls of not
      having room for new ideas.
          A well-educated man once went to a Zen master to inquire about
      the meaning of Zen. After greeting him, the master instructed the
      visitor to be seated and proceeded to pour him a cup of tea. The cup
      was filled, and still he poured. Tea spilled over the sides of the table
      onto the floor, and still the Zen master poured. Finally, the visitor
      could contain himself no longer. “The cup is already full! It can hold
      no more!” The Zen master replied, “So it is. Just as you come to me
      so full of what you know that you can receive nothing new.”
          This story reminds me of an elderly in-law of my own, who used
      to insist he did not read the newspaper because “his mind was so
      full of stuff already” that he did not need any more. It should be
      no surprise that the gentleman in question was well known for his
CREATIVITY & FLEXIBILITY   163



out-dated and inflexible ideas on most topics. He had inadvertently
adopted the sea squirt strategy toward life.




                        D.I.Y. Creativity

Exercising our own personal creativity is an important first step
toward developing our personal resilience. It also plays an impor-
tant role in developing our CQ. By being flexible — and we can’t be
that without expressing our creativity — we are automatically open
to opportunities for collaboration. As Robert Fritz puts it, “If you
do not listen to your own being, you will have betrayed yourself.”
    Once we have accepted the idea that we have a creative self we
will be able to express it more frequently. We will also be able to
make a greater creative contribution to our team. When a team expe-
riences this contribution, they then shift their perspective on us
and come to rely more heavily upon our input. This forces us to tap
into our creativity further and so it goes on.



              What Can Creativity Achieve?

A story from the Oswego Valley Peace and Justice Council illustrates
a very elegant application of a creative solution. An Indiana sheep
164   TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH



      farmer was concerned about the effect his neighbors’ dogs were
      having on his sheep. Rather than resort to legal action or violence,
      the farmer gave his neighbors’ children pet lambs as gifts. The neigh-
      bors then voluntarily tied up their dogs and even became close
      friends with the farmer. The act of searching for and finding creative
      solutions to problems could divide people and is also central to
      expanding our CQ.
          Within the business environment there are a multitude of sto-
      ries illustrating how fundamental creativity and flexibility is to the
      CQ of teams and organizations. The story of the 3M Corporation by
      now is legendary. Their Web site chronicles a century in which they
      became systematically more effective at applying creativity and
      innovation to practical problems. The result is a highly successful
      company and a foothold in many product areas.
          As the world continues to change rapidly so companies and
      teams have to adapt to the changing environment. The Phillips Cor-
      poration is an example of a company that has embraced design as
      a guiding principle in this new “age of creativity”. “It is not what you
      do — it is how you do it” could be the mantra of design specialists.
      As a result of Phillips taking the issue of design very seriously, 49%
      of their revenue for 2005 was from products introduced in the pre-
      vious 12 months (the figure for 2003 was 25%). The preoccupation
      with design is just as pertinent to the design of our teams as it is to
      our products. Highly effective companies of the new era will be those
      that have put great thought into the design of their teams. CQ should
      be a major consideration for those of us involved in the creation and
      emancipation of functional teams.



              WHERE WE’VE BEEN
              A number of myths exists that can interfere with our ability
              to express our own creativity. In this chapter we explored
              these points:
CREATIVITY & FLEXIBILITY   165



• Creativity and flexibility is a central factor in all successful
  and sustainable teams.
• Innovation is creativity turned into practical action.
• Questions play an important role in stimulating our
  creativity.
• Creativity and innovation is not just important to the
  design of new products, but also to the design and
  emancipation of functional teams.



WHERE WE’RE GOING
With all the creativity and innovation in the world, if there is
not an answer to the “why” question for teams to perform,
chances are, effort will be minimal. Teams with high levels
of CQ are not only creative, they also have a strong sense of
purpose. This needs to make sense to the individual as well
as the team. Each individual needs to be able to feel that
they are participating meaningfully within their organization.
This is the topic of the next chapter.
166   TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH




                          CQ Tool                6

                    Developing Creative Capacity




        There are three modes of thinking we tend to use when creat-
        ing something or attempting to solve a problem. Walt Disney
        called these modes “Dreamer”, “Realist”, and “Critic”.
            The Dreamer mode is associated with ideas and thinking
        that makes no attempt to connect up with real life. The product
        of this mode of thinking tends to be very idealistic and can
        be impractical.
            The Critic mode is associated with fault-finding and dis-
        covering the down-side of an idea or situation. The product of
        this thinking tends to be very pessimistic, and problem-focused.
            The Realist mode is associated with a mixture of the
        Dreamer and Critic modes. The product of this mode of think-
        ing tends to be idealism mixed with practical application and
        is often a workable and creative solution.
            None of the modes are better than the others. They each
        have their strengths and weaknesses, so all are useful.
            Walt Disney’s strategy (which Dilts so cleverly spotted) is
        that during the creative or problem-solving process, all modes
        should be explored systematically.



      Special thanks to Robert Dilts for allowing us to use this exercise
      from the Encyclopedia of Systemic Neuro-lingusitic Programming
      and NLP New Coding.
CREATIVITY & FLEXIBILITY   167




    By spending time in each position we are able to disen-
tangle the different types of thinking.
    It was Disney’s belief that each of these three elements
needed to be represented in any creative process. It is reported
that he often toured the various studios where films were being
worked on and would spend time working out if any of the
rooms were missing one of the modes. When he spotted a lack
of dreamer or critic, he would take on that role and become
engaged in the creative process with that particular team. His
behavior provides us a great example of someone who has
expanded his behavioral flexibility to the degree of becoming
what the team needs at any particular time.


One of the signs of teams with high CQ is that its members are
able and willing to express that aspect of themselves (including
a mode of thinking) that best serves the team’s objective.


STEP 1: Create three physical locations for the three modes
of thinking. This can be achieved by placing three pieces of
paper on the floor labeled “Dreamer”, “Realist”, and “Critic”.


STEP 2: Establish modes of thinking for the Dreamer location.
Go to the Dreamer location and think of a time when you were
very creative in a very uninhibited way. Assume a physical
state of relaxation and evenly balanced body position, with your
eyes looking up. This physical state becomes anchored to the
dreamer location.


STEP 3: Establish modes of thinking for the Critic location.
Go to the Critic location and think of a time when you were able
168   TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH




        to constructively criticize a plan or idea. The physical state you
        assume is of an angular posture, for example one hand to your
        chin with eyes down and head tilted down. This physical state
        becomes anchored to the Critic location.


        STEP 4: Establish modes of thinking for the Realist location.
        Go to the Realist location and think of a time when you were
        able to realistically assess a plan or idea and put them effec-
        tively into action. The physical state you assume is of a balanced
        posture, eyes and head pointed straight ahead, hands on hips
        as if you were ready to take action. This physical state becomes
        anchored to the Realist location.


        STEP 5: Choose an outcome you wish to achieve and step into
        the Dreamer location. Create an image of yourself achieving that
        goal, almost as if you were a character in a movie. If you notice
        a critical voice beginning to surface in your mind, simply switch
        it off and remind yourself that this is the Dreamer location and
        that you will visit the Critic presently.


        STEP 6: Repeat Step 5 with the Critic and Realist locations,
        each time shaking off the effects of each of those modes of
        thinking. Note thoughts that come up from each of the loca-
        tions. Criticisms should be turned into questions that can be
        explored from the dreamer location.


        STEP 7: After cycling through the three locations several times
        you may wish to end by going to the realist location and assem-
        bling a plan of action based upon all the things you have
        discovered about the desired goal.
CREATIVITY & FLEXIBILITY   169




The difference this process makes is that you focus on one type
of thinking at a time. If you discover critical thoughts arising
while you are in the dreamer space you can do a couple of
things. You can step out of the dreamer space and step into the
critic space, or you can adjust your thinking back to dreamer.
A very useful development of this exercise involves creating a
dialogue between the different spaces (you switching between
spaces while exploring the different perspectives and vocalizing
their perspectives).
 'Teaching an Anthill to Fetch: Developing  Collaborative Intelligence @ Work'
7


                 Meaningful
                Participation




         Do more than belong: participate. Do more
      than care: help. Do more than believe: practice.
        Do more than be fair: be kind. Do more than
         forgive: forget. Do more than dream: work.

                    WILLIAM ARTHUR WARD




Everyone I know likes to think that what they are doing matters
and that their contribution to life makes a difference. This is the
essence of meaningful participation — making a difference. By def-
inition collaborative intelligence involves meaningful participation.
Intelligence that emerges as a result of collaboration must involve
participation. The “meaningful” part comes in, of course, when the
participants are aware that their contribution matters and is impor-
tant to the system as a whole. The challenge comes when we try to
172   TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH



      achieve meaningful participation everyday. In the flurry of getting
      things done and meeting deadlines, it is easy to lose sight of the big
      picture. This goes on until we become exhausted and begin to won-
      der, “what’s the point of all this?” At this time it is useful to stop and
      ask ourselves, “What am I assuming about my part in the system?”


              The only happy people I know are the ones who are
              working well at something they consider important.
              ABRAHAM MASLOW




                   Assumptions About Participation

      The very first skill we explored in this book was assumptions. In
      many ways, we have come full circle. Meaningful participation is one
      of the most powerful assumptions you can make. To assume that
      your life has meaning has many implications, just as the opposite
      would have.
          Another assumption that has a very specific (and limiting) effect
      is that there is a “reality” out there to be discovered. Like a school
      exam, we are then faced with the task of finding the right answer;
      finding out as much about it as possible.
          Nietzsche said that people can “survive any how if they have a
      sufficient why”. We know that when we attach a great deal of mean-
      ing to something, like the outcome of a football game or our child’s
      first word, we get very excited and absorbed in the event. The same
      is true of our work. When we have a strong sense of meaning attached
      to what we are doing, we bring more of our attention and energy to
      it. Sadly, many people have been so disillusioned by their experi-
      ence of work and, beyond a paycheck, they have stripped it of all
      meaning. This is one of the reasons volunteer work is so rewarding.
      As a volunteer we have chosen to discover rewards beyond mone-
MEANINGFUL PARTICIPATION      173



tary gain. We feel as if we have made a difference and attach mean-
ing to that contribution. Something special goes on — meaning is
being made.



     What Have We Chosen Our Work to Mean?

Notice that this question assumes that we can choose meaning. One
of the things that we so frequently forget is that we do have choice.
It is easy to become distracted by the number of things in which we
have no choice. Viktor Frankl took this observation to its logical
conclusion and discovered that we are the meaning makers and
that ultimately we define our lives by the meanings we choose to
adopt. If we wish to change our lives, Frankl advocates that we
examine closely the meanings we have assigned to the various parts
of our lives.
    There is an old story about a man who came upon three stone-
masons — each carving a piece of stone. When asked what he was
doing, the first man replied he was “earning enough money to feed
his children”. The second said he was, “applying his art to the best
of his ability”. The third said he was, “building a cathedral”. All of the
men had the same job — the meaning they applied was quite different.
    We are fortunate that we live in a society where we can ask the
question, “What is meaningful participation at work and how can I
find it for myself?” The dynamic between freedom and responsibil-
ity emerges here again — with the freedom to ask such questions
comes the responsibility to ask the other questions, such as “What
are we here for?” — and eventually — “Can I make a difference?”
The faint of heart may step back from asking that question, which
is one of the reasons we talk about courage in this chapter.
    “Generation Y” is creating an impact upon the way we organize
ourselves at work. One of the defining characteristics of this very
174   TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH



      large cohort (second only to Baby Boomers) is their concern that
      the company they work for has values that match their own. Also
      they need to understand how their work contributes to the organi-
      zation’s bottom line. In short, Gen Y needs to know they can make a
      difference; meaningful participation is extremely important to them.



                                  Saying Yes

              This is the true joy in life, the being used for a
              purpose recognized by yourself as a mighty one;
              the being thoroughly worn out before you are thrown
              on the scrap heap; the being a force of Nature
              instead of a feverish selfish little clod of ailments
              and grievances complaining that the world will not
              devote itself to making you happy.
              GEORGE BERNARD SHAW, MAN AND SUPERMAN,
              EPISTLE DEDICATORY


      The whole idea of meaningful participation can be a little over-
      whelming. I am not suggesting that in order for teams to achieve it
      they must make some heroic gesture. We all start where we are and
      work out from there. Small is good. Small enables us not to be dis-
      couraged by the thought of how much there is to be done and how
      important it is.
          To become the force of nature that Shaw talks about does not
      necessarily mean all our actions must be grand gestures. First steps
      are often small, and initial visions that focus energy effectively often
      address immediate problems. What matters is engagement in the
      service of a larger purpose rather than lofty aspirations that paralyze
      action. This becomes even more important when we consider teams.
      The team can provide a context for the individual members, in the
MEANINGFUL PARTICIPATION     175



same way that a department provides a context to the team. On the
macro level the organization is providing a context to all its groups,
divisions, and teams. This is why the values that an organization
embraces become so important; they create a context for the activ-
ities of everyone who works there. Increasingly employees want to
know if their employer operates a
“triple bottom line” (financial, social,
and environmental considerations            What matters is
with respect to business planning).         engagement in the
As people become more systemically          service of a larger
aware, they want to know if their           purpose rather than
company is having an adverse or ben-        lofty aspirations that
eficial effect upon the community           paralyze action.
and environment.



                       Courage Under Fire

The scene in Oliver Twist, in which Oliver goes back to ask for more
porridge, reveals the courage he displayed in the face of unknown
consequences. To me the request for more is symbolic not of greed
but of saying, “I need more and am willing to ask the question”. It
could also represent asking to have more meaning. Too often we have
learned to keep our heads down, not asking the tricky questions.
    Earlier in the book I spoke about the possible transformation
effects of asking good questions. In this case it could be, “What is
the deeper meaning of my work?” or “What could my work mean?”
    It is said that the Red Sea did not part for Moses until Naashon
had waded into the water up to his nose. What better way to demon-
strate our own inner leadership than to be willing to wade into
the water up to our noses? True courage is never a calculation of
risk, a quadratic equation of factors determining what we do — it
176   TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH



      is a commitment to what needs to be done irrespective of the cost
      or risk.
          Deciding to have meaningful participation in our work will even-
      tually test our courage. A famous bull fighter was once asked to
      define courage. He said that to step into a ring when you are not
                                         afraid is nothing. To not step into
                                         a ring when you are afraid is also
      True courage is never a            nothing. To step into the ring when
      calculation of risk —              you are afraid, now that is some-
      it is a commitment to              thing, he added. Sometimes the
      what needs to be done              most fear is associated with doing
      irrespective of the cost           the right thing and tests our dedi-
      or risk.                           cation to the ‘higher path’.



                           Work as Contribution

      Juanita Brown in World Café says, “Contribution has a different
      tone and feeling than individual participation. Important as it is, the
      focus on individual participation can lead to an overemphasis on
      the I: I’m voicing my opinions. I’m speaking up. I’m participating. In
      contrast, focusing on contribution creates a relationship between
      the I and the we.”



                 GO DEEPER
                 Contribution: www.anthillsite.com



          I think this makes a beautiful point about the connection between
      ourselves and the teams we are on. We are required to let go of ego
      to make this type of contribution possible. When we can contribute
MEANINGFUL PARTICIPATION      177



rather than participate, our team benefits by having a model of what
contribution is really about — that is, serving the team and its purpose
first, rather than our own ego needs.
    For most of us, what we do for a living has become an extension
of who we are as a person. Eight plus hours per day, five days per
week is a lot of life tied up in something. I am reminded of the car-
toon of the man lying on his death bed, his family around him, and
he shares with them, “I watched a lot of TV, ate a lot of junk food,
and sold more ceramic tiles in May of 1998 than anyone else in the
northern region. My work here is done.” What will we be able to say
on our death beds? Sobering question.
    The argument is that most of us spend too much time at work
for it to have no meaning at all. Helping people to see the part their
contribution plays in the grander scheme of things enables them to
get the best out of themselves. This goes for teams as well. A good
team leader (whether they have been asked to or not) connects the
dots for the team members in terms of the larger organizational
objectives. Among other things this provides a context for requests
around performance. For example if I needed to ask a team to work
a portion of the weekend, it helps to make sense of this request if I
explain that the department needs the work completed because of
an audit that is being carried out the following week.
    I am sure we have all had to do something like this and such
requests can have varying results. The difference in the responses
we receive has less to do with the kind of request and more with
whether the team members feel as committed to the organization
as they are to the team. When the organization is striving to do
something with which the individual can identify and support, then
commitment (instead of compliance) is much more likely.
    Freiberg’s heroic causes show how companies can help employ-
ees connect with the larger purpose of what they are doing. For
example, when Apple says, “We want to educate the world” they are
178   TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH



      effectively saying people who work for us can say, “I work for a
      company that is in the business of educating the world” — a lofty
      ambition indeed. Even the character in the cartoon (the ceramic tile
      salesman) could have said, “I help people create clean and hygienic
      homes for their families to grow up in,” if he had chosen to view it
      that way.




                  The Most Difficult Question of All

      The most important questions in life also tend to be the most chal-
      lenging — the question of purpose is no exception. Pema Chodron,
      in Brach’s Radical Acceptance, relates the story of a lady who sat
      next to her mother as she lay unconscious, close to death. One morn-
      ing the dying mother opened her eyes and looked in her daughter’s
      eyes and said, “You know, all my life I thought something was wrong
      with me.” She then shook her head as if to say, “What a waste.” The
      mother then closed her eyes and died shortly after. None of us wish
      to reach this point where we are viewing our whole life as a waste.
      This makes meaningful participation the most important issues, not
      only from a personal perspective but also from a professional one.
          My wife once accused me of being a little morbid because I liked
      to read the obituaries. In my defense I explained that I enjoyed read-
      ing what those closest to them, thought about them and the life they
      led. Beyond the devoted father, committed Christian, and faithful
MEANINGFUL PARTICIPATION     179



friend, there are often singular and surprising comments that pro-
vide an insight into the real impact the deceased possessed, when
alive. Beyond the clichés these latter comments often indicate how
the person engaged with life.


        When we are born, we are crying and everyone
        around us is smiling. When we die, may we be
        smiling while everyone around us is crying.
        JEWISH PROVERB


    In many workshops I ask at the beginning for participants to
identify a personal hero. When sharing with the group, it is surpris-
ing the number of people who have chosen their mother, father,
grandmother, or an old high school teacher. Many of the heroes are
deceased and continue to have a deep impact upon our lives. If the
people are no longer physically around, what is it that continues to
affect us? Often as not, it is the values they championed, values that
we ourselves wish to honor. And yet we are all a work in progress
and every moment is another opportunity to ask the question, “How
can I participate more meaningfully in my work?” or “How can I
honor the values that matter to me in my work?”



                 Finding Meaning at Work

One hundred years ago it would have seemed absurd to write about
people’s need to find meaning in their work. In the early 1900s a very
small proportion of the population of the world were aware of the
value of meaningful work. For everyone else work was only a means
of feeding themselves and their family. The industrial revolution
created a world in which people were cogs in a giant machine.
Society, in first world countries, is emerging from the industrial age
180   TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH



      to the information age. There are the beginnings of a knowledge or
      creativity age appearing beyond that. These layers of development
      can be viewed as levels of evolution. As William Gibson said once,
      “The future is already here, it’s just unevenly distributed.”
          We live on a planet where there are people still living in near-
      stone-age conditions (e.g., the isolated aboriginals of Australia) and
      where probes are being sent to explore Pluto.
          For those of you wishing to explore a model that explains the
      different levels of society and the process of their evolution, refer
      to the Spiral Dynamics Model (Beck and Cowen, 1998) and the
      book A Theory of Everything (Wilber, 1996).



               GO DEEPER
               Human Society Evolves: www.anthillsite.com



          It is impossible to explore the topic of collaborative intelligence
      and resilience properly, without bumping into the issue of meaning.
      I expect that you are no different from the majority of the popula-
      tion — you want your life to have meaning and to have it make a
      difference. If you are to spend on average 20,000 hours of your life
      at work over the next ten years then does it not make sense to want
      what you do to contribute to that sense of “making a difference”
      (the odd hours of voluntary work outside of it hardly makes a splash
      in comparison). Maslow mentions this connection to a cause when
      he refers to, “An easy medicine for self-esteem: becomes a part of
      something important. …This identification with important causes,
      or important jobs, this identifying with them and taking them into
      the self thereby enlarging the self and making it important, this is
      a way of over coming also actual existential human shortcomings
      e.g. IQ, talent, abilities etc.”
MEANINGFUL PARTICIPATION      181



                        Holding Our Lives

Like each strand of the spider’s web, each life is an integral part of
the whole. Though at some level it is indistinguishable from all the
rest. The paradox of individualism and collectivism is resolved
not by choosing one of them
as an option, but by realizing
that they are a dynamic (just         Like each strand of the
like freedom and responsi-            spider’s web, each life is an
bility) and a dynamic is lived        integral part of the whole.
rather than resolved.
    Errol Flynn, the 50s Holly-
wood actor, got his start in the movies as a stunt man — he had been
an Olympic fencer prior to that. A journalist once asked him to reveal
the secret of being a great fencer. Flynn’s reply bears some contem-
plation. He said that it all depended on how you held the sword. If
you held it too tightly your movements would be stiff and predictable
and you would be beaten. On the other hand if you held it too loosely,
it would be knocked from your hand by your opponent. When pressed
to explain how would he know how tightly to hold it, Flynn simply
explained that depended on what was going on in the moment.
    How tightly do you need to hold onto your life? Too loosely and
it will be knocked from your hands — it will become part of someone
else’s plan. Too tightly and your life becomes a stiff and predictable
dance destined to leave you feeling that somehow life walked right
past you.
    One thing seems to be pretty consistent — the universe has a
strange and subtle sense of balance — you get back what you put in.
Your “outer life” (as much as you would like to believe otherwise)
is a mirror of what is going on with the “inner life”. This is the first
furrow; this is where personal development meets professional
development — you are not two people — the one with the brief
182   TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH



      case and the one with the golf club in your hand. Laurence Boldt
      talks about the illusion of the balance between work and life as if
      they were the opposites of each other. If we choose to perceive
      them as such so shall it be and never the twain will meet. What a
      waste I say, what a crying shame that each time you go off to the
      office you bring just some part of you to the activity and leave
      another part behind.
          Work can be (as I’m sure it is for some of you already) another
      way for us to express ourselves. If it is not, we are technically not
      different from being a slave. Never have human beings had more
      choice; never has the call to live our authentic life been easier to
      hear. It hasn’t got any easier to answer the call. The call will always
      be challenging to respond to, always have appreciable costs, and
      always frighten us.



                             Courage Under Fire

      The question of courage always appears when we begin to factor in
      the costs of meaningful participation. True courage is never a cal-
      culation of risk, a quadratic equation of factors determining what
      we do — it is a commitment to what needs to be done irrespective
      of the cost or risk. Deciding to have meaningful participation in our
      work will eventually test our courage. A story from Viktor Frankl’s
      The Unheard Cry For Meaning provides us with a way of thinking
      about the courage required (p. 53).
          “During World War I a Jewish army doctor was sitting together
      with his gentile friend, an aristocratic colonel, in a foxhole when
      heavy shooting began. Teasingly, the colonel said, ‘You are afraid,
      aren’t you? Just another proof that the Aryan race is superior to the
      Semitic one.’ ‘Sure, I am afraid,’ was the doctor’s answer. ‘But who is
      superior? If you, my dear colonel, were as afraid as I am. You would
      have run away long ago.’ What counts are not our fears and anxieties
MEANINGFUL PARTICIPATION     183



as such, but the attitude we adopt toward them. This attitude is
freely chosen.”
    Practically every single major contribution humans have made
to life was through some aspect of what could have been called
“work” — Michael Angelo and his art; Madame Curie and her sci-
ence; Schweitzer and his medicine; and Martin Luther King, Jr. and
his politics. These people could be perceived as driven, however I’m
sure they would have still done what they did even if they thought
their work might go unnoticed. They did it because it was an expres-
sion of who they were. Everyone’s life (including the work part) can
be an expression of who they are.



“A Hammer, a Hammer, my Kingdom for a Hammer”

We don’t need any more tools, we have piles of them. In Stewardship,
Peter Block once counted how many suggestions were made for how
people could improve their working life within just four books —
Thriving on Chaos, Seven Habits of Highly Effective People, The
Empowered Manager, and The Fifth Discipline. He came up with
925 suggestions about how people could make positive changes to
their workplace. Block’s conclusion to this observation was that
“how” was not the question that needed to be asked — we are awash
in “how-tos”. The question is, “What will it take for you to take the
next step; to embrace the challenge?” Life requires us to look inside
and say “yes” to the challenge. We are drowning in strategies,
processes and tools; what we need is commitment.



                  Swallow or Be Swallowed

When I was seven, my parents bought me the Larousse Animal Life
Encyclopedia. In it I found the most gruesome picture I had ever
184   TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH



      seen. It was two Egyptian Vipers; each had bitten opposite ends
      of a single rat. The commentary beside the picture explained that
      because Egyptian Viper’s fangs are permanently angled backwards,
      once they have seized their prey they can never let go — they are
      committed to swallow whatever they bite. I immediately became
      very curious what was going to happen in this situation — an Egyptian
      Viper committed to opposite ends of the same prey. The commentary
      went on to explain that one of the vipers would have to swallow the
      rat and then the other viper. I realize that this is a pretty gruesome
      story, but I think that our own lives are no less dramatic and the
      stakes no less considerable.




          To have meaningful participation we must be committed. Stop
      and think about the word for a few moments and what it means to
      the snake as it strikes its prey, knowing that its fangs are angled
      backwards. Once impaled upon its prey, it is committed, there is no
      letting go, no dropping the idea, no “I’ll let this one go and take the
      next one”, no way out. Sounds so final, drastic.
          An example of this level of commitment can be found in Mahatma
      Gandhis battle with the British Empire. Gandhi would never let go,
      even though his only “weapons” were intent, love, and a philosophy
      of non-violence.
          If we do not fully live our lives then who will live them? The
      cliché of having our children live out our aspirations is a cul de
      sac at the very least and more commonly, disastrous for everyone
      involved. No matter what our parents taught us — we now know
MEANINGFUL PARTICIPATION     185



that our lives are our responsibility. What we say “yes” to will shape
our lives for ever, just as what we are saying “no” to right now is
shaping it. If we stand still and ask “how” forever, then that is a
choice, though one that will probably not bring us what we seek.
Saying “yes” does not necessarily take
away the pain, but gives it, and our
lives, a richer meaning.                      If we do not fully
    Peter Block quotes Sister DeShano         live our lives then
(the director of a large health care sys-     who will live them?
tem he worked with). She said, “the
call comes from a place that we do not
know, that the demands placed on us will be more than we ever
expected, and that if we knew what was in store, we never would
have said yes. These are excellent tests for the pursuit of what
matters.” The “call” she is referring to was, of course, the call to
participate meaningfully in her life and her work.



                     The Magic of Action

Many people have reached this crossroads in their life. You may
have already reached it. When we take that step over the line and
commit ourselves, something special happens. W. H. Murray of the
Scottish Himalayan Expedition in 1951 put it this way:
    “Concerning all acts of initiative (and creation) there is one
elementary truth, the ignorance of which kills countless ideas and
splendid plans: that the moment one definitely commits oneself,
then providence moves too. All sorts of things occur to help one
that would not otherwise have occurred. A wild stream of events
issues from the decision, raising in one’s favor all manner of unfore-
seen incidents and meetings and material assistance which no man
would have dreamed would come his way. I have learned a deep
186   TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH



      respect for one of Goethe’s couplets: ‘Whatever you can do, or dream
      you can, begin it. Boldness had genius, magic, and power in it. Begin
      it now.’”
          Rationalizations are described by Steven Pressfield in The War
      of Art as the right-hand man of resistance. The person who coined
      the phrase “resistance is useless” obviously hadn’t thought it through.
      Resistance is very useful — it prevents us from doing a great many
      things that require commitment. It stops us short of achieving great
      things many times. It tells us “it’s not worth the bother” and saves us
      from disappointments in life. It saves us the trouble of discovering
      deeper levels of our own resiliency.



             Meaningful Participation Means Creating
                           the Future

      To be a meaningful participant is to realize that we are creating the
      future moment–by-moment through what we choose to say “yes”
      to. When I think of this important aspect of meaningful participation
      I remember a story from Paul Rogat Loeb’s book, The Impossible
      Will Take a Little Longer.
          Rogat Loeb relates a true incident in the life of surrealist poet,
      Robert Desnos, during the Second World War. He was being taken,
      with a truck load of other prisoners, to be gassed. Everyone on the
      truck knew where they were going and there was a dreadful silence
      as they disembarked beside the gas chambers. Suddenly Desnos
      stepped into the line and grabbed another prisoner’s hand and began
      to read his palm. He foresaw many children and much good luck.
      Soon many others were reaching out their palms to have them read.
      Each time the story was similar — long life, abundant joy, and many
      children. By that time the mood among the prisoners and the guards
      had changed — whether they were so disorientated or moved by
MEANINGFUL PARTICIPATION    187



the unfolding scene — the guards became unable to follow their
orders and simply loaded the prisoners back into the truck and
drove them back to the camp. Desnos had saved the lives of everyone
by creating an almost absurd but contagious prediction of the future.
    By choosing to see something different Desnos was able to
carry the imaginations of his fellow prisoners and even the guards
to a new place and the result — the creation of a miracle. The fright-
ening and beautiful truth is that each moment we live, we can ask
the “what if” question. What if my work or the work of my team
could be meaningful?



                       On Hope and Fear

In Buddhist philosophy hope
is not the opposite of hope-           If we do not fill our hearts
lessness — fear is. Vacal Havel        with hope then fear will
once stated, “Hope is not the          rush in to fill the space.
conviction that something will
turn out well, but the certainty
that something makes sense regardless of how it turns out.”
    Nature abhors a vacuum and if we do not fill our hearts with
hope then fear will rush in to fill the space. It’s our choice.



                       How Real is Real?

At work, it can be so easy to assume we have to be a certain type
of person to be accepted and make progress within the team and
organization. It is so tempting to put on our game face each time we
enter the workplace. Palmer J. Parker relates an old Hasidic tale
that reveals, with amazing brevity, both the universal tendency to
188   TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH



      want to be someone else and the ultimate importance of becoming
      one’s self. Rabbi Zusya, when he was an old man, said, “In the com-
      ing world, they will not ask me: ‘Why were you not Moses?’ They will
      ask me: ‘Why were you not Zusya?’”
          I used to work with a colleague who often joked that 80% of
      success was showing up, an old Woody Allen joke. In the morning,
      when he had arrived at the office, he would say, “Well that’s 80%
      of my work done for the day.” I am quite sure he was unaware of
      another meaning for the term “showing up”. This second meaning
      relates to the act of bringing our true selves to work. This enables
      us to be more authentic with those around us. After all, 20,000 hours
      over the next ten years is a long time to be playing a part. Like any
      other attribute, it grows as it is exercised.


              “What is REAL?” asked the Rabbit one day, when
              they were lying side by side…. “Does it mean hav-
              ing things — that buzz inside you and a stick-out-
              handle?”
                  “Real isn’t how you are made,” said the Skin
              Horse. “It’s a thing that happens to you. When a
              child loves you for a long, long time, not just to play
              with, but REALLY loves, you, then you become real.”
                  “Does it hurt?” asked the Rabbit.
                  “Sometimes,” said the Skin Horse, for he was
              always truthful. “When you are real you don’t mind
              being hurt.”
                  “Does it happen all at once, like being wound
              up,” he asked, “or bit by bit?”
                  “It doesn’t happen all at once,” said the Skin
              Horse. “You become. It takes a long time. That’s why
              it doesn’t often happen to people who break easily,
              or have sharp edges, or who have to be carefully
MEANINGFUL PARTICIPATION     189



        kept. Generally, by the time you are real, most of
        your hair has been loved off, and your eyes drop
        out and you get loose in the joints and very shabby.
        But these things don’t matter at all, because once
        you are Real you can’t be ugly, except to people
        who don’t understand.”
        MARGERY WILLIAMS, THE VELVETEEN RABBIT


    Being “real” in the professional arena is not always easy. More
and more people want their work to be an extension of their life, an
expression of who they are, rather than an uncomfortable appendage
that they must accommodate. For these people meaningful partici-
pation is a vital ingredient of the work experience. Forward thinking
and evolved organizations will increasingly champion opportunities
for building meaning into how they function. This will, in turn, enable
employees to bring all of themselves to their professional roles. The
end result? Employees, teams, and organizations sharing a sense of
aligned purpose that brings forth their collaborative intelligence in
a meaningful way.



        WHERE WE’VE BEEN
        • We need leaders to support us, as we strive to live and
          work by our values.
        • “Why” is an important question when it comes to how
          we relate to our work.
        • We are the meaning makers and ultimately we decide the
          meaning of our work.
        • Being personally authentic is an important part of discovering
          meaningful participation at work.
        • Discovering meaningful participation will often test
          our courage.
190   TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH



             • Building a sense of meaningful participation within teams
               automatically builds CQ.
             • Companies that champion meaningful participation will
               attract the employees best equipped to take the company
               into the future.



             WHERE WE’RE GOING
             The skills we have explored so far have been designed to
             help develop the CQ of individuals and teams. We have also
             touched upon the topic of resilience throughout the book.
             Building resilient teams is an important way to develop the
             collaborative intelligence of organizations. The next chapter
             explores this topic.
MEANINGFUL PARTICIPATION   191




                 CQ Tool                   7

       Exploring Values to Discover Meaning




Values can act as a compass to provide us direction through-
out our lives. When life becomes turbulent or we sail through
foggy weather, it is useful to have our values close at hand to
help us navigate.


STEP 1: On a separate sheet of paper recall a time when

  • You have been most creative;
  • You have been most committed to something;
  • You have made your mind up to do something (despite
    people telling you couldn’t do it) and did it despite all the
    obstacles; and
  • You have been so absorbed in something that you ceased
    to notice time passing.


    Take a few moments for each question and jot down some
notes about what comes to mind.


STEP 2: For each of the instances that come to mind, deter-
mine the value being suggested. What was it that was motivating
you to do what you were doing? Write down your answers.


Note: To get the juices flowing you may want to Google values;
you will find many sites displaying long lists of values.
192   TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH




        STEP 3: You should be able to spot some values that have
        emerged from this exercise. Place them in order of priority.


        STEP 4: Ask yourself, “How can I honor these values in my
        work place?” or “If I were honoring these values in my day-to-day
        work, what would that look like?”


        Note: Your team might like to explore this exercise together. It
        could help to bring team members to a deeper understanding of
        the values that are important to their colleagues. This can lead
        to the next step — a shared set of values for the whole team.


        You have now taken some simple steps towards identifying how
        to bring more meaningful participation into your work life.
8


               Building High
                CQ Teams




      Experience is a hard teacher because she gives
             the test first, the lesson afterwards.

                           VERNON LAW




So what does a team with high CQ look like? Is it a spectacular
sight that takes your breath away when you see it in action? Like
the Cirque de Soliel, would it baffle and mesmerize the audience
with its death-defying feats? Not really. Such teams metaphorically
appear more like a flock of starlings at twilight. As you look at the
flock you may recognize it as a group of individuals; however, it seems
as if they are informed by the one group mind, as they twist and
turn, adapting to their environment. It’s difficult to make out who
the leader is and yet the group as a whole behaves in a purposeful
and effective fashion. Each member of the flock/team has their own
194   TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH



      freedom of action and takes every chance it gets to choreograph its
      flight with that of the flock.



           Collaboratively Intelligent Teams Are Boring

      It could be said that teams with high CQ are quite boring. There
      are very few dramas and no exciting heroes the team relies on to
      save the day. People pull their weight and support each other to an
      extraordinary degree. There is a vigorous pursuit for learning, not
      only at the individual level, but at the team level also. There is a
      sense of community within the team or department. People from
      outside sense this very quickly and notice something special is going
      on. We have all had this experience and most of us can’t put our
      finger on what it is. Like the difference between listening to a well-
                                              rehearsed orchestra and a
                                              group of novice musicians
      A team with high CQ                     that are playing out of key.
      expects challenge and meets                 A team with high CQ
      it with one eye on results;             expects challenge and meets
      the other on what it can                it with one eye on results and
      learn from each encounter.              the other on what it can learn
                                              from each encounter with
                                              something new.
          A collaboratively intelligent team realizes that all great teams
      are a process, not a thing. This is based upon strong bonds between
      its members. There is an awareness that each person in the team is
      also a process and not static. Personality profiles are perceived as
      general guides but each person is encouraged to grow and change
      in positive ways. Team members know that a great deal of behavior
      is determined by the situation and they consciously create situations
      where collaboration is easy and fruitful. The assumption is that no
BUILDING HIGH CQ TEAMS   195



matter what the personality of the team member, there will always
be opportunities for high levels of collaboration.
    The purpose of this book was not to make you and your team
boring — there are others benefits of building high CQ teams.


  • A High CQ team is able to share the stress and strain evenly
    throughout the team — like a tennis racket takes the impact
    of a ball at one point in the racket and the pressure is spread
    throughout all the strings.
  • A High CQ team has a strong network of connection and
    support between its members. This accelerates learning
    enabling the team’s reactions to be rapid and responsive to
    the challenges the team encounters.
  • A High CQ team looks after its own; individuals are not left to
    fend for themselves and staff retention is high because people
    feel a strong sense of belonging.
  • A High CQ team is well connected with other teams and with
    corporate objectives. Like a healthy organ in the body — it
    knows what its function is and serves the greater good
    through rough times and smooth.
  • A high CQ team achieves its objectives more through people
    and less through politics
  • A High CQ team replenishes itself, growing its members, and
    is constantly learning to better adapt to its environment.
  • A high CQ team displays a strong sense of meaningful
    participation, which the members are all nourished by.


    So teams with High CQ are already out there and as the impor-
tance of collaborative intelligence becomes more recognized, more
will emerge. Other factors are at work within this mix, however.
There is a “changing of the guard” within businesses, most notice-
ably in those countries with large baby boomer populations.
196   TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH



                          Y are They Important?

      As the baby boomers begin to leave the stage another generation
      begins to makes its presence more obvious — generation “Y”. North
      Americans born between 1977 and 2003 make up this generation.
      “Gen Y” is the second largest cohort after the baby boomers and
      while much more varied in their characteristics, these cohorts may
      share many of their values. Asked what their three most important
      values were when choosing a company to work for, they choose
      integrity, social responsibility, and loyalty. Asked what they valued
      most about their work and Gen Y quickly isolated teamwork, work-
      life balance, stimulating work, and lots of feedback. Honoring these
      values in the workplace, we will build businesses that will help the
      Gen Y’s become and remain engaged. Gen Y is also much more mul-
      ticultural than the baby boomer cohort and so training in the area of
      diversity will help in the process of developing high CQ teams.
          The shifting generations are having a huge effect upon how
      business can work through teams. As Gen Y begins to infuse the work-
      force with different values and perspectives, we will have to find a
      way to accommodate their arrival and prepare for the departure of
      the baby boomers.
          Mentoring and coaching will become more important as a way
      to effectively transfer all the soft information and skills between
      the generations within the business environment. Other manage-
      ment strategies to assist Gen Y in the process of taking over the
      reins include:


        • providing training in time management;
        • offering community involvement opportunities;
        • creating a system for frequent public praise for performance;
        • creating many opportunities for team involvement; and
        • customizing the career paths for employees.
BUILDING HIGH CQ TEAMS      197



        GO DEEPER
        Gen Y and Baby Boomers: www.anthillsite.com



    Knowledge management is clearly an issue here. Valuable infor-
mation the baby boomers are carrying around with them needs to
be transferred across to their Gen Y colleagues. For these reasons
we have chosen multi-dimensional coaching as the CQ Tool for
this chapter. This tool enables coaching to occur in many directions.



                Multi-Dimensional Coaching

With fewer layers of management, employees must assume greater
responsibility (with the support of their management team) in tak-
ing initiative and sharing in the leadership process. The most resilient
companies will be those through which
leadership flows. Leadership in such
companies will become a fluid process            Every employee
that touches every one at every level.           must be willing to
    Every employee must be willing to            lead and be lead.
lead and be lead. A different way of relat-
ing to others is required to make the shift
from depending on others to contributing through others. Team
members who are contributing through others will have the ability to:


  • develop technical breadth;
  • broaden business perspective;
  • stimulate others with ideas and knowledge;
  • be involved as a leader, mentor or idea-generator in developing
    others; and
  • build strong networks (internal and external).
198   TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH



                     Teaching an Anthill to Coach

      Developing the CQ of teams requires that we look closely at how
      we interact with each other. One of the most effective ways to
      accomplish this task is by developing team members’ ability to coach
      each other. Coaching develops the team’s ability to learn from and
      contribute through each other. It is a central strategy of a flattened
      organization. Coaching can be directed in three main ways as demon-
      strated in Figure 8.1.


                               Figure 8.1
                      Multi-Dimensional Coaching




                        ‘Up‘                     Across
                      (Manager)                  (Peers)
                                     LEAD
                                   Coaching
                                    Process



                                  Supervisory




          We refer to this approach as “multi-dimensional”. Organizational
      structure and management accountability taken to one side, the
      actual process of performance coaching consists of essentially
      the same process whichever direction it is conducted. A coach is
      someone that helps others with the tools, knowledge, and opportu-
      nities they need to develop themselves and become more effective.
BUILDING HIGH CQ TEAMS     199



    Coaches don’t develop others — they help others develop them-
selves. By definition, then, most employees have the potential to be
effective coaches in all three directions. Informal coaching processes
offer tremendous potential for releasing untapped energy from teams.
With informal coaching comes the prospect of every employee
becoming involved in the organization’s growth and development.
This makes multi-dimensional coaching an important CQ Tool in
the development of CQ within teams.
200   TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH




                        CQ Tools                  8

                    The LEADing Change System




        The LEAD System represents a simple coaching method that
        can be used in any of the three coaching directions. The acronym
        ensures that important elements are addressed during each
        coaching conversation.
            The system consists of four stages:


          • Leverage
          • Environment
          • Alternatives
          • Development


            We can also represent this system in a diagram.


                             LEADing Change




                                         Environment
                        Leverage




                       Development        Alternatives
BUILDING HIGH CQ TEAMS   201




Leverage is the point of entry and represents the opportunity
for change. It may be discovered when someone says something
about a change they would like to make in their effectiveness
or something with which they are unhappy. For all intentional
purposes it represents the goal of the coaching session. The
leverage stage achieves the following:


  • discovers a topic for discussion;
  • explores the reason for desired change;
  • establishes an objective for the coaching conversation;
    and
  • creates a long-term goal when appropriate.


Environment represents the present reality. This includes a
description of what is presently happening. Jim Collins would
describe this stage as the “brutal facts”. It may include behaviors
(including those of other people involved) and a description of
the situation that lead to the “leverage point”. The environment
stage achieves the following:


  • encourages self-assessment;
  • provides an appreciative feedback sandwich;
  • surfaces assumptions; and
  • discounts immaterial history.


Alternatives represent the range of choices available for making
changes. It may involve imagining the ideal future or brain-
storming paths forward. Assumptions have such a strong impact
on our lives; this stage can be a second chance to evaluate any
assumptions that may affect the generation of alternatives. This
stage achieves the following:
202   TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH




          • explores the full range of alternatives;
          • brainstorms with coachee around ways forward;
          • carefully offers suggestions; and
          • coaches them to a choice.


        Development represents the point at which the coachee pre-
        pares to take action. This is also the place that the coachee
        identifies how and where they will make changes. The LEAD
        system is a cyclical process and the final stage is really a con-
        nection to revisiting the leverage stage. By doing this the coach
        and coachee are able to have another conversation around the
        coaching issue. However this time around the issue has been
        (all being well) moved forward by the coachee. If necessary
        the LEAD process can help the coachee make further progress.
        The development stage achieves the following:


          • gains commitment from the coachee to take action;
          • anticipates potential obstacles;
          • creates specific timelines and plans for next step; and
          • provides support for change process.


            Use the LEADing Change diagram in this exercise to guide
        the process. Start with low risk issues to practice with the
        system. Arrange to have follow-up sessions with the person
        you are working. This can be achieved by saying you would be
        interested in hearing how they got on with the next step.
2


            So Where Are We
                Going…

Can you teach an anthill to fetch? It depends on how you define
“fetch”. If we are using the term as a metaphor for enabling a large
number of individuals to achieve an unprecedented level of coordi-
nation, then yes it is possible to teach an anthill to fetch. This book
has been an exploration of the principles and processes that make
that possible for teams and organizations.
    In this hyper-linked world, harnessing the attention and energy
of a team has never been more challenging. IQ and EQ (Emotional
Intelligence) are necessary but no longer sufficient to deal with the
present rate of change. Getting people onboard and keeping them
there demands a new level of collaboration.
    Teaching an anthill to fetch is a metaphor. A metaphor for all the
things we know our team could do. Moving a group of people from
one way of operating to another is very like teaching an anthill to
fetch. Given the right approach to the challenge and the right tools,
we can develop the CQ of our teams and organizations.
    The Collaborative Intelligence of a team is defined as the
capacity to create, contribute to, and harness the intelligence
within the group. By raising the level of CQ everyone benefits. This
unique combination of practical CQ Tools and processes helps
teams to:
204   TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH



        • attract and retain high quality team members;
        • create a sense of meaningful participation;
        • collaborate in highly effective ways;
        • connect to a strong sense of purpose; and
        • balance leadership and followship.


          Developing CQ enables teams to build strong connections and
      tap into the awe-inspiring power within each of us. It also helps teams
      realize that none of us is as intelligent as all of us.


      Good teams and organizations have developed good levels of CQ;
      great ones have great CQ. There has never been a more opportune
      moment in time to decide to do something — for our teams, our
      employees, our organizations, and ourselves.
2


                Bibliography

Beck, Don Edward and Christopher Cowan. Spiral Dynamics:
   Mastering Values, Leadership and Change (reprint). Blackwell
   Publishing, Incorporated, 2005
Block, Peter. Stewardship. Berrett-Koehler, 1996
Block, Peter. The Answer to How Is Yes: Acting on What Matters.
   Berrett-Koehler Publishers, 2003
Block, Peter. The Empowered Manager: Positive Political Skills at
   Work. Jossey-Bass, 1991
Bloom, Howard. Global Brain: The Evolution of Mass Mind from
   the Big Bang to the 21st Century. Wiley, 2000
Boldt, Laurence. Zen and the Art of Making a Living: A Practical
   Guide to Creative Career Design. Penguin (Non-Classics), 1999
Brach, Tara. Radical Acceptance. Bantam, 2004
Brown, Juanita with David Isaacs and the World Café Community.
   The World Café: Shaping Our Futures Through Conversations
   That Matter. Berrett-Koehler Publishers, 2005
Buckingham, Marcus and Donald O. Clifton. Now, Discover Your
   Strengths. Pocket Books, 2005
Capra, Fritjof. The Web of Life: A New Scientific Understanding of
   Living Systems. Anchor, 1997
Carroll, Lewis. Alice Through the Looking Glass. Gramercy, 2004
Childre, Doc Lew and Bruce Cryer. From Chaos to Coherence (The
   Power to Change Performance). HeartMath, 2000
206   TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH



      Collins, Jim. Good to Great: Why Some Companies Make the Leap...
         and Others Don’t. Harper Collins, 2001
      Covey, Stephen R. The 7 Habits of Highly Effective People, 15th
         anniversay edition. Free Press, 2004
      Csikszentmihalyi, Mihaly. Flow the Psychology of Optimal Experi-
         ence. HarperCollins Publisher, 1990
      Dilts, Robert. Encyclopedia of Systemic Neuro-Linguistic Pro-
         gramming and NLP New Coding. N L P University Press, 2000
      Eidser, John. Global Brain: The Evolution of Mass Mind from the
         Big Bang to the 21st Century. Wiley, 2001
      Flemons, Douglas G. Completing Distinctions: Interweaving the
         Ideas of Gregory Bateson and Taoism into a unique approach
         to therapy. Shambhala, 2001
      Frankl, Viktor E. Man’s Search for Meaning. Beacon Press, 2006
      Frankl, Viktor Emil. The Unheard Cry For Meaning. Touchstone
         Books, 1979
      Freiberg, Kevin and Jackie. Guts! Companies that Blow the Doors
         off Business-as-usual. Currency, 2003
      Fritz, Robert. The Path of Least Resistance. Butterworth-Heinemann
         Ltd., 1994
      Gerber, Michael, The E-Myth Revisited: Why Most Small Businesses
         Don’t Work and What to Do About It. Collins, 1995
      Goleman, Daniel. Emotional Intelligence. Bloomsbury Publishing
         PLC, 1996
      Gozdz, Kazimierz (ed). Community Building: Renewing Spirit and
         Learning in Business. New Leaders Press, 1996
      Hammond, Sue Annis and Andrea B. Mayfield. The Thin Book
         of Naming Elephants: How to Surface Undiscussables for
         Greater Organizational Success. Thin Book Publishing Co.,
         2004
      Hankins, Gerald W. Rolling On: The Story of the Amazing Gary
         McPherson. The University of Alberta Press, 2003
BIBLIOGRAPHY    207



Isaacs, William. Dialogue: The Art Of Thinking Together. Currency,
    1999
Johnson, Steven. Emergence: The Connected Lives of Ants, Brains,
    Cities, and Software (reprint). Scribner, 2002
Kao, John. Jamming. Harper Collins Canada, 1997
Katzenbach, Jon R. and Douglas K. Smith. The Wisdom of Teams:
    Creating the High-Performance Organization (reprint). Collins
    Business Essentials, 2003
Kurzweil, Ray. The Age of Spiritual Machines. Penguin (Non-
    Classics), 2000
Kurzweil, Ray. The Singularity Is Near: When Humans Transcend
    Biology. Penguin, 2006
Loeb, Paul Rogat, ed. The Impossible Will Take a Little While: A
    Citizen’s Guide to Hope in a Time of Fear. Basic Books, 2004
Meyer, Christopher and Stan Davis. It’s Alive: The Coming Conver-
    gence of Information, Biology, and Business. Crown Business,
    2003
Norretranders, Tor. The User Illusion: Cutting Consciousness Down
    to Size. Penguin Press Science, 1999
O’Connor, Joseph and Ian McDermott. The Art of Systems Thinking:
    Essential Skills for Creativity and Problem Solving. Thorsons,
    1997
Peters, Tom. Thriving on Chaos: Handbook for a Management
    Revolution. Harper Paperbacks, 1988
Peterson, Christopher. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology.
    University of Michigan, 1989
Pressfield, Steven. The War of Art: Break Through the Blocks and
   Win Your Inner Creative Battles. Warner Books, 2003
Putnam, Robert D. Bowling Alone: The Collapse and Revival of
   American Community. Simon & Schuster, 2001
Scharmer, Otto, et al. Presence: An Exploration of Profound Change
    in People, Organizations, and Society. Currency, 2005
208   TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH



      Senge, Peter M. The Fifth Discipline: The Art & Practice of The
          Learning Organization. Currency, 2006
      Senge, Peter M., C. Otto Scharmer, Joseph Jaworski and Betty Sue
          Flowers: Presence: An Exploration of Profound Change in
          People, Organizations, and Society. Currency, 2005
      Shaw, Bernard. Man And Superman: a Comedy And a Philosophy.
          Kessinger Publishing, 2005
      Siebert, Al. The Resiliency Advantage: Master Change, Thrive Under
          Pressure, and Bounce Back from Setbacks. Berrett-Koehler
          Publishers, 2005
      Turnbull, Colin. The Forest People. Touchstone Book, 1987
      Wheatley, Margaret J. and Myron Kellner-Rogers. A Simpler Way.
          Berrett-Koehler Publishers, 1998
      Whitney, Diana L. and Amanda Trosten-Bloom. Encyclopaedia of
          Positive Questions: Using AI to Bring Out the Best in Your
          Organization (Tools in Appreciative Inquiry), Volume I. Lake-
          shore Communications, 2001
      Wilber, Ken. A Theory of Everything: An Integral Vision for Business,
          Politics, Science and Spirituality. Shambhala, 2001
2


                              Index

3M Corporation 164                          Attention 15, 30, 32-36, 72, 108, 111,
Actor’s perspective 56                           138, 158, 172
Adaptability 2, 29, 153                     Attitudes 61
Adaptation 2, 149                           Aurelius, Marcus 42
Adaptive learning system 134, 139           Auto-pilot 10, 32
Adaptive system 2                           Awareness 30, 111
Age of Spiritual Machines, The 2
AI 140-141                                  Baboons 131-132, 134
Akashic Fields 127                          Baby Boomers 174, 196
Alignment 62, 80, 83, 153, 156              Back-tracking 105, 110
Allen, Woody 188                            Bacteria 150-151, 158
Alternatives 202-202                        Bannister, Roger 14
Ambiguity 69                                Beck, Dr. Don 180
American Automobile Association 33          Behaviors 80-83, 97
Andes 31                                    Beliefs 11, 14, 15, 65, 81
Answer to How is Yes, The 53, 54            Believe 18
Answers 23                                  Ben-Jacob, Eshel 151
Anthill 1,128, 135, 203                     Blame 63
Ants 1, 128, 135                            Blanchard, Ken 151
Apartheid system 75                         Block, Peter 53, 114, 183, 185
Apple computer 138                          Bloom, Howard 131
Appreciative inquiry 17, 115, 139-141       Body language 48, 103, 107-108
aRas 15                                     Bohm, David 40
Art of Systems Thinking, The 69             Boldt, Laurence G. 72, 162
Assumptions 3, 5, 8, 10, 16-24, 29,         Bottom-up 70, 71, 94,133-137
     38, 43, 49, 68-69, 95, 97, 102,        Bowling Alone 133
     105, 113, 153, 158, 172                Brain Gym 80
Athletes 33, 67                             Branden, Nathaniel 68
210   TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH



      Brown, John Seely 29                     Communication 3, 60, 93-116,
      Brown, Juanita 109, 113, 176                  121, 125
      Buckingham, Marcus 141                   Community 1,123-126, 193, 196
      Buddhist philosophy 52,187               Community building 133
      Bull fighter 176                         Community Building 125
                                               Community Intelligence Ltd. 125
      Campbell, Joseph 23                      Competition 7
      Capabilities 80-83                       Completing distinctions 99
      Capital One 1                            Compliance 111
      Capra, Fritjof 8, 123, 150               Congruence 104
      Carroll, Lewis 22-23                     Connection 3, 121-147
      Certainty 158                            Conscious mind 32,
      Challenging 63, 67                       Contribution 163, 171, 176-177
      Change 60                                Conversation 139, 158
      Character 41                                  café 114, 117
      Childre, Doc 155                         Cook, Captain 37
      Chimpanzees 131                          Cooperrider, David 115, 140
      Chodron, Pema 178                        Co-react 139
      Churchill, Winston 78                    Co-reaction 156
      Cirque de Soliel 193                     Cowen, Christopher C. 180
      Clause, Santa 14                         Cows 11
      Coach 33                                 Cowshed 79
      Coaching 196-202                         CQ 1
      Co-create 139                            CQ Tools 27
      Cole, Edwin Louis 67                     Cray computer 32
      Collaborate 122, 126, 144, 204           Creative
      Collaboration 48, 69, 94, 112, 121,           process 156-157
           145, 163, 203                            tension 74, 75,142
      Collaborative                            Creativity 3, 145, 149-169
           intelligence 1, 2, 121, 132, 150,   Credit 63
                151, 171, 180, 189, 195, 203   Critic 166
           relationships 72                    Cryer, Bruce 155
           software 143                        Csikszentmihalyi, Mihaly 34-35
      Collective intelligence 6, 111-12, 129   Curie, Madame 183
      Collective mind 131
      Collectivism 181                         Davis, Stan 134, 136, 161
      Collins, Jim 61, 156, 201                De Vinci, Leonardo 47
      Commitment 111                           Dennison, Dr Paul and Gail 80
INDEX     211



Desnos, Robert 186                     EQ 67, 122, 143, 151, 203
Destabilize 134                        Evidence 18, 19
Development 201-202
Dialogue 93, 109-112                   Failure 63, 96
Dilts, Robert 159, 166                 Fannie Mae 138
Director’s perspective 56              Fantasy 15
Disconnection 133                      Fear 67
Dishonest 17                           Feedback 63, 96
Disney, Walt 159, 166                  Feedback sandwich 147, 201
Diversity 106, 150                     Filter 17, 30, 41, 42, 110
DNA 5,136, 138, 153                    First furrow 60, 61
Donehey, Jim 1                         First position 45
Don Juan 65                            Fish 9, 68
Dreamer 166                            Flemons 99
                                       Flexibility 3, 72, 97, 143, 149-169, 154
E. coli 151                            Flock 127, 193
EBay 136                               Flow 34-35
Edison, Thomas 96                      Flynn, Errol 181
Education 154                          Followship 62, 69, 71, 204
Egyptian Vipers 184                    Forrest People, The 44
Eidser, John 9                         Four noble truths 52
Eighth continent 143                   Frames 30, 48, 49
Einstein, Albert 24                    Framing 48
Electric fence 11                      Frankl, Viktor 65, 77, 173, 182
Elephant 44, 48                        Freedom 173
Emergence 128                          Freiburg, Nancy & Kevin, 24,
Emergent properties 128-130,                138, 177
     139, 144                          Fritz, Robert 4, 73, 74, 142, 163
Emotional                              From Chaos to Coherence 155
     intelligence 6, 67, 122, 203      Fundamental attribution error 42
     management 62, 67, 68
     self-mastery 103                  Gallup Research Organization 141
Emotions 36,103-104                    Gandhi, Mahatma 184
E-Myth Revisited, The 155              Generation ‘Y’ 173, 196-197
Encyclopedia, of Positive Questions,   Gerber, Michael 155
     The 115                           Gibson, William 180
Entanglement 6                         Gilbert, Daniel 42
Environment 80-83, 201                 Global Brain 131
212   TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH



      Goal-setting 41                         Inukshuk 35
      Goethe, Johann Wolfgang 186             IQ 1, 143, 151, 203,
      Gold coins 43                           Isaacs, David 113
      Goldberg, Marilee 159                   Isaacs, William 94, 109
      Goleman, Daniel 67, 122                 It’s Alive 134, 136, 161
      Good to Great, 61, 156
      Gozdz, Kazimierz 7                      Jailor 76
      Guts 24, 138                            Jamming 152
      Gutenberg 142                           John Deere 161
                                              Johnson, Diane 161
      Habituated 12                           Johnson, Steven 128
      Hammond, Sue Annis 112
      Happiness 52                            Kao, John 152
      Havel, Vacal 187                        Kaplan, Brian S. 115
      Helplessness 13                         Katzenbach, Jon R. 137
      Heroes 14, 138, 179                     Kellner-Rogers, Myron 128
      Heroic cause 138-139, 177               King, Martin Luther 183
      Hierarchy 70                            Koans 16
      High CQ 61, 195-196                     Kurzweil, Raymond 2
      Hopelessness 13
      Humor 157, 159                          La Rocefoucauld, Duc De 62
                                              Ladder 23
      Identity 81-83                          Lao-Tzu 149
      Imagination 156                         Larousse Animal Life Encyclopedia
      Immune system 65                             183
      Impossible Will Take a Little Longer,   Laszlo, Ervin 127, 129
           The 186                            Law, Vernon 193
      Incongruence 104                        Leadership 2, 62, 70, 204
      Individualism 181                       Leading Change System 200-202
      Influence 94                            Learning 152
      Information 97-99, 103, 113             Learning organization 125, 151
      Information age 180                     Leverage 200-201
      Innovation 154-157                      Limitations of our beliefs 12
      Intention 15, 41, 62, 72, 73            Limiting assumptions 37
      Interconnectedness 125                  Limiting beliefs 13, 14
      Interdependence 122                     Listening 108-109
      Internet 142, 143, 162                  Loeb, Paul Rogat 186,
      Interpersonal 101-102                   Logical levels 80-83
      Intrapersonal 101-102                   Logotherapy 66
INDEX     213



Making meaning 62, 65, 67            Nervous system 37, 40, 41, 127
Man and Superman 174                 Networks 1, 143
Man’s Search for Meaning 65          Newton, Sir Isaac 70
Mandela, Nelson 75                   Ngikona 107
Manipulation 94                      Nietzsche, Friedrich 172
Margulis, Lynn 122, 150              Norretranders, Tor 32
Maslow, Abraham, 24, 180             Northern Ireland 11, 30, 46
Maslow’s hierarchy 41                Now Discover Your Strengths 141
Matching 107-108
Matrix, The 16                       O’Connor, Joseph 69
Maturana, Humberto R. 37, 51,        Oliver Twist 175
Mayfield, Andrea B. 112              Optical Illusion 38, 42
McDermott, Ian 69                    Optimax Systems 161
McPherson, Gary 19-21                Optimistic strategies 62, 63
Meaning, 18, 66                      Organization 94
Meaning makers 66, 189               Organizational development 17
Meaningful participation 3, 159,     Orion 100
    171-192, 195                     Ornstein, Dr Robert 80
Mechanistic view 70                  Ownership 111
Meditation 34                        Oxygen 150
Medtronic 138
Mental models 62, 68, 69             Palmer, Parker J. 187
Mentoring 196                        Path of Least Resistance, The 73
Meyer, Christopher 134, 136, 161     Patton, General 105
Mind-body connection 65              Pearce, Joseph Chilton 153
Monkey 100                           Perceive 50, 53, 67, 68
Monks 78, 79                         Perception 3, 16, 29-57, 59, 67, 73, 159
Morhpogenic Fields 127-128           Perceptual
Moses 175                                 filters 41
Mount Everest 13                          flexibility 39, 40, 45, 50, 62-64
Multi-dimensional coaching 198-202        perspectives 159
Multiple reframe 50                       position 46, 47
Murray, W.H. 185                          strategies 62
                                     Periscope 32
Naashon 175                          Persistence 62, 78-80
Nasrudin, Mulla 43, 160              Personality 42
Natural systems 7, 8, 122, 161            profiling 41
Necker tube 39                       Perspectives 30, 43-48, 63, 73, 110,
Negative messages 14                      159-160
214   TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH



      Pessimist strategies 63                        people 63, 67
      Peterson, Christopher 64                       systems 7, 106
      Philippians 37                                 teams 6, 9, 22, 59, 61, 71, 85,
      Phillips Corporation 164                            121-122
      Piece of string 11                         Resiling 126
      Polio 19                                   Responsibility 77, 95, 173
      Por, George 125, 143-144                   Rogers, Kenny 79
      Presence 112, 131                          Rose-tinted glasses 63
      Pressfield, Steven 59                      Rubber-necking 33
      Prisoner 65                                Russell, Peter 36
      Problem 18, 68, 69, 112, 133
      Problem-focused 73, 114, 157               Salesperson 74
      Professional development 54                Santa Claus 14
      Psychiatrist 76                            Scalpel 95
      Psychoneuroimmunology 64                   Scharmer, Otto 131
      Putnam, Robert 133                         Schwab 138
      Pygmy 44                                   Schweitzer, Albert 183
                                                 Scientific breakthrough 24
      Quantum mechanics 122                      Sea squirt 5, 163
      Questions 23, 33, 34, 61, 114-115,         Second position 45
         157-159                                 Second World War 66
                                                 Self-esteem 14, 68, 85, 180
      Radical Acceptance 178                     Self-expression 62, 84, 85
      Rapport 95, 104-107                        Self-fulfilling prophesies 17, 18
      Rating system 136                          Self-Mastery 3, 52, 59, 61-64, 68, 71,
      Ray, Michael 153                                72, 77, 80, 93, 104, 159
      Realist 166                                Self-organizing 71, 134
      Reality 38, 39, 51, 139                    Self-perception 53
      Recombine 134                              Self talk 102
      Reframing 49                               Seneca 30
      Relationship 53, 61, 69, 85, 97-99,        Senge, Peter 112, 129, 151
          121-122, 129                           Sense and respond 134
      Relativity, theory of 24                   Shapiro, James 151,
      Resilience 2, 16, 19, 21-24, 29, 33, 59,   Shared assumptions 38
          65, 102, 123, 126, 163, 180            Shaw, George Bernard 65, 174
      Resilience Advantage, The 126              Sheldrake, Rupert 127, 129
      Resilient 2, 16, 65, 69, 123, 124, 135,    Siebert, Al 126
          153, 158                               Signal lights 77
          individuals 22, 72                     Simpler Way, A 113, 128
INDEX   215



Six blind men 44                    Unheard Cry for Meaning, The
Smith, Douglas K. 137                   65, 182
Social capital 143                  United States 77
Social software 126                 User Illusion, The 32
Socrates 59
Software 12, 41                     Values 81-83, 191-192
Soldier 76                          Van Riper Colonel 136, 138
Solution-focused 73, 75, 142, 157   Velveteen Rabbit, The 189
Southwest Airlines 138              Varela, Francisco J. 37
Sowabona 107                        Voice tone 103 -104
Spiral Dynamics 180                 Volunteer 172
Spirit 81-83
Stanford Business School 153        War of Art, The 59
Statue of Liberty 77                Ward, William Arthur 171
Stewardship 183                     Water 9, 67
Strategies 62, 63, 73, 74           Web of Life, The 52
Strength-based approach 141-142     Well-formed outcomes 72, 75, 77
Stress 99                           Wheatley, Meg 112, 113, 138, 139,
Stress management clinic 46              158
Sufi 16, 43, 159                    Whirlpool 130
Systems thinking 68, 129            Whole Foods Company 24
                                    Williams, Margery 189
Team alignment 84                   Williams, Robin 107
Teams 143, 193-199                  Wilson, Timothy 42
Technology 125-126, 142-144         Wise teams 136
Termite 127-128                     With Every Breath I Take 21
Thin Book of Naming Elephants,      World Café, The 113, 176
     The 112                        World Wide Web 162
Third position 45                   Worthlessness 13
Through the Looking Glass 22-23
Toffler, Alvin 154                  Yin and Yang 71
Top-down 94, 111, 133-137           Young soldier 75-76
Trickster 159
Triple bottom line 175              Zen 9, 16, 50, 68, 162
Trosten-Bloom, Amanda 115           Zen and the Art of Making a
Truman, Harry S. 60                     Living 162
Trustworthiness 17                  Zukav, Gary 15
Turnbull, Colin 44
2


   Go Deeper Index

This is an alphabetical listing of the Go Deeper topics found
throughout the text. You can explore these ideas in more
depth through the Web site www.anthillsite.com. There you
will find web links connected to various topics.

Appreciative Inquiry, 141         Gary McPherson, 21
Assumptions about Reality, 16     Gen Y and Baby Boomers, 197
Attention, 35                     Good Questions, 115
Bottom-up and Top-down            Human Society Evolves, 180
    Processes, 137                Making Meaning, 67
Brain Gym, 80                     Maslow’s Hierarchy of Needs, 41
Building Character, 42            Mind Body Connection, 65
Community Building, 133           Natural Systems, 8
Contribution, 176                 Perceptions, 40
Conversation Café, 114            Resilience, 123
Creative Systems, 162             Self Talk, 102
Creativity, 160                   Self-Esteem Survey, 68
Dialogue, 111                     Solution Focused Thinking, 142
Emergent Systems, 130             Social Software, 126
Emotional Intelligence, 67, 122
Speaking & Consulting
                         Contact us at:


                     WWW.CQatWork.com


                     Toll Free 1 866 912 5210


                @    info@CQatWork.com




            Take the CQ Challenge
When has your teams’ CQ been at its most obvious? We would
love to hear about it.


              • What was going on?
              • What made it special?
              • And what did the team achieve?


The example you send us could be featured in the next edition
of Teaching an Anthill to Fetch, so send us your CQ stories,
we’d love to see them.
    In the meantime you could also go to WWW.CQatWork.com
and take the CQ Quiz. Everyone who takes the quiz receives
a free report on the ten ways of developing more CQ @ work.
2


            About the Author

Stephen’s first presentation was to a large group by anyone’s stan-
dards; 40,000. However, at the tender age of 12 he realized that
chickens are a tough audience. Inspiring them to change their lives
was very hard work. He often wonders where those chickens who
did listen to him are now.
    Stephen comes from a long line of story-tellers. After all, in Ireland
it is a national sport. But everything wasn’t sweetness and light as
he grew up during the “troubles” in early 70s Northern Ireland. The
farm he grew up on was situated in the so-called “murder triangle”.
Political violence was an everyday reality. Although the Irish are
bright people, they had very poor collaborative intelligence. This was
where Stephen’s fascination with what enables people to “get-on”
was born.
    An accomplished psychotherapist and business consultant
Stephen has been consulting for over ten years in health care, non-
profit, professional associations, education, and government. He is
the founder and principle of Zenergy PD and acts as the resilience
content expert for one of Canada’s largest health authorities.
For over a quarter of a century Stephen has been researching the
dynamics of change, problem resolution, group dynamics, and his
greatest passion — collaborative intelligence. Extensively trained
in NLP (neuro-linguistic programming), facilitation, improv, and
group dynamic techniques, Stephen engages his audiences with
ABOUT THE AUTHOR      219



customized “one-off” events that bring each participant deeply into
the topic.
    Just as important for Stephen, he is a father, husband, and an
active participant in his community. He serves on several boards
associated with socio-economic development and is a staunch advo-
cate of the triple bottom line as a path towards a sustainable society.



        Little Known Facts about Stephen Joyce

At one point in his life he managed to run himself over with his own
car. Not a great idea granted, but you must give him some credit for
sheer inventiveness.
    In 1982, while at Bristol University, Stephen held the UK Guinness
Book of Records title for the most live earth worms eaten in 60 sec-
onds (long before the days of Fear Factor). Stephen claims he did
it to raise money for charity and that he had the written permission
of every last worm.
    When he was a child, Stephen’s best friend was a paraplegic pig
called Herbie to whom he told all his darkest secrets. Unfortunately
Herbie disappeared one day when Stephen was at school and was
never seen again. It’s a cruel blow to discover you’ve eaten your
best friend.



     Stephen lives “outside the box” but drops in occasionally
       to collect his mail — stephenjoyce@CQatwork.com
 'Teaching an Anthill to Fetch: Developing  Collaborative Intelligence @ Work'

More Related Content

PDF
0321719905
PDF
Story telling for social enterprises
PDF
Weadership: The Guide
PDF
Course Creation 101 with P2PU
PDF
Tribes Q&A
DOC
4 h communications-toolkit-public_speaking
PDF
Thinking Like a Storyteller
0321719905
Story telling for social enterprises
Weadership: The Guide
Course Creation 101 with P2PU
Tribes Q&A
4 h communications-toolkit-public_speaking
Thinking Like a Storyteller

What's hot (6)

PDF
Ic In Large Global Organizations
PDF
Nofi paper on sa
PPTX
Game Based Interventions By Transcendix
PDF
Career Guide Private Equity
PDF
Learning 2.0: Lessons Learned from "Play"
PDF
mcinnis_norman (4)
Ic In Large Global Organizations
Nofi paper on sa
Game Based Interventions By Transcendix
Career Guide Private Equity
Learning 2.0: Lessons Learned from "Play"
mcinnis_norman (4)
Ad

Similar to 'Teaching an Anthill to Fetch: Developing Collaborative Intelligence @ Work' (20)

PDF
Managing Organizational Conflict Sam Blank
PPTX
Navigating your career in the Shifting Winds of Academia
PPTX
The Soft Stuff Is The Hard Stuff. The Agile Soft Skills Toolkit | CodeCamp Co...
PPTX
Evolving Changes of Leadership: Navigating Complexity
PDF
Personal And Professional Accountability And Opportunities...
PDF
Inside-Out Collaboration: An Integrated Approach to Working Beyond Silos
PDF
Counseling Strategies And Interventions For Professional Helpers 9th Edition ...
DOCX
Copyright © 2014 by the American Psychological Ass.docx
PPTX
Innovation and Libraries Building a Collaborative Learning Ecosystem.pptx
PDF
2013 Nelson APDP Educational leadership Network
PPT
The 'folio
PDF
The Encyclopedia of Leadership A Practical Guide to Popular Leadership Theori...
PDF
Client Product Example for Mariachi Consulting
PDF
WRNH Curriculum Overview (Rev. Sep 2015)
DOCX
BOOK 1984 MiniProject What makes a human beingOne .docx
DOCX
interpersonal relations- leadership development plan draft
PDF
The Power of Teams
PPT
Life Skills - R.D.Sivakumar
PDF
The Skilled Helper A Problemmanagement And Opportunitydevelopment Approach To...
Managing Organizational Conflict Sam Blank
Navigating your career in the Shifting Winds of Academia
The Soft Stuff Is The Hard Stuff. The Agile Soft Skills Toolkit | CodeCamp Co...
Evolving Changes of Leadership: Navigating Complexity
Personal And Professional Accountability And Opportunities...
Inside-Out Collaboration: An Integrated Approach to Working Beyond Silos
Counseling Strategies And Interventions For Professional Helpers 9th Edition ...
Copyright © 2014 by the American Psychological Ass.docx
Innovation and Libraries Building a Collaborative Learning Ecosystem.pptx
2013 Nelson APDP Educational leadership Network
The 'folio
The Encyclopedia of Leadership A Practical Guide to Popular Leadership Theori...
Client Product Example for Mariachi Consulting
WRNH Curriculum Overview (Rev. Sep 2015)
BOOK 1984 MiniProject What makes a human beingOne .docx
interpersonal relations- leadership development plan draft
The Power of Teams
Life Skills - R.D.Sivakumar
The Skilled Helper A Problemmanagement And Opportunitydevelopment Approach To...
Ad

Recently uploaded (20)

PPTX
KOM of Painting work and Equipment Insulation REV00 update 25-dec.pptx
PDF
Profit Center Accounting in SAP S/4HANA, S4F28 Col11
PDF
Approach and Philosophy of On baking technology
PDF
Empathic Computing: Creating Shared Understanding
DOCX
The AUB Centre for AI in Media Proposal.docx
PPTX
sap open course for s4hana steps from ECC to s4
PDF
Agricultural_Statistics_at_a_Glance_2022_0.pdf
PDF
Build a system with the filesystem maintained by OSTree @ COSCUP 2025
PPTX
VMware vSphere Foundation How to Sell Presentation-Ver1.4-2-14-2024.pptx
PDF
Architecting across the Boundaries of two Complex Domains - Healthcare & Tech...
PPT
“AI and Expert System Decision Support & Business Intelligence Systems”
PDF
Encapsulation_ Review paper, used for researhc scholars
PDF
Unlocking AI with Model Context Protocol (MCP)
PPTX
Cloud computing and distributed systems.
PDF
Review of recent advances in non-invasive hemoglobin estimation
PDF
Dropbox Q2 2025 Financial Results & Investor Presentation
PDF
Peak of Data & AI Encore- AI for Metadata and Smarter Workflows
PPTX
Understanding_Digital_Forensics_Presentation.pptx
PPTX
Spectroscopy.pptx food analysis technology
PDF
Encapsulation theory and applications.pdf
KOM of Painting work and Equipment Insulation REV00 update 25-dec.pptx
Profit Center Accounting in SAP S/4HANA, S4F28 Col11
Approach and Philosophy of On baking technology
Empathic Computing: Creating Shared Understanding
The AUB Centre for AI in Media Proposal.docx
sap open course for s4hana steps from ECC to s4
Agricultural_Statistics_at_a_Glance_2022_0.pdf
Build a system with the filesystem maintained by OSTree @ COSCUP 2025
VMware vSphere Foundation How to Sell Presentation-Ver1.4-2-14-2024.pptx
Architecting across the Boundaries of two Complex Domains - Healthcare & Tech...
“AI and Expert System Decision Support & Business Intelligence Systems”
Encapsulation_ Review paper, used for researhc scholars
Unlocking AI with Model Context Protocol (MCP)
Cloud computing and distributed systems.
Review of recent advances in non-invasive hemoglobin estimation
Dropbox Q2 2025 Financial Results & Investor Presentation
Peak of Data & AI Encore- AI for Metadata and Smarter Workflows
Understanding_Digital_Forensics_Presentation.pptx
Spectroscopy.pptx food analysis technology
Encapsulation theory and applications.pdf

'Teaching an Anthill to Fetch: Developing Collaborative Intelligence @ Work'

  • 1. “Steve walks beside us telling us stories, drawing images, crack- ing jokes and pointing out the evidence that human intelligence can deliver so much more than we allow it … a welcome guide to the learning journey.” Marilyn Hamilton, Ph.D., C.G.A., Founder of Integral City “Weaving Collaborative Intelligence (CQ) into organizations is an idea for it’s time. Instilling CQ in the learning and actions of all employees of an organization is a vital resource to engage everyone in the real work. Joyce’s book is a must read.” Dr. Stephen Hobbs, author Help Them to Help YOU Lead “Stephen delights in bringing us to a richer realization, and more complete picture of our collaborative intelligence. A practical book that points out the skills that enable us to master our own collabo- rative capacity.” J. Brian Woodward, Ph.D. Senior Faculty, Leadership Development & Leadership Learning Lab, The Banff Centre, Canada “Get out of autopilot and read this book. Full of wisdom and insight, you may not think about work and the difference you can make, in quite the same way ever again…” Paul Belcher, Trainer, Consultant and Coach, ABL World “Stephen has the uncanny ability to make the complex understood. Teaching an Anthill to Fetch is about liberating human potential. Insightful as it is practical, the author puts forward a simple set of higher order rules that organizations can use to succeed, regardless of what the future might bring. …rediscover the unbounded resilience that lies at our fingertips when we come together and collaborate effectively.” Clifford Wessel, Performance Consultant & Coach
  • 2. “Immediately useful…. Teaching an Anthill to Fetch is a contempla- tive practice for building a better life.” Don Hill, Media Thought Leader “Anyone who enjoys a good story will certainly relish the Irish lilt of Joyce’s voice which comes through on each and every page.” Michael K. Mauws, Ph.D., Associate Professor, Business Policy & Strategy, Athabasca University “Teaching an Anthill to Fetch provides a valuable path to strengthen the emergent survival skill — collaboration. With novel features like “Go Deeper” and practical “Tools”, this is a new road map to make Collaborative Intelligence really work @ Work!” Roger Gullickson, President/CEO, MVP Collaborative “Teaching an Anthill to Fetch is a must-read. This book provides valuable insights that will benefit any organization undertaking change and wanting to get the most out of its most important asset — its human resources.” Rick Thrale, Community Futures, Alberta “[Teaching an Anthill to Fetch is] … a practical handbook with sug- gestions and exercises to help us to improve our team’s “Collaborative Intelligence”. A great addition to the canon of leadership literature.” Peter McNab, author of Towards An Integral Vision “This book will help managers and team leaders see the learning terrain more clearly … an appreciation of the awesome power of collaborative intelligence.” Will Black, executive coach, SourceS of Executive Action
  • 3. Teaching an Anthill to Fetch Developing Collaborative Intelligence @ Work STEPHEN JAMES JOYCE
  • 4. Stephen James Joyce, 2007 Attribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 You are free: to Share — to copy, distribute and transmit the work to Remix — to adapt the work Under the following conditions: Attribution. You must attribute the work in the manner specified by the author or licensor (but not in any way that suggests that they endorse you or your use of the work). Noncommercial. You may not use this work for commercial purposes. Share Alike. If you alter, transform, or build upon this work, you may distribute the resulting work only under the same or similar license to this one. • For any reuse or distribution, you must make clear to others the license terms of this work. • Any of the above conditions can be waived if you get permission from the copyright holder. • Your fair use and other rights are in no way affected by the above. A complete version of this licence can be found at <www.creativecommons.org.>. ISBN-10: 0-9780312-0-2 ISBN-13: 978-0-9780312-0-6 Printed and bound in Canada First Printing Library and Archives Canada Cataloguing in Publication Joyce, Stephen James, 1959- Teaching an anthill to fetch : developing collaborative intelligence @ work / Stephen James Joyce. Includes bibliographical references and index. ISBN 978-0-9780312-0-6 1. Teams in the workplace. 2. Cooperativeness. 3. Group decision making. 4. Group problem solving. I. Title. HD31.J69 2007 658.4'022 C2007-901053-9 Editor: Catherine Leek of Green Onion Pubishing Interior Design and Electronic Page Composition: Kim Monteforte of WeMakeBooks.ca Cover Design: Dianna Little Cover Image: © Ron Elmy/Firstlight
  • 5. Dedicated to Sandy, Zoey and Leland, the most wonderful people in my life. For all the love and joy you have given me.
  • 7. 2 Acknowledgments A number of people gave me specific input that strengthened this work and I would like to thank them — Judy Kidd, Brian Woodward, Ken Lowe, Keith Webb, Don Hill, Gary McPherson, and Dan Dybl. This book has taken form because of the excellent skill and guidance of a number of other people: my editor, Catherine Leek of Green Onion Publishing, who acted as mentor and editor and guided me through the process so gracefully; Kim Monteforte for her won- derful help with production and lay-out; Dianna Little for her patience and dedication and for creating a super cover design; and Jane Atkinson, my coach, for helping me to stay focused and “find my lane”. Thanks guys it has been an enriching and joyful journey. Finally to the most important person in the entire project — Sandy my highly talented and supportive partner. Without her this book would never have seen the light of day.
  • 9. TABLE OF CONTENTS A Word or Two About this Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix An Introduction of Sorts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Chapter 1: ASSUMPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 CQ TOOL 1: Checking Assumptions . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Chapter 2: PERCEPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 CQ TOOL 2: Developing Perceptual Flexibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Chapter 3: SELF-MASTERY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 CQ TOOL 3: Self-Mastery and Eliciting a Well Formed Outcome . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Chapter 4: COMMUNICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 CQ TOOL 4: Exploring the Conversation Café . . . 117 Chapter 5: CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 CQ TOOL 5: Building Connection Through Appreciation . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Chapter 6: CREATIVITY & FLEXIBILITY . . . . . . . . . . . 149 CQ TOOL 6: Developing Creative Capacity . . . . . 166 Chapter 7: MEANINGFUL PARTICIPATION . . . . . . . . 171 CQ TOOL 7: Exploring Values to Discover Meaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
  • 10. viii TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH Chapter 8: BUILDING HIGH CQ TEAMS . . . . . . . . . . 193 CQ TOOL 8: The LEADing Change System . . . . . 200 So Where Are We Going . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Bibliography . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Go Deeper Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Speaking and Consulting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Take the CQ Challenge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 About the Author . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
  • 11. 2 A Word or Two About this Book Teaching an Anthill to Fetch: Developing Collaborative Intelligence @ Work has been designed to be a practical tool for developing CQ in the workplace. Toward that end, we have provided a number of navigational tools. There are a number of places throughout the book where we provide a “Go Deeper” feature. These are opportunities to explore the ideas covered in more depth through the Web site www.anthillsite.com. Here you will find web links connected to various topics. CQ Tool Exercises, called “CQ Tools”, are placed at the end of each chapter. These are designed to develop deeper collaborative intelligence and will challenge and motivate you and your team.
  • 13. 2 An Introduction of Sorts Ants, and all other insects that live in colonies, appear to be hard- wired to serve. By doing so, they ensure their survival. An anthill can survive and feed itself in some of the most hostile environ- ments. No single ant knows how it all works — nor does it need to. Individually, ants are not that smart, but together they are very intelligent. The ant serves the anthill, which in turn serves the ant. The community the ants create and work to support is well equipped to cope with the challenge of change. In other words, the ant and the colony it belongs to is a good example of high level collaborative intelligence (CQ). Collaborative Intelligence (CQ) is defined as the capacity to harness the intelligence in networks of relationships. Jim Donehey was the CEO of Capital One, the credit card com- pany, when he coined the phrase, “You can’t teach an anthill to fetch.” He was referring to the task of helping his organization of 1800 peo- ple adapt and respond to a very competitive and rapidly changing marketplace. The challenge facing Doheney was how to focus the attention of the entire organization around vital business objectives.
  • 14. 2 TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH Whether we are working inside a small team in a non-profit organization or in a large, multinational conglomerate, dealing with change is the ongoing challenge. Change forces us to adapt. Our adaptability defines how successful we are in dealing with change and how resilient we are. Resilience is our ability to bounce back and recover from adverse conditions. It is the innate ability to respond resourcefully to challenges in our environment. Ray Kurzweil, author of The Age of Spiritual Machines, has calculated that the next century will be accompanied by 20,000 years of technological progress compared to today’s rate of change. Therefore, our ability to adapt and respond to change is going to play a crucial role in the success of our species. As the pressure to deal with change increases upon individuals, teams, and organizations, resilience will become more central to business. Tapping into individuals’ and teams’ natural resilience will become an essential element of business survival and success. As teams become increasingly virtual, productivity increases will be required; leadership skills will be demanded from more and more of the team’s membership. Our capacity for resilience will be tested on a daily basis. However, when groups of people adapt and respond collectively incredible things happen. This is where collaborative intelligence becomes vital. Nature is a vigorously adaptive system. The evolution of life is the history of adaptation. Ants have adapted to the challenge of building supportive colonies by applying some very simple rules. The argument of this book is that, for humans there are some simple “rules” that can enable us to work much more effectively together. These rules are much more like skills that we already have onboard and that we simply need to further enhance. Given the right circumstances, people and teams can embrace and develop these skills. By doing so, they are expanding their collaborative intelligence (CQ).
  • 15. AN INTRODUCTION OF SORTS 3 So What If You Could Teach an Anthill to Fetch? This book takes a skill-building approach to the development of the CQ of teams. Each chapter ends with a skill-building exercise (CQ Tools ). The elements making up the development of CQ are: 1. Assumptions 2. Perception 3. Self-Mastery 4. Communication 5. Connection 6. Creativity/Flexibility 7. Meaningful Participation 8. “High CQ” Teams We must begin within ourselves and so we begin in chapter 1 by checking assumptions. Choosing those ideas that will serve us and our team has a fundamental impact on the success of all other activities. Those assumptions will determine what sort of percep- tions we have. Our perception of situations and other people affects how we respond to what happens to us. To adjust assumptions and manage our perceptions requires self-mastery. Self-mastery enables us to make the most of our personal resources. However, with all the self-mastery in the world, if we are unable to communicate effec- tively with others, we will be unable to affect the world around us. Now we can move beyond ourselves to the bigger world and others. With great communication skills, we are able to build deep connection with others. Through connection, we create personal and team alignment, focusing our individual and group energies more effectively. This action raises productivity and helps create a stable team with higher levels of CQ. A team with deep and effective connection will be able to tap into greater levels of creativity and
  • 16. 4 TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH flexibility. These can be further enhanced through skill-building exercises. Creative and flexible teams are able to adapt and respond to a rapidly changing environment. When the going gets tough, people (and teams) need to know there is purpose to what they are trying to achieve. Meaningful participation provides a sense of purpose and direction. The Chinese have a proverb, “May you live in interesting times.” There is no debate that this has become true for us. How to deal with these interesting times is a lively and important debate. One thing is true, only when we can bring more of our CQ into play, will we be able to manage the levels of change occurring within business and society today. By increasing our collaborative intelligence, we truly are “teaching an anthill to fetch”.
  • 17. 1 Assumptions To a worm in horseradish, the whole world is horseradish. YIDDISH PROVERB The sea squirt provides us a cautionary tale. When it is born, it floats through the open oceans seeking a place to make its home. Once the sea squirt finds a solid piece of ocean floor on which to attach itself, it does a peculiar thing. The sea squirt eats its brain. Having achieved its objective, a firm anchor within the ocean, it no longer needs its brain. You may know people like the sea squirt. They have a firm anchor in life or at work and, apparently, have long since consumed their brains. Zoologists say that the sea squirt shares 80% of our DNA. Some people probably share more than that. The sea squirt assumes that nothing is going to change in its environment and that it will no longer need to make significant adjustments. This may work for the sea squirt, but human beings can’t afford to follow suit.
  • 18. 6 TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH The Collective IQ Paradigm Our society is changing rapidly. Intellectual intelligence (IQ) and emotional intelligence (EQ) are necessary but not sufficient in order to thrive in this world. Increasingly, we are expected to be able to harness the power of the group or network to achieve objectives. Collaborative intelligence, or CQ, has become increasingly important. The term “collaborative intelligence” was coined by William Isaacs in his book, Dialogue and the Art of Thinking Together. He defines CQ as the ability to build, contribute to and manage the power found in networks of people. The development of our collaborative intelligence requires us to embrace a new paradigm. This new paradigm involves viewing all living things as deeply connected — an idea called “entangle- ment” in quantum mechanics. It follows then that there exists a collective intelligence to which we all contribute and to which, potentially, we all have access. Here is an example of what I mean. A room with 30 people in it, whose average age is 35, represents over 1000 years of life experience. Imagine the level of this team’s CQ when processes that are designed to tap into the vast amount of collective life experience of this group are put into place. Recently I worked with a group of mid-wives who had been experiencing some team challenges. In the past they had been a very resilient team, overcoming many significant challenges. More recently the team members had found themselves at odds with each other. Furthermore they had decided that a single individual was the source of all their problems. Rather than try to replace this person, the director decided to work with the team and attempt to resolve the issue. After the team had taken part in a facilitated dia- logue around some of the pressing issues, they began to realize that they had all played a part in the circumstances leading up to the problems. Once this fact surfaced, they were able to explore exercises
  • 19. ASSUMPTIONS 7 that enabled them to reconnect as a team. During a follow up ses- sion, it was reported that they had begun to function as a resilient team once more. We cannot begin to embrace a new paradigm unless we are willing to loosen our grip on the old one. Acts of individual leadership are ineffective for changing a paradigm. It is a community-building process that must challenge and transform a collective worldview. GOZDZ Strengthening our CQ is more than simply learning to get along with each other. It requires that we begin to look at ourselves in a new way. It demands that we see ourselves as deeply interconnected with all of life and especially with all of humanity. Embracing this way of thinking will have noticeable effects on how management and teams operate. The significant challenges facing our societies can be overcome if we embrace our deep connection and then act accordingly. The pressing issue is how do we tap into the CQ we all need as individuals and teams to meet the challenges of the future? At the most fundamental level, natural systems, of which we are a part, are cooperative rather than competitive. Competition takes place within the larger context of a highly cooperative system. In this way CQ is already a part of nature. As human beings, we express our collabo- rative intelligence in certain places, especially when we are placed in extremely challenging situations. Fire fighters, police officers, and emergency response teams, for example, report high levels of closely cooperative synchronized team behavior when things get tough. These are examples of CQ coming to the surface and enabling teams to behave resiliently. Throughout this book we will discover that CQ is a central tenet of all resilient systems, teams, and individuals.
  • 20. 8 TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH Assumptions and Behaviors If you try to change your behavior without first changing the underlying structure causing that behavior, you will not succeed. This is because structure determines behavior, not the other way around. ROBERT FRITZ One of the most persistent assumptions about business is that we can only prosper with a strong sense of competitiveness. Other companies in the same industry are viewed as the enemy to be beaten, out-maneuvered or destroyed. When we look closely at natural systems, however, we find a different story. Fritjof Capra put it like this in The Web of Life, “Detailed study of ecosystems over the past decades has shown quite clearly that most relationships between living organisms are essentially cooperative ones, (my emphasis) characterized by coexistence and interdepend- ence, and symbiotic in various degrees. Although there is competition, it usually takes place within a wider context of cooperation, so that the larger system is kept in balance.” If natural systems hold the key to developing our own resilience, then we have to take a new look at the role competition and cooperation play in human systems (politics, business, etc.). GO DEEPER Natural Systems: www.anthillsite.com
  • 21. ASSUMPTIONS 9 Water — What Water? Within the Zen tradition there is a story about two fish. One fish tells the other of a strange experience it had. “I was swimming along and noticed a tasty morsel. I grabbed it, but a sharp, shiny, hard thing got stuck in my mouth. Suddenly, I was pulled from the water and the next thing I knew I was in a whole new world. A great big thing grabbed me and pulled the sharp, shiny, hard thing from my mouth and threw me back into the water.” The other fish looks shocked and asks, “Water? What water?” The last animal to discover water would be a fish, just as we are the last ones to discover our assumptions about reality because we are so immersed in them. ANY assumption can be made, but not all assumptions are created equal, and from their deductions you will know them. JOHN EIDSER, GLOBAL BRAIN Assumption — Checking as a Skill The first of the seven skills that develop CQ and build resilient teams is checking and adjusting individual and team assumptions. Assumptions play such a central role in day-to-day life that, for the vast majority of time, we never notice them. One of the most impor- tant things assumptions do, however, is act as building blocks for our beliefs. There are a number of ways to change beliefs. One of the most effective ways is check and adjust the assumptions that support the belief. It would be impossible to make it through the day without rely- ing on some assumptions. Without them, life becomes much too
  • 22. 10 TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH complex. Doing the simplest things would become a series of com- plex decisions of nightmare proportions. Therefore, we have to make assumptions in order to get through each day. How Did I Get Here? We have all experienced the phenomenon of driving to work and won- dering “How did I get here?” It is almost as if we were in a trance as we drove the well-known route. We were running on auto-pilot. Auto- pilot offers advantages and disadvantages. This highly-automated piece of our behavior may bring us predictable results, and some of those results may be highly desirable. Other results may be unwanted and problematic. For example, the auto-pilot you use to drive to your office enables you to plan the day ahead as you navigate the traffic. The downside is that when adjustments to the route are required — such as picking up a colleague on the way to work, it may not get done. Your auto-pilot wins over and your colleague loses out. Other times, you are the one who loses out. How many times have you found yourself driving to work when you had intended to make a trip to the store? Individuals are not the only ones who can run on auto-pilot; teams can do it too. Supported by assumptions that go unchecked and unchallenged, teams can continue to run the same old routines for a long time before anyone notices what’s happening. If the same old routine is getting you and your team the results you need, then that’s a good thing. If not, then maybe it is time to lift the hood and have a peek into what’s driving the team’s behavior. We all have experienced times when seemingly endless rounds of meetings produce no noticeable results. We find ourselves thinking that we’ve wandered into “Dilbert-land”. The definition of insanity is doing the same thing over and over again expecting a different result. Many times the problem lies with unstated and unchallenged assumptions.
  • 23. ASSUMPTIONS 11 Good Servants But Bad Masters Everyone I meet professionally for the first time receives a piece of string (it’s threaded through my business card). The piece of string acts as a reminder for the story I share when they ask me what the piece of string represents. I grew up on a 22-acre farm in the County of Down, Northern Ireland. When I was ten, my Dad sent me down to one of the pastures with a portable electric fence. He told me to fence the cows into a corner of the field. A few days later he came back and told me to go and take the fence down. “Use it to section off the bulls in the lower pasture,” he said. “But Dad,” I said, “what about the cows?” He said, “Oh just put a piece of string around them.” I said, “A little piece of string isn’t going to hold in a whole herd of cows.” “Just do as you’re told,” was his reply. So — liking life — I did as I was told and replaced the What shocks me is that as electric fence with a piece intelligent human beings we of string. often allow ourselves to be A few days later I went fenced in by a piece of string. to check on the cows. They were standing in an area of scruffy, beaten down grass — hardly anything worth eating. All around them grew lush, green grass, and the only thing separat- ing them from it was that flimsy piece of string and their belief that that piece of string would “shock” them. What shocks me is that as intelligent human beings we often behave exactly like those cows. We allow ourselves to be fenced in by a piece of string — our beliefs. Rather than enabling us to live our lives fully, our beliefs often dictate what we can and cannot do. This is why I say that beliefs make good servants but bad masters. One of the most common mistakes we make is holding our beliefs
  • 24. 12 TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH to be true while refusing to accept all evidence to the contrary. This is the very definition of dogma. Software of the Brain Running in the background, beliefs (and the assumptions that help create them) act like the software of the brain. We don’t notice them most of the time and usually only become aware of them when they begin to cause trouble, for example, when they prevent us from achieving things we really want. In presentations, I ask people to put their hands up if they like to be wrong. Understandably, there isn’t much response to that request. The truth is, we all like to be right, and this is just as true when it comes to our beliefs. Like some- thing to which we have habituated, we no longer notice them (water? What water?). We begin to treat those beliefs as if they were essen- tial truths that really exist, rather than relative points of view that we adopted at some point in the past. When your computer begins to cause trouble, once hardware issues have been ruled out, you then check the software running on the computer. So it is with our beliefs and assumptions. Just as there are typical things that cause software to malfunction, so there are certain types of beliefs that typically cause trouble. Limitations of Our Beliefs As remarkable as it is, even the human brain has its limitations. When we examine the types of beliefs that typically cause us trouble, we find they fall into three categories. We will briefly explore each of these now.
  • 25. ASSUMPTIONS 13 Hopelessness In this case, the desired change is not possible, there is no hope. Take, for example, a physically handicapped man, who wishes to climb Mount Everest. Each time he thinks about the task, he also thinks no one who has his physical challenge has ever done it, so it’s probably not possible — a wonderful dream, but hopeless. Another way of thinking about this type of belief is that the desired change is not possible for anyone; there is literally no hope. Helplessness In this instance, the desired change is possible for other people, just not for you. Our physically handicapped man may hear about some- one else with a similar physical challenge who has climbed Everest. In this case, however, he might choose to believe that it was possible because someone else has achieved it, but he would not be capable. In other words, it’s possible, but he feels personally helpless. Worthlessness Finally, in this situation the desired change is possible and you are capable of achieving it, but you are not worth it; you do not deserve the change. This is possibly the most tragic of the three types of limiting beliefs. In the case of the physically challenged person con- templating the ascent of Everest, he may have evidence that it is possible and that he does, indeed, have a chance at success. However, he doesn’t think he is worthy or deserves to achieve it and so doesn’t try (or try as hard as he should). If you listen to people talk about their shattered hopes and unfulfilled desires, you will notice that most of the limiting beliefs in operation fall into one of these three categories. The point in
  • 26. 14 TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH categorizing the beliefs is that if you can spot the type of limiting belief in operation, you can make the appropriate adjustments to overcome it. Challenging These Limitations A simple way to dislodge a hopelessness belief is to “act as if” it were possible. Roger Bannister acted as if it were possible to break the four-minute mile barrier. He also trained accordingly, rather than sitting around waiting to see what would happen. In this case actions really can change beliefs. In the case of a limiting belief related to helplessness, one of the best ways to address it is by searching out a counter example. That is, look for those who have already achieved the thing — after all, they are living proof that the objective is attainable. Looking to our heroes (sporting or otherwise) can be useful for finding appropriate models. Beliefs related to worthlessness require that we check the deeper reasons we feel unworthy of the desired goal and address that issue. Self-esteem is often underestimated in relation to the powerful effect it can have on our performance. Negative messages received when we were children often determine what we think we deserve and, until they have been checked and adjusted, will continue to do so. The Santa Clause If you grew up in North America, you probably believed in Santa Claus when you were a child. This is “beliefs stage one” where you believe everything that you are told. As you grew older you discov- ered, usually from older kids, that Santa Claus didn’t exist. This is “beliefs stage two” where you realize that some things you are told are true and some are not, and it is your task to decide which is
  • 27. ASSUMPTIONS 15 which. As you got older and had children of your own, you probably told them about Santa Claus and helped them create that fantasy. This is “beliefs stage three” — you have now become Santa Claus (which is why I call it the Santa “Clause”). You realize at this point that some beliefs can be useful, even if they are created. At another level, you may even realize that all beliefs are created. Creating All beliefs are the belief in Santa Claus was a beneficial created and, thing. The belief enables children and parents therefore, can to take part in a centuries-old tradition involv- be changed. ing ritual, mystery, and fantasy. However, holding onto the original kind of belief about Santa Claus (that he is a real person with a very unusual sleigh and so forth) into adulthood would not be very useful. Reality Is What We Notice What we assume about life has a fundamental effect on the way we interact with it. Everyone knows at least one person who has a very negative view of life. Such people expect the worst and often they are not disappointed. Their success in predicting the worst is based in part on the connection between intention and attention. That is, our attention is directed by our intention. There is a portion of our nervous system that plays a role in connecting intention and attention. It is called the ascending reticular activating system (aRAS) and it is located in the brainstem. The aRAS acts as a pattern recognition sys- tem and strongly affects the brain’s arousal. The way this part of the brain works helps to explain how our thoughts manifest into reality. Best-selling author Gary Zukav explains the process succinctly, as follows: “Reality is what we take to be true. What we take to be true is what we believe. What we believe is based upon our perceptions.
  • 28. 16 TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH What we perceive depends upon what we look for. What we look for depends upon what we think. What we think depends upon what we perceive. What we perceive determines what we believe. What we believe determines what we take to be true. What we take to be true is our reality.” In other words, the assumptions we make about reality play a large part in creating that reality. We make so many assumptions that we cease to be aware of them. Becoming aware of the basic assump- tions we use can be a tricky process. Seeing through our assumptions about reality is an important part of becoming enlightened in many of the great spiritual traditions such as Sufi and Zen. There, stories and puzzles (known as koans in Zen) are used to enable students to break out of limiting assumptions about reality. The story line of the movie The Matrix (based on the very same ideas and the principles themselves) dates back thousands of years. GO DEEPER Assumptions about Reality: www.antihillsite.com What Do Assumptions Have to Do with CQ? What we assume about ourselves, life, and other people has a tremen- dous impact on how we operate as human beings. Consider the central assumption about resilience — that we are all inherently resilient. This assumes everyone has resilience as an onboard capac- ity. Making this assumption affects the attitude we take toward ourselves and the way we treat others. In turn this affects the level of CQ we can tap into. Many organizations already operate on this assumption of resilience with regard to employee development. An example is
  • 29. ASSUMPTIONS 17 Appreciative Inquiry (AI). AI is an organizational development approach that assumes it is more effective to concentrate on what is working within an individual, team, and company, rather than on what is not working. A core principle within the Appreciative Inquiry model is questioning assumptions. Practitioners of AI report that once the questioning process has begun, people become inspired to question other previously unquestioned assumptions. Such question- ing is a crucial first step to any real change within organizations. The shared assumptions of a group or team have a very strong effect. Helping a team become aware of its shared assumptions can be the single most important source of positive change. Some organiza- tional development programs bring in their own processes and assumptions. Rather than layering on another set, it makes more sense to discover what assumptions (useful or not-so-useful) have created the system that is in operation now. Self-Fulfilling Prophets and Losses Assumptions easily become self-fulfilling prophesies (or profits and losses when they operate within a business). They act as filters on our perceptions, and we literally see what we have programmed our- selves to look for. In turn, our perceptions of events will determine our own responses. Our responses have specific effects and usually provide further evidence to support the original assumption. For example, suppose you suspected someone (made an assump- tion about them) of being dishonest. This assumption would cause you to filter all your observations of that person for dishonest behaviors. This affects the other person, who may wish to reassure you that he is honest. The more the person tries to convince you of his trustworthiness, the more you become convinced that he has something to hide. The original assumption about his dishonesty
  • 30. 18 TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH enabled you to redefine the meaning of his behavior. Voilá — the power of self-fulfilling prophesies! Figure 1.1 The Self-Fulfilling Prophesy Cycle Assumptions Perceptions Self-fulfilling Prophesy Evidence Events Assumptions What Do You Believe about the Problem? It is very tempting, when faced with a problem, to stop and ask “What do I or we need to do to solve this problem?” This question addresses the challenge at the level of behavior and, although there is no harm in this question, it does not get at the deeper issues. A more fundamental and useful question to ask is, “What do I need to believe in order to solve this problem?” Maybe we are having diffi- culty with someone who reports to us or with someone to whom we report. It is useful to ask, “What assumptions am I making about
  • 31. ASSUMPTIONS 19 this situation/person?” Often, we discover that something we are assuming is helping to create the problem in the first place. It’s easy for us to develop assumptions that limit our resilience. For example: “this team won’t support me” (so you never ask for it); “that person hates me” (so we look for evidence to support that); “I can’t achieve this objective” (which affects how much effort we put in). I am sure you can think of many more you use with yourself and others. Gary McPherson — A Testament to the Power of Assumptions Gary McPherson’s life is a testament to the power of assumptions. Gary was a fun-loving, athletic nine-year-old boy when, in 1955, he was struck down with Polio. For the next 34 years of his life, Gary would live in hospital and would require the use of a ventilator that would allow him to breath. In the early days of his illness, many of the medical staff around him continued to believe that Gary would not survive. Yet over the years, Gary continued to defy the odds, even as he lost many of his friends from the ward in which he lived. He discovered that some people with his condition had learned to “frog breath”, a method of draw- ing air into the lungs without using the diaphragm. Gary identifies this as the single most important thing he did that enabled him to regain a certain amount of his independence. No longer dependent on a ventilator to breathe for 24 hours at a time, Gary had managed to wrestle more freedom for himself and he left the hospital at age 43 while continuing to use a wheelchair for mobility. Gary explains that in the early stages of his hospitalization, he heard that life expectancy for someone with his condition was five years. He recalls living his life in five-year increments and
  • 32. 20 TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH being surprised when he reached his fourteenth and nineteenth birthdays. By this time, he explains, he felt pretty good and began to think, “well I’m still alive, maybe I should think about doing some things”. When talking to Gary, you quickly get a sense of someone who is focused on what he can do, as opposed to what he can’t. The assumptions Gary uses are based around possibility and persist- ence. He confesses that he negotiates with himself around what he can shoot for and then decides upon the increments for which he will aim. Gary didn’t set out as a 19-year old, almost totally paralyzed by Polio, to become the Executive Director of the Canadian Centre for Social Entrepreneurship. Nor did he envision himself playing a key role in shaping services for people with disabilities in Alberta. Serving eight years as the President of the Canadian Wheelchair Sports Association (CWSA) was not on his mind either. In the early years of his illness, Gary probably never imagined he would become an adjunct professor or guest lecturer with an Honorary Doctor of Law degree. However, his assumptions about his situation and the options open to him supported each small step toward an amazing career. Gary is now married with two teenage children and talks about entering politics. He says that because his kids are older, he has more time on his hands. It is a truly humbling experience to sit and chat with Gary as he talks about plans for the future. Most of them are centered upon what he can help others achieve. In conversation, Gary is quick to mention the powerful effect assumptions have had in his life. The assumption that by serving others we heal ourselves has helped Gary to make significant contri- butions to society. Along with that is the assumption that you can find humor in everything. It is difficult to sit very long with Gary with- out being drawn into his expansive sense of humor. His philosophy of
  • 33. ASSUMPTIONS 21 life has a central assumption that has become a mantra for Gary — “You see what you look for — so choose carefully what you look for.” Amid all the committees and commitments Gary undertook he still found time to write the story about his battle and eventual vic- tory against tremendous odds. With Every Breath I Take sheds light on the heart and spirit of a remarkable man. GO DEEPER Gary McPherson: www.anthillsite.com A great deal of anecdotal evidence demonstrates that people are able to sustain themselves in challenging conditions and situations. There are definable traits that can be identified, and we all have them. This book explores a specific set of skill-building exercises that make it possible for us to develop these traits further. In the process we expand our CQ. Assumptions About Resilience Since this chapter is devoted to an exploration of assumptions, it makes sense to state clearly some of the assumptions that underpin the approach taken in this book. • Change is a constant process. • Our ability to adapt to change is the central role of resiliency. • Resiliency is the ability to adapt, bounce back, and recover in harsh or challenging conditions. • Resiliency is an innate capacity that we all have. • Certain definable traits make up our capacity for resilience.
  • 34. 22 TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH • Traits of resilience have been identified and we are able to strengthen them further with specific exercises. • Resilient teams are built from resilient individuals. • None of us are as smart as all of us — a resilient team further strengthens its individual members. • Everyone wants to make a difference with their lives. Work is a great place for that to happen. Exercises that challenge you to re-assess what you assume about certain things will enable you and your team to become aware of the dangers of auto-pilot thinking. Just as limiting assumptions can cause all sorts of problems to the individual and team, a well thought-out and consciously chosen assumption can be equally liberating and empowering. Prior to May 6, 1954, it was assumed that the four-minute mile was impos- sible. Roger Banister forced everyone to revise that assumption. The revised assumption generated a new belief. [Red Queen] “Let’s consider your age to begin with — how old are you?” “I’m seven and a half, exactly.” “You needn’t say ‘exactly’,” the Queen remarked. “I can believe it without that. Now I’ll give you something to believe. I’m just one hundred and one, five months and a day.” “I can’t believe that!” said Alice. “Can’t you?” the Queen said in a pitying tone. “Try again: draw a long breath, and shut your eyes.” Alice laughed. “There’s no use trying,” she said, “one can’t believe impossible things.” “I daresay you haven’t had much practice,” said the Queen. “When I was your age, I always did it for
  • 35. ASSUMPTIONS 23 half an hour a day. Why, sometimes I’ve believed as many as six impossible things before breakfast.” LEWIS CARROLL, THROUGH THE LOOKING GLASS Joseph Campbell, authority on world mythology, once stated that many people reach the top of the ladder only to find it leaning against the wrong wall. I would like to add that there are two other types of ladders: the ladder that was chosen too short for the desired effect (right wall, ladder not long enough) and the ladder lying on the ground (uncommitted to anything, it serves no one, and may actually trip someone.) Consciously choosing beliefs and assump- tions that will serve you in your life is like choosing a ladder. It is important to lean it against the You need to ask yourself, right wall and aim it in the right “Is your ladder leaning direction for you. against the right wall Once positioned, ask your- and is it long enough?” self if the ladder is long enough. Is your belief strong enough to enable you to achieve your goal? Have you committed yourself to achieving the goal? Have you actually leaned your ladder against the wall? In other words, have you committed to do something about the belief you have chosen? Good Questions Rather than Easy Answers Asking questions is something few of us developed as a skill as we grew up. For most of us, our educational experience consisted of being told to remember the right answer. The focus was clearly on the production of answers to a relatively fixed set of questions (tests and exams). There was little attention given to the creation of
  • 36. 24 TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH good questions. Yet, throughout history, practically all of the major scientific breakthroughs came from people who were fascinated with a particular question and all the possible answers, rather than a search for one right answer. Einstein asking himself what it would be like to ride a beam of light brought him to one of the greatest discoveries of the 20th century — the theory of relativity. Using the right set of assumptions has a huge impact on our level of resilience. Asking good questions is an important step toward checking our assumptions about our own resilience. Testing what assumptions are presently running means asking the right questions. Questions direct our curiosity and our energy. Best-selling author Peter Block claims that “we define…our future through the questions we choose to address.” In chapter 4 we will look at the topic of questions in much greater detail and more specifically how they can enrich our communication (and, therefore, connection) with our team. Hitting a “Whole” in One Increasingly, people are seeking fulfillment in the non-material, psy- chological, and spiritual aspects of life. This movement up Maslow’s hierarchy of needs applies to life in general, but also to work. More and more employees and team members wish to “transform themselves” personally as well as professionally. There is an outstanding opportunity for companies who are willing to offer their employees training and development opportu- nities that help grow the whole person. It could also be viewed as a chance for the company to evolve their people from the inside out. Many companies have already seized the opportunity to grow their people in this way. In Nancy and Kevin Freiburg’s book, Guts, John Mackey, CEO of the Whole Foods Company, is quoted as say- ing, “I don’t see any conflict between wearing our hearts on our
  • 37. ASSUMPTIONS 25 sleeves and running a company that is serious about profits. In fact we feel there is a profound synergy between the two. Both are about responsibility.” By walking its talk, Whole Foods has gained a place on Fortune’s list of the 100 best companies to work for in the U.S. six years running. WHERE WE’VE BEEN • The assumptions we make deeply affect our personal and professional lives. • Our beliefs are created from our assumptions. • Group assumptions are at play within teams at all times. • To create sustainable, lasting change, we must identify the assumptions behind our behaviors. • All beliefs are created, therefore all beliefs can be changed. • Good questions are a great way to challenge and change limiting beliefs. • Successful business operations and teams are based on useful assumptions/beliefs. WHERE WE’RE GOING The assumptions we make and the beliefs that radiate out from them have a profound effect on the way we see the world. Our perceptions are colored by what we think. The next chapter will show how perception plays a central role in the unconscious processes of resilient individuals. We will also look at how important perception is in building resilient teams and how developing CQ relies on how we see just as much as what we see.
  • 38. 26 TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH Questions to consider are: • What assumptions could you make that would transform your own resilience and that of your team? • What shared assumptions would enable your team/place of work to become an adaptive, vibrant center for human and business growth? The following exercises will enable you and your team to explore important questions such as these.
  • 39. ASSUMPTIONS 27 CQ Tool 1 Checking Assumptions Checking assumptions can be a very important first step before a team launches into a project together. In many cases it negates the need to stop later and discover that members’ assumptions are working at odds with each other. The following exercise enables team members to explore the assumptions that may be in operation as the team gathers (metaphorically speaking) around a task or project. Note: for purposes of this exercise a context has been chosen. You may wish to use this as a “practice session” and move onto a more pertinent issue once you and your team feel they have mastered the stages and process. STAGE ONE: The team is divided into groups of four to eight. Each group places a piece of flip chart paper upon the wall in landscape format. Divide the page into three equal columns. The heading “Assumptions” is written at the top of the middle column. STAGE TWO: Give the project team the task of brainstorm- ing a list of assumptions for planning a team retreat (e.g., that it must be out of town, it must be held during weekdays, etc.). A specific and short time period (five to ten minutes) is allowed for this stage.
  • 40. 28 TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH STAGE THREE: The team is asked to choose between three and five of the most interesting or controversial assumptions and circle them (one minute for this task). STAGE FOUR: Write the word “Valid” into the header of the right-hand column. They are now asked to use the chosen assumptions to explore whether the implications/consequences of these assumptions are valid. In short, answer the question “What if they were valid?” (five to seven minutes for this task). STAGE FIVE: The group is asked to place the word “Invalid” as the heading for the final (left-hand) column. Exploring the same chosen assumptions, this time answering the question “What are the implications/consequences if these assumptions were invalid?” (five to seven minutes for this step). STAGE SIX: The group is asked to reflect upon the exercise and comment upon what they noticed. Some questions the facilitator can use at this point are: • What did you notice about your own assumptions? • Were you surprised by some of the assumptions other people had? • If you had the opportunity to explore the invalid options of assumptions you agreed with what effect did that have? • How could this process help teams form strategies around a project?
  • 41. 2 Perception It’s never enough just to tell people about some new insight… Instead of pouring knowledge into people’s heads; you need to help them grind a new set of eyeglasses so they can see the world in a new way. JOHN SEELY BROWN In chapter 1, we explored how assumptions affect the adaptability and resilience of you and your team. We also considered how relative perception really is. Our reality is based upon what we notice, which in turn is heavily based upon our assumptions. Our assumptions pro- vide stability to the reality that we create on a moment-by-moment basis. The process is largely unconscious. However, even when we do change our assumptions about things, we retain our old ways of looking at things. We continue to wear our old prescription as it were. This chapter is about how we look at things, about how our perception affects our resilience. We will also explore how our
  • 42. 30 TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH perception and awareness affect our ability to collaborate with others. In other words, how we perceive others will determine whether we choose to collaborate or not. To this extent our percep- tions determine our collaborative intelligence. In this chapter we will examine five important elements of perception. 1. Attention can be harnessed and focused — our attention affects our experience of our life. 2. Perception as an active process — what we see depends on where we look. 3. Filters can be changed — they select the information that reaches the conscious mind. 4. Perspectives change our awareness — the perspective we take determines what we see. 5. Frames can help us become more flexible — how we frame our perceptions affects the meaning we form. Difficulties strengthen the mind, as labour does the body. SENECA Changing perceptions has had a huge impact on my own life. In 1995, while living in Northern Ireland, I was involved in a road accident that almost cost me my life. I was standing beside my car on a narrow country road, when a speeding car skidded on black ice and rammed into my parked car. The force of the crash pushed my car over top of me. Miraculously I slid under my car as it glided over the road — I “came to” lying underneath it. It was still on its wheels and I had somehow slipped through the space between the car and the ground. Months later the full impact of the accident was discovered. A disc in my back had been torn apart by the injury and a consultant
  • 43. PERCEPTION 31 was explaining to me that I had degenerative disc disease. I was told that the condition “will only get worse”. (Now, there is a nice belief system.) He offered to speed up the process for me to receive a handicapped sticker! Maybe you can imagine what I felt like as I walked (painfully) out of his office. What the consultant had said was slowly sinking in. He had inadvertently helped me form a perception of myself as a “cripple”. I mentally formed a long list of things I could no longer do because of my injury. A number of years passed as I lived my life surrounded by things I couldn’t do because of my back. I was living a “half life”, both personally and professionally. What I didn’t realize was that the assumptions I had created as a result of my conversations with medical staff had left me with very strong (and limiting) filters through which I perceived my life. There was no particular moment of “enlightenment”. Instead, an evolution of frustration brought me to a point where I realized I had to change. I decided I needed to do something to prove to myself that I was capable of moving beyond my injury. If I threw my heart over the fence, I thought, the rest of me might well follow. Then one day I heard of a group of people planning a hike in the Andes in Chile, South America. This had been a life-long ambition of mine. Images of the glaciers and watching condors sail over head occupied my mind. The next day I went to see a personal trainer in the local gym. I asked him if he knew anyone with my sort of injury that still worked out. He said he had quite a few clients. I signed up and started with small exercises. At that time I could not stand up for longer than ten minutes without my right leg going numb and intense pain in my lower back. With great professional advice from Paul, my trainer, and lots of physical training on my behalf I was able to make the trip to Chile. The transition from “cripple to climber” was brought about by a change in how I perceived myself. Sounds simple!
  • 44. 32 TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH However I had to do a number of things to help the change take place in my self-perception. I realized that wishing alone would not change anything. 1. Attention Three pounds of tofu hidden inside a bone box; you could eat it with a spoon and it’s the most important thing in your life. It’s your brain of course and its only connection with the outside world is a set of senses that Q: Three pounds of feed it information. The human nerv- tofu in a bone box? ous system is amazing. Through our A: Your brain. five senses we process approximately 11 million pieces of information every second. Our eyes send 10 million sig- nals to the brain each second and together have more computing power than six Cray computers connected together. So of what is our brain capable? Researchers in this field have attempted to calculate how much information we can process consciously, but by all estimates it is not much. The most opti- mistic figure is 40 pieces out of the 11 million pieces per second (Tor Norretranders, The User Illusion). Up Periscope One way of thinking about how this vast amount of information gets filtered to a small fraction is to think about our conscious mind as a periscope. Our lives are effectively made up of those 40 pieces multiplied by the number of seconds we live. Where we point the periscope determines our awareness. The auto-pilots mentioned in chapter 1 come into play here. They determine, to a large degree,
  • 45. PERCEPTION 33 where we habitually direct our attention. In order to tap into greater depths of our own resilience, we will have to revisit these old pat- terns of perceiving; check the settings on the auto-pilots. Are they optimal for where we want to end up? All great athletes know that their performance is highly depend- ent on where they place their attention. A good sports coach spends a lot of time working in this area, helping the athlete to harness his or her attention. The old eastern expression “energy flows where attention goes”, implies that our energy follows our attention. What we attend to grows and proliferates. Often we believe that it is the things we are not attending to that cause us trouble. Frequently it is the other way around. So when you or your team is faced with a particular challenge it may be useful to stop and ask, “What are we attending to that has helped us create this problem?” “Rubber–necking” is a great example of this phenomenon. It is defined as the tendency to look at accidents to the extent that you become one. According to the American Automobile Association, between 25 and 55% of all road accidents are caused by distracted drivers. We have all seen other people do it and, in all probability, we have been guilty of doing it many times ourselves. We give our attention to an accident we are passing and don’t attend properly to the road ahead. With only so “What are we attending much attention at our disposal, to that has helped us splitting our attention means we create this problem?” have less available to devote to driving our own car. This princi- ple is also important when we are dealing with challenges either individually or in teams. Directing our attention is vital when we need to have our energy flow in a certain direction. Questions are a great way to focus your attention. You can help your team members direct their attention by asking the right
  • 46. 34 TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH questions. One of the differences between a good team leader and a great one is that a good team leader asks some good ques- tions (rather than providing easy answers) and a great team leader asks great questions (and supports the team in forming their own answers). Although there is a large unconscious component in how we organize our attention, we can, with conscious control, move our attention. Meditative practices are really attention-training systems. This is one of the reasons meditation can be so helpful in building emotional balance. You are effectively training yourself to control your own attention. Our society has become a noisy place to live in — with many distractions and advertisers clamoring to catch and hold our attention for as long as possible. Our attention is a pre- cious resource that we must look after carefully otherwise it can be hijacked or dissipated by external forces. Unless a person knows how to give order to his or her thoughts, attention will be attracted to whatever is most problematic at the moment: it will focus on some real or imaginary pain, on recent grudges or long-term frustrations. Entropy is the normal state of consciousness — a condition that is neither useful nor enjoyable. MIHALY CSIKSZENTMIHALYI, FLOW The quote from Mihaly Csikszentmihalyi conveys the need to use our attention as a form of energy. By channeling attention toward something useful, we are doing two things: 1) Not allowing any of our valuable energy to be wasted on harmful or wasteful activities; and 2) we are bringing it all to bear upon the important task of creating what we do want to happen.
  • 47. PERCEPTION 35 GO DEEPER Attention: www.anthillsite.com Team mission statements can serve the same function. They help the team members harness the collective attention around specific objectives, drawing people around a common purpose. Many businesses go to a great deal of trouble to create visions for their company. One of the benefits of a business vision is that it focuses attention on what is important to the company. Ideally the business vision orchestrates the attention (and energy) of the whole organization. Our resilience is dependent, in part, upon how we use our energy. Therefore how we organize attention will have a large impact on our resilience. Mihaly Csikszentmihalyi, in his book Flow: The Psychology of Optimal Experience, goes so far to say that “attention is our most important tool in the task of improving the quality of experience.” When I think of directing attention what comes to my mind are images of cairns (piles of stones) that people build to show the path up a mountain. In a similar way the Inuit people have used special rock formations called “Inukshuk” for centuries as a way of pointing the traveler’s attention along a safe route.
  • 48. 36 TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH This chapter is about building cairns to harness our own atten- tion with the purpose of establishing a more optimal experience. By marshaling our attention we will be more resilient. Exploring this process as a team will enable your team to harness its collective attention. The result will be a more resilient team. 2. Perception Is Projection How we see things has a great deal to do with how we feel about things. When we have strong emotions about something we often project these outward onto events that are occurring around us. For example, if I become angry about something in the morning, I may notice many other things during my day that also make me angry. Emotions have powerful affects on what we notice. It is a common misconception that perception is a passive process carried out by our senses. The scientific evidence points to per- ception being an active process closely tied to the flow of our emotions. Choosing how to view an event is one of the secrets of emotional mastery. (We will visit this topic in greater detail in chapter 3.) Enlightenment is waking up to the illusions contained in the belief we have been fed since birth: the belief that whether or not we are at peace depends upon what we have or do in the material world. It is discovering for oneself, as a personal experience of life, that whether or not we are at peace depends on our perception and interpretation of events. PETER RUSSELL
  • 49. PERCEPTION 37 When Captain Cook first arrived on the shores of what is now North America, the Arawak Indians were reported to be unable to see his ships. What they saw we will never know, however, the prin- ciple has modern examples much closer to home. A young woman who moved from the Philippines to North America did not recog- nize that some of the people she was meeting had red hair (she had never met someone with that color of hair in her home country). It was such an uncommon sight in her native land that she was liter- ally unable to “see it”. Months later she began to notice that some people had a hair color that was new to her. She then began to notice that even people she was very close to in her new country had red hair. The distinction for red hair had not been important where she had grown up and it took some time for her perceptual system to rewire for its existence. These are rather dramatic examples of a process that is going on inside each of us all the time. We see things when we are ready to see them. This has an impact on how resilient we are. For exam- ple, what might you not be seeing that is going on within your team or life, for that matter? Are some limiting assumptions “invisible” because we have not looked for them? Shifts in what we can see come with shifts in our awareness. The exercises at the end of this chapter are designed to cause shifts in your awareness. In doing so they will enable you to see things differently. But what has the story of the invisible ships got to do with our resilience? Maturana and Varela are well-known researchers in the field of physiological psychology. They have demonstrated that our perceptions are heavily biased toward the use of already-on-board information. In other words our perceptions at any particular moment in time are based on 20% new information — fresh from the envi- ronment, so to speak — and a whooping 80% of onboard information. The 80% represents information our nervous system has stored about the environment. Our nervous system patches together the
  • 50. 38 TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH 20% new and 80% old to create an experience of reality. Such a recipe of sources leaves us very prone to errors. Optical illusions are great examples of how easily our nervous system is fooled. Look at the illustration in Figure 2.1 and notice how easy it is to see a white triangle that is not there? Figure 2.1 Can You See a White Triangle? The white triangle in Figure 2.1 is caused by a combination of the 80% of onboard information and the 20% new information. Our brain is attempting to make sense of the image and completes it for us. This particular illusion also can be used to explain how our assumptions help build our reality. Now in Figure 2.2, each of the little pies represents an assump- tion/belief that we have onboard. Our brains complete the picture for us and assure us that the space in the middle is reality. Within every team there is a “reality” being created by the shared assumptions of all its members. These in turn shape our perceptions that we then take to be our “reality”. If a team wishes to change its reality, then the assumptions and perceptions need to be examined first.
  • 51. PERCEPTION 39 Figure 2.2 Is the White Triangle Clearer? Assumption 1 ‘Reality’ Assumption 3 Assumption 2 What You See Is What You Choose to See Being able to shift our attention from one perception to another is known as “perceptual flexibility”. Perceptual flexibility can be demonstrated using the necker tube experiment. Figure 2.3 Necker Tube Experiment
  • 52. 40 TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH Look at Figure 2.3 and notice which plane seems to be the one closest to you. Now bring the other plane up into the foreground and allow the first plane you chose to fall into the background. Some of you may be struggling; others will find it a very simple task. With a little effort you will be able to switch the tube between the two per- spectives. Typically once someone has done this they will be able to choose the kind of tube they see. This is an example of how we express our perceptual flexibility. So far we’ve discovered that our reality is a construct. Physicists assure us that the concept of a solid physical world “out there” is, at best, a nice idea not supported by research. Philosopher and physicist David Bohm often said, “Thought creates the world and then says, ‘I didn’t do it.’” This can be unnerving and reassuring depending upon how you look at it (there’s that perspective thing again). The world we live in was created and is continually being created, to a large extent, by what goes on in our own nervous system. This further emphasizes the ancient wisdom that if we wish to change the world we must first change ourselves. And yet it is so tempting to point outward to all those things (including people) that are the cause of the problem. It’s even more attractive when it is a team of people that is not performing well or an organization that is functioning poorly. The implications for any- one in a position of leadership are pretty obvious so I won’t labor this point. GO DEEPER Perceptions: www.anthillsite.com
  • 53. PERCEPTION 41 3. Filtered or Instant? With the massive amount of information arriving at our nervous system from the outside, it’s not surprising that our brain has to fil- ter it. Effectively our nervous system is tuned to notice some things and ignore a lot of others. The software running this process is informed by filters for dangerous things. Once our basic needs — things we can eat, drink or mate with — have been satisfied, or dan- gers safely avoided, a different set of filters become active. These are designed to search for ways that higher needs can be satisfied, for example those related to social belonging and self-esteem. Maslow’s hierarchy of needs shows one possible set of filters that our nervous system can sort with. GO DEEPER Maslow’s Hierarchy of Needs: www.anthillsite.com We could view filters as one of the reasons goal-setting is such a successful process. By setting goals we are setting intention. Setting intention is like programming our nervous system to filter for things that are important to our goals in the environment. Perceptual filters are just as active in the workplace as they are outside it. They determine, to a great extent, how we perceive others. There are a wide range of personality profiling systems that provide insight into how people behave. When someone is profiled as an “INFJ” or a “strong blue”, that label is used to explain why they are the way they are. With this set of filters personality is very often conceived as a static thing that changes little. The concept of character and building character is often not factored into how companies manage their human resources. In real life we know people do change, either
  • 54. 42 TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH through self-directed re-invention or as a result of events occurring in their lives (for example becoming a father or mother). Profiling systems, like all filters, can have liberating and restricting effects. GO DEEPER Building Character: www.anthillsite.com For a long time psychologists have known about the Fundamen- tal Attribution Error (FAE). When interpreting other people’s behavior FAE causes us to over-estimate the importance of basic personality traits and under-estimate the significance of situation and context. In this case the filter for personality traits is stronger than those for situation or context. Simply put, FAE causes us to form stereotypes and can lead to various forms of bias. Sexism, racism, and ageism are examples of biased perceptions. We tend to see what we want to see. Optical illusions are a great example of how unreliable our perceptions can be (see Figures 2.1 to 2.2). We do not see the world as it is, we see it as we are. MARCUS AURELIUS If we wish to change the world (or another person or a team) we must first ask, “what changes do we need to make within our- selves?” Choosing to look at a person or situation from a more productive perspective will automatically enhance our CQ. By look- ing for places where collaboration is possible we will find more. Being able to restructure our perceptions of reality is a fun- damental aspect of our own innate resilience. Social psychologists Daniel Gilbert and Timothy Wilson suggest that we have our own “psychological immune system” that acts to protect us from threats to our (psychological) well-being. “When it comes to maintaining a
  • 55. PERCEPTION 43 sense of well-being,” they say, “each of us is the ultimate spin doc- tor.” The ability to put a spin on our perceptions can just as easily hold us stuck as liberate us. This is where assumptions (especially about ourselves) have such an impact on perception. 4. Perspective — What We Find Depends on Where We Look Within the Sufi tradition there are many stories about a mystic joker called Mulla Nasrudin. One such story relates how a good friend finds the Mulla on a dark night on his hands and knees underneath a street lamp crying. His friend enquires why he is crying. The Mulla explains he has just lost his gold coins; his life savings are gone. The friend immediately feels sorry for the Mulla and gets down on the ground to help look for the coins. After a period of fruitless searching the friend gets up and asks, “Mulla can you remember where you were standing when you dropped your coins?” “Oh yes,” replies the Mulla. “I was down there in that dark alleyway.” “Why in heavens name are you looking under the street lamp then?” his exasperated friend asks. “Because there is more light here,” the Mulla replies. I find this story funny and tragic at the same time. The Mulla is doing Optimal perception is exactly what we do so often. He is as much about where looking for the answer where there you look as it is is the most light rather than where he about how you look. really knows the answer lies. More specifically I have often attempted to find the cause of some problem in the environment — out there — rather than looking where I knew the problem to lie — inside myself. The knack to optimal perception is not only how we look but also where.
  • 56. 44 TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH It Looked Bigger in the Store Colin Turnbull, in his book The Forrest People, relates a story about a Pygmy he had befriended while traveling through the African con- tinent. This Pygmy had lived his entire life in the thick jungles of East Africa. Turnbull took the Pygmy to the Serengeti, the great open plains that border the jungle and showed him the wild life of the plains. The life-long forest dweller asked, “what insects are those?” referring to the water buffalo that were a long distance away. When he was informed that the “insects” were water buffalo he laughed out loud and called Turnbull a liar. The Pygmy’s per- ceptual world was biased so heavily toward the short distances of tropical jungle life that he could not conceive that these buffalo were real. The environment in which we live and work undoubtedly affects our capacity to see. We become accustomed to the perspectives available and don’t even realize that we have been conditioned. Therefore anything that enables us to change our perspectives will inevitably change what we are able to see. An Elephant by Any Other Name This is not the only way that our perceptions can be restricted. I am sure you are familiar with the story of the six blind men around the elephant. This story originated in the eastern philosophical tradition and is a metaphor about reality and our own incomplete grasp of it. Each of the six blind men touch a different part of the elephant and the zoo keeper asks them what they think an elephant is. The blind man holding onto the trunk says that an elephant is a snake-like thing; the one holding onto the ear, a fan-like thing; and so it goes on, each of the blind men defining the elephant by the part of its anatomy with which they are familiar.
  • 57. PERCEPTION 45 From a psychological perspective we have at least three per- spectives we can use to view our own reality. The first position is the perspective of us standing in our own physical space, looking out through our own eyes. This perspective is also associated with using words like “I”, “me”, and “myself” when referring to our feelings. When we describe an experience from the first position we tend to re-experience the feelings of the event as if we were in our own body. Typically when we think of the event we do not see ourselves in images of the experience. The second position is being able to assume someone else’s perspective in an experience. We take on the other’s perspective seeing and hearing what they see and hear. When we explore this perspective deeply we will also be able to imagine what they feel like. This perspective is the basis of empathy and can be a power- ful tool in discovering what it is like to be another person. One of the greatest benefits of this perspective is that it enables us to under- stand the other person’s world better and to communicate more effectively with them. The experience is often described as “walking a mile in their shoes”. The third position is characterized by the fact that we are not associating with anyone in the situation. We are not assuming the perspective of being inside our own body, nor are we imagining being in the body of anyone else. The perspective is that of “a fly on the wall” floating free from feelings and able to observe events and the behaviors of ourselves and others in a totally detached way. This is a very effective perspective to take when we wish to separate ourselves from our own individual feelings and the feelings of others. None of the perspectives is any better than the other. They all serve a useful function. People who explore all three perspectives of an event are better informed than someone who explores only one (typically first position). Exploring all the perspectives is also described as using perceptual flexibility.
  • 58. 46 TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH Once again the three perceptual positions are: 1. First Position — looking through our own eyes; 2. Second Position — stepping into someone else’s shoes and looking through their eyes; and 3. Third Position — viewing the situation as if we were a disembodied eye witness or “fly on the wall”. Most of us have a preferred perceptual position. For exam- ple first position is, understandably, the most common position. The perspectives involved with each of these positions are sim- ply perceiving habits. With them come habits of thought. The great news is that they can be changed and expanded with skill- building exercises. The difference in the quality of the three perspectives is signif- icant. First position obviously contains more information about the feelings we have associated with the event. You will have access to information about physical sensations, feelings, and even smells and tastes. If the event was positive, then first position enables us to access the positive feelings related to it. However if the event was negative, maybe first position is not the best place from which to process it. After all who wants to make themselves feel bad? Choosing How to See I ran a stress management clinic for almost ten years in Northern Ireland. Many clients would explain that events in their past were making them feel depressed, scared, or sick. When I asked them a few questions about how they thought about those events, I discov- ered that most of the time the client was re-living the events and running them in their mind from first position. It was not surprising that they had to seek professional help. When I taught them the
  • 59. PERCEPTION 47 perceptual positions exercise, they discovered they had options in terms of from where they processed a memory (first, second or third position). Asking our brain to change how it operates is a little like trying to write with our non-dominant hand. For most of us the process is messy at the start, but with practice it becomes easier. The pay-off for developing the ability Asking our brain to to take different perspectives is change how it operates an increased ability to understand is like writing with our a situation, to be able to look at non-dominant hand. it from two or three perspectives instead of just the same old one. The exercise at the end of this chapter will help you learn how to use the three basic perspectives more systematically. My mother used to tell me that an ounce of skill is better than a pound of knowledge. And knowing about the perspectives and not using them is a lot like knowing CPR but being unwilling to administer it — tragic. When exploring the three perspectives, we begin to realize there are three truths. 1. We have a choice about which perspective we use to process a thought from the past, present or future. 2. Each perspective provides advantages and disadvantages. 3. Exploring all the perspectives better informs us about the event. Leonardo de Vinci considered the first way he looked at a prob- lem to be too biased towards his usual perspective. To overcome this bias he would look at the problem from one perspective, then another, and then another. With each change, he said, his under- standing would grow. A closer examination of de Vinci’s anatomical
  • 60. 48 TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH diagrams provides ample evidence that he never drew something from just one perspective. The effect of adding understanding by systematically using different perspectives may be why the different perspectives have been called “the three keys to wisdom”. Even a blind man having taken the time to explore an elephant from many perspectives is much closer to wisdom than someone vigorously clutching just one part. 5. Frames — We’ve All Been Framed Frames refer to the set of interpretations we choose to surround a particular event. If someone were to offer me a mint I could frame this gesture as an act of genuine friendliness and generosity. I could also frame it as a subtle way to suggest that I had bad breath. In most circumstances social etiquette prevents us from asking what the offer of the mint implied. We are left to perceive the event in a way that fits with our overall understanding of the situation. Our perceptions will determine how we operate in the situation as well. We could ask ourselves a useful question: “In what way can I choose to perceive this situation that will further enhance collaboration?” By answering this question we are developing our CQ. Everyone has experienced interpreting someone’s behavior in one way, only to find out later that their perception had been flawed. If reality is such an undependable construct, should we not just choose the frame that best allows us to be the most resilient? In other words, if we assume (use a frame) that a statement someone makes to us is well-intended, the frame has a particular effect. By framing their statement in a positive way we are indirectly creating a situation that is cooperative and friendly. If, on the other hand, we frame someone’s remarks as ill-intended, we will convey this in our tone of voice and body language. That may
  • 61. PERCEPTION 49 set the scene for a situation that is defensive and non-friendly. The actual intention of the other person is almost immaterial. We cannot control other people, as much as we would like to think we can. The bottom line is that we can only be responsible for how we feel. So frames can be exceptionally useful when we wish to change the way we feel about something such as a memory or another person’s behavior. Changing the frame we use is called “reframing” and, along with perceptual positions, is another one of the tools that enables us to be more resilient. The secret is to choose a frame that enables us to respond most resourcefully. The end result is that we are able to take control of a situation rather than allow it to control us. Let’s look at an example. Greg has discovered his boss, Jeff, has plans to ask him to work the weekend. He presupposes that this is because, of all the people that work in his department, Jeff likes Greg the least. This assumption leaves Greg feeling resentful toward Jeff and anxious about how he will be able to say “no” to the request. An alternative perspective Greg could take is that Jeff has chosen to delegate the work to him because he is the most skilled and reli- able person. This set of assumptions (making up a frame) leaves Greg feeling valued and honored to be asked. Whether he really wants to work the weekend is immaterial at present. What is most affected will be the interaction between himself and his boss. Whether Greg says yes or no does not really matter. The overall outcome was reframed by Greg. He could have displayed feelings of resentment and put Jeff on the defensive. Either way Jeff will either feel more comfortable with his refusal, or will have begun to appreciate Greg more for saying yes. By reframing the situation Greg did not have to lie to himself or pretend things that were untrue. What he did was change the frame he used long enough to see how the situation played out. In this situation the CQ of both parties probably rose simply from choosing a different frame.
  • 62. 50 TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH Any event or situation can be a good thing or a bad thing depending on how it is perceived. Highly resilient people have per- ceptual flexibility, enabling them to choose how they view a set of circumstances. Often they will reframe a situation several times to enable them to maintain a sense of autonomy or control. This is called multiple reframing. A great example of this process is found in the Zen tradition. THE FARMER AND HIS STALLION There is an old Zen story about a farmer who bought a fine stallion one Monday at market for a good price. His neighbors came to admire it and all said “How fortunate you are!” To which the farmer replied “Maybe…” On the Tuesday the stallion escaped through a gap in the fence and ran away to the hills. Now all the neighbors said “How awful — what a catastrophe.” To which the farmer replied “Maybe…” Then on Wednesday the stallion returned to the farm with a small herd of wild mares behind him. This time the neighbors were ecstatic — crying, “What luck! How marvelous.” To which the farmer replied “Maybe…” On the Thursday the farmer’s only son was breaking in the wild mares when one of them threw him and
  • 63. PERCEPTION 51 he broke his leg. In the evening the neighbors talked of “the tragedy and misfortune.” To which the farmer replied “Maybe…” On Friday the Emperor’s army came looking for able bodied recruits to fight and almost certainly die in a War in the North…the villagers said to the farmer — “how fortunate for your son”, the farmer replied… The principle behind this story is that perception is a highly rel- ative process. Maturana, the Chilean biologist, suggests that when we forget our relative view of reality, we lose our capacity to live together. He goes on to state that when one person or group insists that only they see “what is really going on”, they are actually making a “demand for obedience”. There are many examples of this process going on in the world today. Indeed most, if not all, international conflicts are caused by groups of people being certain about their own version of reality. The demand for obedience worked successfully throughout the industrial era with organizations built upon power hierarchies. Now that we are entering the era of collective intelligence, where coop- eration and CQ are premium skills, such demands are less effective and often very harmful to a team’s overall resilience. Emotional Perceptions We’re not passive observers of an external world; rather, we know our world through interacting with it, and our emotions can limit or enrich that interaction. HUMBERTO R. MATURANA
  • 64. 52 TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH Maturana’s observation leads us to the following question: “How are we choosing to interact with the world?” By looking for the bad or negative influences, we discover a limited and one-dimensional world. This emphasizes the power of perspective in building the CQ of groups and teams to which we belong. Neuroscientists have discovered strong evidence that human intelligence, human memory, and human decisions are never completely rational but are always colored by emotions, as we all know from experience. CAPRA, THE WEB OF LIFE One factor that cannot be ignored is the part our emotions play in our perceptions. In fact research in this area demonstrates a connection between our success and general sense of happiness. After interviewing 100 of the most successful and happy people they could find… The research found that each and every one of the 100 people had a special capability — to look for and find what is good in him- or herself, in others, and in all situations of life. ENCYCLOPEDIA OF POSITIVE QUESTIONS Emotions also play an important role in our level of self-mastery. The wisdom of this chapter can be encapsulated by the “Four Noble Truths” found in Buddhist philosophy. • We all experience suffering in one way or another — mental, physical, emotional, spiritual. • We create our own suffering. It is a consequence of our desiring things to be other than what they are.
  • 65. PERCEPTION 53 • It need not be this way. We have a choice as to how we perceive the world and live our lives. • There are systematic ways to go about changing how we think and perceive. There are many ways to change how we think and perceive. The methods offered at the end of this chapter have been very success- ful with tens of thousands of people. Of course, nothing will change unless you are willing to try them. Mirror, Mirror on the Wall How we perceive ourselves determines how we operate in this world. Our self-perception is part of our relationship with ourselves. The relationship we have with ourselves is the most fundamental and abiding relationship we will ever have. If we are highly judgmen- Change starts tal with ourselves it will almost certainly be with the self. translated into a habit of being judgmental with others. The place where change starts is the self and nowhere is it more true than our perception of ourselves. When I view myself as a time-sensitive product, valued for what I produce, then I have made depth, extended thought, and the inward journey marginal indulgences. Instead of doing what matters, I spend my life doing what works. It increases my market value and postpones the question of my human value. BLOCK, THE ANSWER TO HOW IS YES
  • 66. 54 TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH The quote from Peter Block’s book, The Answer To How Is Yes, defines the challenge we all face in a rapidly changing society. What is our human value? Does my personal journey have any impact upon my professional development? Without developing ourself as a human being (rather than a human “doing”) we will fail to grow professionally in a sustainable fashion. Along with this is the task of developing our CQ, our capacity to tap into the energy of groups and networks, supporting others as they strive to achieve their outcomes and achieving our own, in the process. WHERE WE’VE BEEN So we’ve explored the topic of perception in connection with resilience and the development of CQ. From this chapter we learned that: • Perceptions are relative and become habits of seeing; • Our attention is an important asset and used carefully can strengthen resilience and raise CQ; • We use filters to select what we attend to and what we ignore; • We can change the way we operate with others by changing our filters; • Perspectives are ways of looking at things and we need to practice using different perspectives to increase our perceptual flexibility; and • Frames are ways we interpret perceptions and reframing can help us respond more resourcefully to challenges.
  • 67. PERCEPTION 55 WHERE WE’RE GOING Biographies and autobiographies of great people point clearly to a distinct connection between how they saw the world and how they behaved in it. In this chapter we explored one half of the equation. In the next, we explore the other half — self-mastery. We will also examine ways to expand our own self-mastery and the part that can play in developing resilience and raising CQ.
  • 68. 56 TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH CQ Tool 2 Developing Perceptual Flexibility This exercise achieves a number of things. It enables partici- pants to discover for themselves specific processing capacities of the mind. The realization that participants have a choice over which processing capacity they use to review past events and plan future ones. STEP ONE: Close your eyes and think of a pleasant holiday you have experienced. Notice the pictures/images as you recall this event. Note: There are two different perspectives from which you can run your memories. One is where you are watching your- self in the memory (fly on the wall). This is called the Director’s Perspective. The other is when you are actually in the pic- ture seeing things with your own eyes. This is the Actor’s Perspective. Director’s Perspective: When you are running a memory from the director’s perspective, you are taking a dissociated position. You are seeing and hearing things from a position removed from the scene. Typically, when you run memories from this position, your feelings about this memory tend to be diminished or absent altogether.
  • 69. PERCEPTION 57 Actor’s Perspective: When you are running a memory from the actor’s perspective, the memory is running as if you were re-living the event within your own body. You do not see yourself in the pictures. Typically, you will have a height- ened awareness of the feelings associated with that memory. STEP TWO A: Notice the image you created. Are you in direc- tor’s perspective where you see yourself in the picture? (If you cannot, then go to Step 2B.) In this case, to explore the actor’s perspective, imagine stepping into your body in the event. Notice what it is like to be inside your own body. To help, you may like to imagine things like warmth or coolness or feelings of relaxation, etc. STEP TWO B: Notice the image you created. Can you see things and hear things as if you were there? If so, you are run- ning the memory from actor’s perspective. In this case, imagine stepping out of your body and notice what it is like to be watch- ing yourself in the event. You may notice the lessening of the feelings associated with this memory. Note: Now you have had an opportunity to switch perspectives from where you normally run that memory. The advantage of being able to switch perspectives is that you can choose to have more or less feelings associated with the event. STEP THREE: Practice switching from one perspective to the other. Doing this expands your perceptual flexibility. Try the exercise with other events. Notice by switching to the director’s perspective, challenging or upsetting events become much more
  • 70. 58 TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH comfortable. They lack most (if not all) of the negative feelings that accompanied them originally. Likewise, if you had been running pleasant memories from the director’s perspective, you will discover the memory has many more pleasant feelings to be enjoyed by switching to the actor’s perspective.
  • 71. 3 Self-Mastery Socrates demonstrated long ago, that the truly free individual is free only to the extent of his own self-mastery. While those who will not govern themselves are condemned to find masters govern over them. STEVEN PRESSFIELD, THE WAR OF ART In chapter 2, we explored the part perception plays in our resilience and in building resilient teams. Perception also plays a central role in our ability to develop self-mastery. In this chapter, we will explore how to develop greater self-mastery and how developing it will affect the creation of resilient teams. We will also examine the connection between self-mastery and further enhancing our CQ.
  • 72. 60 TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH The First Furrow When I was ten years old my mom sent me with tea and biscuits down to the fields where my father was plowing. When I got there, he had just started a new field and was half-way down the first furrow. I decided to wait until he came back up the field. He took ages — every now and again getting off the tractor to tap something, or adjust part of the plow. By the time he returned to my end of the field I had begun to wonder just how long it was going to take him to plow the whole field. “Dad,” I said, “I have watched you plowing the first furrow and if it takes you as long to plough every furrow, it’s going to take you all day to plough this little field.” “Well son that was the first furrow of the field — it’s the most important, because it sets the pattern for the rest of the field.” He went on to tell me that when it came time for me to plow a field and if I found I didn’t like the pattern when I had finished, I should check the first furrow and I would usually find that the problem started there. In reading the lives of great men, I found that the first victory they won was over themselves… self-discipline with all of them came first. HARRY S. TRUMAN On reflection, I realize my dad was sharing a valuable insight. So often we become aware of patterns in our lives that we don’t like. Sometimes we even try to fix the pattern — the one that’s “out there” somewhere — when really the first furrow is where the pattern is set, within ourselves. In human relations (and communication) the human heart is where the first furrow is cut. How we relate to our- selves sets the tone and the shape of the cut line for the ones to follow. It is easier to look outside ourselves than look inside. Often an ounce of change made within easily outweighs a pound of change made without.
  • 73. SELF-MASTERY 61 The first furrow connects personal development (the responsibility to develop An ounce of ourselves) to professional development. change made To pretend that they do not affect each within easily other is naive. A company may wish to outweighs a hire the person’s skills, but inevitably pound of change they end up with the person’s attitudes in made without. the bargain. Sustained great results depend upon building a culture full of self disciplined people who take disciplined action, fanatically. A culture of discipline is not just about action. It is about getting disciplined people who engage in disciplined thought and who then take disciplined action. COLLINS, GOOD TO GREAT The metaphor of the first furrow emphasizes the responsibility we each have for our own behavior and how much this behavior depends upon the relationship we have with ourselves. Building greater trust with others is one thing, building greater trust in our- selves is another. Close examination of resilient teams uncovers that they are made up of individuals with great levels of self-mas- tery. Not only does this ensure that everyone pulls their weight, it also means that each member is a good role model for the rest of the team. High levels of self-mastery are also associated with peo- ple who have high CQs, in that they actively pursue collaboration with others. The most obvious question is, “How do we develop greater self- mastery?” First let us look at what are the most important skills that make up self-mastery.
  • 74. 62 TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH 1. Perceptual Flexibility 2. Making Meaning 3. Emotional Management 4. Mental Models 5. Leadership and Followship 6. Intention 7. Persistence 8. Alignment 9. Self-Expression In the following pages we will discover how each plays their part in building self-mastery and how to strengthen our own sense of it. The truth is we already have a great deal of self-mastery at work in our lives. It is made up of a composite of the nine elements men- tioned above. Consciously making improvements — even small ones — in these nine areas will enable us to deepen our self-mastery. 1. Perceptual Flexibility In chapter 2 we explored how we can use multiple perspectives to enable us to choose how we looked at things. Choosing how to see something is exercising perceptual flexibility. Individuals with high levels of self-mastery choose how they look at things in order to deal with them more effectively. No occurrences are so unfortunate that the shrewd cannot turn them to some advantage, nor so fortunate that the imprudent cannot turn them to their own disadvantage. DUC DE LA ROCHEFOUCAULD Perceptual strategies are evident in the way people approach life. Highly resilient people display strong optimistic strategies.
  • 75. SELF-MASTERY 63 This may not be exhibited as the classic “rose-tinted glasses”, rather it is demonstrated as a deliberately chosen, useful perspective. Within resilient people this manifests as the ability to turn practically everything that happens to some advantage. Here are some of the features that distinguish optimistic strate- gies from pessimistic ones. When something pleasant happens to someone using a pessimistic perspective, they: • credit luck; • predict it can’t last; or • localize the effect. When something challenging happens, they: • blame themselves; • generalize to other areas of life; or • predict the future based on their present conditions. We have all used these strategies from time to time in our lives. However, it is obvious that if we were to apply them to everything, the consequences would be pretty tragic. On the other hand when something pleasant happens to some- one taking an optimistic perspective, they: • take some credit for the effect; • look for a positive trend; or • generalize the effect. When something challenging happens, they: • remember that there is no failure, only feedback; • take it as an exception to the rule; or • consider it as an isolated incident.
  • 76. 64 TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH The same incident, challenging or pleasant, is treated quite dif- ferently by the two types of strategies. The next time something happens to you that could be considered unpleasant or pleasant, stop and consider what strategies you are applying. Strategies are like habits of thought and, as such, old ways of dealing with things will be the first to impose their will. We only have to stop and ask the question “How else could I approach this?” to begin the process of breaking free of our old habits. Foul Ball or Strike? People with high levels of self-mastery have the ability to create use- ful meanings for events in their lives. The story of the three umpires illustrates this point. Three umpires are discussing how they approach umpiring. The youngest among them explains that he “calls them as they are”. The next umpire states that he “calls them as he sees them”. The oldest and craftiest of them says that “they are as I call them”. The old umpire realized that he was able to define the game by choosing how to see the play. In effect he is choosing the meaning of what he sees and he knows it. Scientific evidence suggests that the strategy of perceptual flexibility provides benefits that go beyond the psychological. In a study authored by Christopher Peterson of the University of Michigan (Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 1989, p. 55), it was shown that there appears to be a direct link between illness and pessimism. The study examined how subjects viewed events in their lives. Following the test group over a 35-year period, the study showed that subjects with negative interpretations were consistently sicker than their more optimistic peers. These kinds of findings have been replicated many times since. It is not sur- prising to find that psychonueroimmunology (the study of how the
  • 77. SELF-MASTERY 65 mind affects the body) is one of the fastest growing areas of research in medicine. Because resilience not only relates to our minds but also to our bodies, one strongly impacts the other. I know several people who do all the right things for their body — vitamins, good nutri- tion and regular exercise — but unfortunately they harbor negative emotions and beliefs about their health. Their thought patterns may be negating much of the positive physical care by suppressing their immune system. If we can make ourselves sick or well with our thoughts, we can certainly make ourselves less or more resilient with them. GO DEEPER Mind Body Connection: www.anthillsite.com 2. Making Meaning A Native American elder once described his own inner struggles in this manner: Inside of me there are two dogs. One of the dogs is mean and evil. The other dog is good. The mean dog fights the good dog all the time. When asked which dog wins, he reflected for a moment and replied, The one I feed the most. GEORGE BERNARD SHAW Viktor Frankl’s Man’s Search for Meaning and The Unheard Cry For Meaning were written as testaments to this deceivingly simple
  • 78. 66 TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH idea — we are the meaning makers. During the Second World War he was held in several different concentration camps. His experience there brought him to the realization that all his “freedoms” had been taken from him, except the freedom to choose what the experience meant. This insight probably saved Frankl’s life and those people who embraced his approach. In Frankl’s own words, “the sort of person the prisoner became was the result of an inner decision” and that decision centered on creating a meaning for himself. By changing the meaning he could change the way he responded to the horrible conditions in which he found himself. This led his captors to change the way they treated him and the other prisoners who participated in this strategy. The result was that Frankl was able to wrench something of great value from very dire circumstances. Upon his release at the end of the war, this series of insights led him to develop a new psychotherapy, called Logotherapy, which has had a significant impact on clinical practice. The central tenet to this Choose a meaning that form of therapy is that no matter makes you feel more what happens to you, you always resourceful and resilient. have the freedom to choose what it means to you. To an ordinary man everything is either a curse or a blessing, but to a Man of Knowledge everything is a challenge and an opportunity. TEACHINGS OF DON JUAN Just as you can choose from what perspective to look at some- thing, you can also choose a meaning that makes you feel more resourceful and resilient.
  • 79. SELF-MASTERY 67 GO DEEPER Making Meaning: www.anthillsite.com 3. Emotional Self-Management Most of the time we manage our emotions quite unconsciously. The importance of emotional self-mastery has been firmly established through the work of Daniel Goleman and his concept of Emotional Intelligence (EQ). When faced with challenging situations and chal- lenging people, expressing EQ obviously becomes more valuable. However, emotional self-mastery is just as important during times of high performance. GO DEEPER Emotional Intelligence: www.anthillsite.com You don’t drown by falling in the water; you drown by staying there. EDWIN LOUIS COLE Mastery over emotions is a central element of highly resilient people. Our emotions provide us with the power to act and are an important source of self-nurturance. Fear is the most common prob- lematic emotion. Many successful athletes report how they managed to turn their fear into a source of energy enabling them to achieve great accomplishments. (The exercise at the end of chapter 2 (Per- ception) can also be used to harness your emotions.) Our emotional response to a situation is directly related to how we perceive it. The feeling of excitement when taking a seat in a roller coaster is
  • 80. 68 TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH biochemically identical to the feeling we have before we sit down in the dentist’s chair. What differs is how we perceive the two events and consequently how we interpret the feelings. In other words if we wish to change the way we are responding to a situation, we can change the way we look at it. Emotional self-management is also closely related to self-esteem. Nathaniel Branden has described self-esteem as “the reputation we have acquired with ourselves”. He goes on to say that “There is no value-judgment more important to man — no factor more decisive in his psychological development and motivation — than the estimate he passes on himself.” GO DEEPER Self-Esteem Survey: www.anthillsite.com 4. Mental Models The fourth aspect of self-mastery is mental models. These are deeply rooted assumptions and ways of thinking that guide the way we think about the world. They are described as mental because they exist in our minds and models because they are constructs created as a result of our own experience of life. They are often used as maps to navigate our future experiences. Everyone has them and, like the Zen fish, in chapter 1, we don’t notice them most of the time. One thing is cer- tain — they are ours and they affect the way we respond to our world. In the practice of systems thinking, changing mental models is considered to be the only way to eliminate a problem, rather than just solve it. When we solve a problem it may reappear again. When we eliminate it, that particular problem will never reappear (don’t worry there are plenty others) because we have changed our mental
  • 81. SELF-MASTERY 69 models with respect to the issue. Mental models are created out of beliefs and based on our assumptions (chapter 1). The reason we explore this topic here rather than under assump- tions (chapter 1) is that mental models are more than just beliefs and they have such a profound impact. The secret to improving self- mastery through mental models is to develop systematic ones. Delib- erately chosen mental models will help achieve the objectives we set. In their book The Art of Systems Thinking, Joseph O’Connor and Ian McDermott suggest following simple rules to enable you to have more systemic mental models. • Admit your mental models are your best guess at the moment and be on the lookout for better ones. • Have wide interests • Be comfortable with ambiguity. • Be curious about, and pay particular attention to, experiences that seem to contradict your mental models. • Have a wide time horizon to look for feedback. • When confronted with a problem, look at the assumptions you are making about the situation as well as the situation itself. • Look for relationships, how events fit together. • Look for loops and circles of cause and effect, the effect of one cause being the cause of another effect. Choosing our mental models is the mark of highly resilient and successful professionals. The concept of CQ is a mental model. As a result of adopting it we begin to look for ways to increase collab- oration and actively seek ways of building stronger relationships. The “assumption-busting” strategy explored in chapter 1 is particu- larly good at altering mental models. Too often we wander around the world without checking the filters we use to process events and relationships in our lives.
  • 82. 70 TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH 5. Leadership and Followship Leading and following are two behaviors that have created the greatest number of theories and books in relation to business. For a group of individuals to function together some leading has to be going on and some following. That’s the simple part over. Traditional models of command and control involve a distinct hierarchy of command. Orders are issued from the top and fed down through the hierarchy to the lowest levels. Since the dawn of the industrial rev- olution this system has been considered to be the only way people could be organized around work. The mechanistic view inherited from Newton’s model of the universe probably encouraged this view of how people work. The mechanistic view also implied that the lowest levels of the organi- zation had the least knowledge and was in the worst position from which to make decisions. Managers at the top were considered to be in a better position because they had the “big picture”, enabling them to make executive decisions that became a set of directions to the lower ranks. In such a system, the personal initiative required from people at the front line was generally very low. We are still occasionally told “I’ll have to ask the manager”, indicating the person has not been granted the decision-making power necessary. The command and control method of management and busi- ness innovation is proving too cumbersome for forward-thinking companies. Many are discovering the advantages of using “bottom– up” intelligence. This perspective takes the view that people at the front line are in a better position to make decisions because they are closest to the changing environment. More enlightened companies are realizing that to survive they are going to have to become much more adaptive to the changes occurring in the mar- ket. The bottom-up model (which we explore in greater detail in chapter 5) also requires team members to have adequate levels
  • 83. SELF-MASTERY 71 of self-mastery. Without it they will not be able to exercise their initiative when required. Bottom-up processing makes it possible for companies to increase speed and effectiveness of service by enabling the front- line staff to deal with practically anything they encounter. More and more companies are realizing the advantages of allowing front-line staff to have the power to make more decisions. It enables the com- pany to flatten their own structure, making do with less middle management. Another outcome of bottom-up processing is that high levels of self-reliance are required of everyone in the company. This in turn places more emphasis on all the team members’ levels of self-mastery. Yin and Yang In a truly self-organizing system, the part of the The concept of followship has team that is in the best been with us for a few years. It position to act and has is defined here as the ability to the greatest amount of follow and support the efforts of knowledge will lead. a self-organizing team. In a truly self-organizing system, the part of the team that is in the best position to act and has the greatest amount of knowledge will lead. This means that within a resilient team leadership frequently flows through the membership depending on where they are in the process. As conditions change leadership may shift many times. During these transitions each individual needs to be able to shift from followship to leadership and back to follow- ship as the situation demands. The skills involved in good followship are as outlined below. • The ability to see what needs to be done and do it when it needs to be done.
  • 84. 72 TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH • Flexibility in behaviors to support fellow team members as they shift from follower to leader. • An awareness of the team as a functioning whole where each individual is willing to lead and to follow as circumstances dictate. • A capacity to build collaborative relationships that support the team and the individuals that make it up. These skills could also be considered as core in the development of our CQ and the CQ of any team to which we belong. 6. Intention Intention is one of our most valuable assets. It has a huge impact in the area of setting outcomes. In other words, how our intention has been set has a significant effect on how likely it is that we will achieve our outcomes. For example, setting the intention to build collabora- tive relationships will automatically make it much more likely that such relationships will be created. Properly formed intention enables the creation of a well formed outcome. Resilient individuals with high levels of self-mastery fre- quently achieve their outcomes. Laurence Boldt said, “You wouldn’t think of building a new home without a blueprint. Yet many of us try to live our lives without a clear sense of the results we are after.” There are probably many people reading this book right now who have extensive plans and objectives for their next vacation, but have given no such attention to what they wish to achieve with their team. The benefits of a well formed outcome are the following: • We notice what is useful for our objective. • We remember what is useful to our objective.
  • 85. SELF-MASTERY 73 • Our objective determines our selection of perceptions. • Our objective affects our thought patterns. • Our thoughts and perceptions can help us reach our objectives. Of course the more clearly defined our outcomes/objectives are, the more likely it will be that the benefits will materialize. There are two types of objectives — away-from and towards. An away-from, sometimes known as the problem-focused objective, motivates us to solve the problem or achieve the objective by getting away from something or reducing something. A department trying to reduce absenteeism is a good example of an activity which is away-from. Certain strategies and policies are implemented to get away from high levels of employee absences. The other side of the coin is how the department could be run to move towards high levels of employee engagement. Strategies designed to create a workplace that people love to come to will also have the effect of lowering absenteeism. In this example the objective was basically the same but the intention formed was quite different. The question has changed from “what do we want less of” to “what do we want more of”. In that switch, what has changed is the perspec- tive taken and the strategy adopted. Towards strategies are also known as solution-focused. Robert Fritz, in his book The Path of Least Resistance, explains that away-from outcomes are poorly designed because they do not take into account how human beings are motivated. In the case of away-from outcomes, as he sees it, each time a portion of the objec- tive is achieved, the less motivation there is to continue, like a moth flying away from the light because of the heat. At some point the heat diminishes and causes the moth’s attraction for the light to once again override. Thus the moth is caught in limbo until it collapses of exhaustion.
  • 86. 74 TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH Many organizational challenges exist only because they have been phrased and approached in an away-from manner. In other words they were not designed for success; they were designed to avoid failure. For example a company focused on getting out of debt may end up using different strategies to achieve that objective, than a company that plans to maximize revenue. Reducing debt is, after all, only half the story. The pressure to reduce debt will ease as the debt falls, therefore progress slows and it takes longer to achieve the outcome. All companies want to make a profit and a towards objective (such as maximizing profits) creates more of the desired result as it gains its objectives. A salesperson with the target of selling 50 cars each month is motivated by the number sold that increases as the month passes. Notice that they are not motivated by the number they still have to sell, although some people choose to motivate themselves that way. Neither of these approaches is good or bad. Fritz’s comprehensive research in this area clearly shows that most successful people are motivated by things they were building rather than things they were tearing down (except dem- olition experts of course). Fritz uses the term “creative tension” to describe the process of connecting a desired goal to the pres- ent reality. Imagine an elastic band stretched Successful people are motivated between two points. The by things they were building very act of connecting rather than things they were them with an elastic tearing down. band will make it more likely that the two will be drawn together. Also being drawn towards something (e.g., profit) is much more moti- vating for most of us than being pushed away from something (e.g., debt). This is one of the main reasons why the concept of creative
  • 87. SELF-MASTERY 75 tension and well formed outcomes are more successful than away- from strategies. Addressing the South African people, Nelson Mandela spoke much more about creating a rainbow nation than he did about tak- ing down the apartheid system. Intuitively he knew that if they had focused on taking it down, at the end of the process all they would have left was a large and dangerous political hole. So instead he focused their energy on the creative tension existing between where they were as a fledgling nation and where they wished to end up. The result was the rainbow coalition that amazed the world by creating a largely peaceful transition. All well and good, but we live in a complex world where objec- tives and outcomes are not always of our making. Many times they are handed to us or to our team. The argument here is that no matter in what form they are presented, we can choose to apply a towards or away-from strategy to them. (For a method of creating well formed outcomes, see the exercise at the end of this chapter.) The solution-focused approach, builds beautifully into the strength- based/appreciative approach as both emphasize that we “find what we look for”. Using intention is also called “beginning with the end in mind”. It can be explained best with the story of the young soldier. A young soldier is found in the barracks by his captain. He is pulling all the bunks apart, emptying all the cupboards, pulling up the rugs and making a horrible mess. The Captain says, “Son, what are you doing?” The young soldier says, “I’m looking for a piece of paper.” He says,
  • 88. 76 TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH “Well, you’re making a mess and you better stop it or I’ll put you on a charge.” The soldier totally ignores him and continues tearing the barracks apart. Eventually the Captain says, “Look, son, that’s the last time I’m going to warn you.” But still it goes on. So he calls the military police and they whip him down to the brig to let him cool off for a while. He’s only in the cell for a few moments when the jailor hears a commotion in the cell. There is the soldier moving anything that isn’t bolted down. The jailor shouts in through the door, “What are you doing, Private?” The soldier says, “I’m looking for a piece of paper.” The jailor says, “Well there’s no piece of paper in there, buddy. You just stop making such a fuss.” The young soldier ignores him and continues to ransack the cell. The jailor decides to call up the army psychiatrist. “We’ve got a real cookie down here Doc, you gotta see this guy. He’s something else.” The psychiatrist says, “Well, send him up.” The MPs bring him up to the psychiatrist’s office. The young solider is only in the office a few seconds when he starts pulling everything apart. The psy- chiatrist asks him what he is doing. The soldier says, “Looking for a piece of paper.” A few sessions later, the same scene play- ing out each time, the psychiatrist becomes exasperated and says, “Look Private, I have decided after much reflection that you are not cut out for the army, and the army is not cut out for you. I am signing your dismissal.” He hands the young soldier the dismissal form and the young man says, “There’s the piece of paper I was looking for.” Reflect on this for a moment. What if the captain asked the soldier, “What are you doing?” and this young soldier said, “I’m try- ing to get out of the army.” Do you think he would have been discharged? I don’t think so either. In this story the intention the young soldier had set enabled him to navigate the Captain, the jailor and the army psychiatrist. He remained focused on what he wanted
  • 89. SELF-MASTERY 77 (the piece of paper) rather than what he did not want (to be in the army any longer). Using Our Signal Lights One final thought around the topic of intention is the need for us to broadcast our intention. Once you have developed a well formed outcome, you must find ways to broadcast it and then be sensitive to your environment as it responds to that announcement. On the highway, for instance, we switch on our signal lights to let other drivers know we wish to change lanes. So it is with life: if we wish to change lanes we should allow others to know of our intention. Think of the number of times when you set an intention and suddenly resources became available to you that you didn’t know existed. This had more to do with you broadcasting your intention than it had to do with miracles. Designing outcomes and setting our attention implies we are willing to take personal responsibility for ourselves and our behaviors. This is another important element of the self-mastery underlying the resilient individual. Setting positive intention is also about a central part of further enhancing our collaborative intelligence. By actively seeking positive outcomes with others, we are raising our CQ at the same time. Viktor Frankl once said that the United States should have built a statue of responsibility on the west coast to balance the Statue of Liberty on the east coast. What he was getting at was that we all wish to have more liberty or freedom and not necessarily any of the responsibility that comes with that freedom. For instance the freedom to drive on the public highways is matched by the responsibility to drive in a safe and courteous manner.
  • 90. 78 TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH 7. Persistence Nothing in the world can take the place of persistence. Talent will not; nothing is more common than unsuccessful men with talent. Genius will not; unrewarded genius is almost a proverb. Education will not; the world is full of educated derelicts. Persistence and determination alone are omnipotent. ELEANOR ROOSEVELT There are two sides to every story. Persistence can be associated with stubbornness. Winston Churchill’s call to “never give in” can be used by the frog as an excuse to stay in the pan while it simply boils to death. Therefore I think an important element of persistence is the use of judgment in choos- ing what to hold onto and what A great deal of success in to let go off. Another story may life is based upon knowing help to clarify. what to hold onto and Two monks are walking what to let go off. along a path. They come to a river and meet a pretty young girl, just standing there won- dering how she is going to get across. One of the monks offers to carry the girl over the river. After they had all crossed and the monks had been walking for some time along the path on their own once again, the monk who had watched his companion help the girl said, “Brother I have been thinking for some time about this and we both
  • 91. SELF-MASTERY 79 know that our order forbids us to have contact with the opposite sex. Are you not concerned for your soul?” The other monk said, “Are you still carrying her? I set her down two miles ago.” One of the monks in this story knew just how long he needed to hold onto the young girl, the other didn’t. The country and western singer Kenny Rogers would have described it as “knowing when to hold em and when to fold em”. In other words there is a fine line between persistence and stubborn stupidity. Sometimes hindsight is the only thing that will tell us the differ- ence. And sometimes if we hold on for long enough fate steps in. When I was a young child living on an isolated farm, the summers were often long and lonely. I lived a considerable distance from my nearest friend. After working in the fields with my father all day I often amused myself by exploring a set of old buildings belonging to a neighbor. One evening I discovered a small hole in a stone wall supporting an old cowshed. Lying near it on the ground was a metal stake, the type they used to fasten the roof. I began to chisel a stone out of the wall with the spike. This became a favorite pastime of mine during the summer. I would make my way over to the shed in the evening and knock out another stone. Weeks later, toward the end of summer, there had been a storm with strong winds. My older brother, Pierce, came into the house at supper time and said, “You’ve knocked Billy Greer’s cowshed down.” No one at the kitchen table knew what he was talking about — except me of course. I didn’t know what to say, and eventually got into a great deal of trouble with my parents over the incident. The hole I had created, one small stone at a time, had so weakened the building that a gust of wind came along and finished the job. The lesson I took from this experience was that you don’t always have to finish the job yourself — beginning it and working steadily will allow other factors to play a part — sometimes with spectacular results. In this case my persistence generated a good thrashing from
  • 92. 80 TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH my father, but on the other hand persistence can generate good things too. Dr. Robert Ornstein has conducted a great deal of research in the area of how people use their brains. His research shows that when we use both sides of our brains (there is a natural tendency for people to use one side predominately), we greatly increase our functional capacity. Some subjects increased their performance by a factor of ten (X10) when they used both sides of their brain. Brain Gym™, stemming from the intensive research of Dr. Paul and Gail E. Dennison, provides a series of simple exercises designed to balance the use of the two sides of the brain. GO DEEPER Brain Gym: www.anthillsite.com Persistence is difficult to maintain if we do not manage our energy properly. We have a finite amount to expend and how we focus it depends entirely on how we align ourselves. 8. Alignment Self-mastery relies on our ability to focus and, in turn, upon our ability to create alignment. Alignment enables us to have the great- est impact in our lives. Robert Dilts created a model that describes our lives as consisting of a series of levels. He called these the “logical level” and they are: • environment, • behaviors, • capabilities,
  • 93. SELF-MASTERY 81 • beliefs, • values, • identity and • spirit. Arranged as a series of concentric circles (see Figure 3.1), the levels represent different aspects of our lives. Figure 3.1 Dilts’ Logical Levels Environment Behavior Capability Belief Values nt Ide ity Spiritual • Environment. At the outer level, we have our physical environment: material possessions, our homes, and the people in our lives. This is the part of our life that is most visible to ourselves and to others. The environment also contains all our relationships. We have accumulated all these things (good or bad) from the new level — our behaviors.
  • 94. 82 TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH • Behaviors. This level includes everything we do in our personal and professional lives. Our behaviors, to a large extent, have created our environment. If we wish to change our environment we must change our behaviors. Our behaviors are largely dependent upon our capabilities. • Capabilities. This refers to all the things of which we are capable. Not all capabilities become expressed as behaviors. For example I might be capable of driving my car at 150 MPH. I don’t allow that to become a behavior because I do not like the anticipated consequences for myself or other drivers. Capabilities are potential behaviors, some become actualized and others don’t. The difference between those that turn into behaviors and those that don’t is whether there is support at the belief level. • Beliefs. These store all the things we assume about ourselves, others, and the world in which we live. Beliefs are about permission. They give it or take it away, depending on how they are structured. Often enough we wish to be capable of something and when we think about it carefully we find we do not have sufficient belief in ourselves. We have not given ourselves permission. The beliefs we form rely heavily upon the things we value. • Values. What we value will affect our relationship to the world. We focus our energy around those things that have the greatest value to us. We form strong assumptions and opinions around our values and, as such, they become the birthplace of most of our beliefs. In their own right they are the source of our motivation and therefore become very important when we are trying to achieve something. If we do not have a belief about something, it is unlikely that we will generate any capabilities or behaviors related to it. As you can see, each level depends on the content of the one below.
  • 95. SELF-MASTERY 83 • Identity. Who are we? This can include our ethnic and cultural heritage (even if we don’t associate ourselves with it any longer). Roles such as father, teacher, and artist often have a significant affect at this level. How we perceive ourselves (our identity) determines what we value. • Spirit. The core of the model represents our spirit. Spirit need not be interpreted in any religious fashion. I think of spirit as the deepest level of us that knows it is alive in an alive universe. At this level it is common for people to be aware of how deeply connected they are to everyone and everything. The condition of our spirit determines, to a great degree, our identity (and so on up the through the layers). When people refer to the “spirit of the team” this is the level that is expressing itself and probably the level at which the team has connected. Everyone has had an experience where they have felt this level of connection with other people. This is one of the reasons why people who have had spiritual experiences sometimes undergo dramatic changes in their: beliefs and values; identities; capabilities, and behaviors. Alignment is the process of bringing the different levels into line with each other. This can be achieved individually and also between individuals in a group, say within a team. Typically changes made at any of the deeper levels will reverberate, like ripples over the surface of a pond, out to the environment level. In my expe- rience using this model with individuals and teams, huge changes can occur at the surface (environment/behaviors) with just small adjustments at deeper levels. Aligning our own logical levels is not as complex as you might imagine. One of the most common discoveries people make when they perform an alignment process is that even very negative and self-limiting behaviors are attempts to honor a positive value situated
  • 96. 84 TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH at a deeper level. For example, someone that is overly strict and dictatorial with a colleague who reports to him may find through alignment questions that this behavior is based on the value of helping the person get the best out of himself. This alignment process is featured in the companion workbook. Team alignment can be used to help individuals align the logical levels together. Of course, good personal alignment is a nec- essary first step to good team alignment. Try making a neat bundle out of a set of very crooked twigs and you’ll know what I mean. There are significant benefits of bringing about this degree of align- ment. Many teams are designed more around compliance than commitment. We should remember that commitment is a much more powerful motivator. The real reason commitment is not more common within the corporate world is that most managers and team leaders do not have a systematic way to generate it within their teams. The logical levels alignment process can be invaluable in these circumstances. Team alignment also requires us to be actively developing our CQ. High performing teams are aligned and exercise all their collaborative intelligence around their shared objectives. 9. Self-Expression At the very beginning of this chapter I shared the story of the first furrow and it’s relevance to how we operate in the world, partic- ularly with others. The kind of relationship we have with ourselves affects the way we use self-expression. The kinds of things we say about ourselves lets others know what sort of opinion we have of our- selves. Even things we say about others reveal a great deal of information, indirectly stated, about how we think of ourselves. Being highly judgmental toward another team member probably indicates we are very judgmental with ourselves.
  • 97. SELF-MASTERY 85 Negative messages we received during our childhood are often absorbed and replayed whenever we experience an event that chal- lenges our self-esteem. What we say about ourselves affects how other people perceive us. Conversely positive messages we received during our childhood are absorbed and act as a supportive reference when we encounter challenges to our self-esteem. The things we say are based upon how we feel about ourselves. If we discover that our references to ourselves are less than flattering, then maybe it is time to reassess on what our self-esteem is based. When someone is being highly judgmental of us we can, at the least, try to avoid them. When we are doing the judging, getting out of the way is not really an option. Self-expression is important in another way. How we express ourselves affects how other people relate to us — as implied earlier in this chapter. If we have a critical and negative relationship with ourselves this stands a very good chance of being translated into critical, negative relationships with our colleagues. Such relationships cannot build resilient teams. Communicating our positive regard and respect for the people on our team will help build a team with strong resilient relationships and further strengthen our own CQ and that of the team. The next chapter explores the skill of communication. We will also address a number of questions. How does our communication affect our CQ and that of the team in which we operate? How can we build strong teams that weather change and pull together no matter what? WHERE WE’VE BEEN This chapter has been about self-mastery and the role it plays in developing resilience and raising CQ. The main points of this chapter are: • Self-mastery begins with taking personal responsibility for where we are.
  • 98. 86 TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH • Developing our perceptual flexibility expands our self-mastery. • We are the meaning makers and we define our own reality by interpreting it. • Emotional self-management is a central element of self-mastery. • Mental models are useful ways to manage our beliefs and assumptions about life. • Leadership and followship are two sides of the same coin and both are becoming increasingly important in the highly dynamic society in which we live. • Intention is a potent force for developing self-mastery and in reaching our life objectives. • Persistence can compensate for shortcomings in other areas and is an important aspect of self-mastery. • Alignment of energy (e.g., beliefs, behaviors and values) serves to strengthen self-mastery and develop CQ within teams. WHERE WE’RE GOING Self-mastery is primarily important to the individual. However very few people work in total isolation. The further development of self-mastery requires that we know how to positively influence others. To do this we must know how to communicate effectively. The next chapter explores the topic of using communication to strengthen resilience and build CQ within teams.
  • 99. SELF-MASTERY 87 CQ Tool 3 Self-Mastery and Eliciting a Well Formed Outcome In this chapter we have explored one of the distinguishing features of someone with strong self-mastery, namely their ability to create well formed outcomes. The following is a series of questions which can be used to elicit a well formed outcome. For this exercise think of something you would like to achieve. It is important that you choose something that you really want and that would make a difference to your life — that will ensure you engage meaningfully with the exercise and be motivated to follow through. Also as far as chunk size is concerned, world peace may be a little large (considering this may be the first time you have ever completed this exercise) and a new haircut may not have enough going for it to fully engage you. Somewhere in between will probably work best. Take your time to fully explore all the possible answers to the questions — the more specific you are, the more likely the process will work for you. 1. What do you want? (E.g., is anyone already doing what you want to do?) ____________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________
  • 100. 88 TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH 2. What’s stopping you? ____________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________ 3. Where, When, with Whom? ____________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________ 4. What resources can you use? People, personal things, and things you don’t already have? ____________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________ 5. Time, Money, Effort needed? ____________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________
  • 101. SELF-MASTERY 89 6. What are the present benefits of the present situation? (What is the secondary gain?) ____________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________ Note: In relation to question 6 — present benefits — it is com- mon for people to have the reaction, “But surely there are no benefits to the present situation.” This is a natural response; however psychologists call these benefits secondary gains. Like the small child that continues to misbehave, knowing that he is likely to receive another slap from his parent, the secondary gain is the attention he receives and the form in which he receives it is less important. In other words the secondary gain will continue to reinforce the behavior until the child discovers another way to ensure he can get attention from the parent. Likewise with things in our lives that we may wish to change — even with things that on the surface provide no perceivable reward — there may well be a secondary gain. For example if someone were frequently avoiding promotion at work, the sec- ondary gain may be that they will not have to make adjustments to the relationships they have established with their co-workers. Surfacing the secondary gain can be a powerful catalyst in moving forward with a desired outcome.
  • 102. 90 TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH 7. How will others be affected? (Explore second and third positions.) ____________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________ 8. What are the consequences? What else might happen if you got this outcome? ____________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________ 9. What actions will you take? Are others involved? If so how can you build in value for them? ____________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________
  • 103. SELF-MASTERY 91 10. Ecology: does the outcome feel right? Is there anything missing? Place yourself into the future having achieved this thing and then answer this question again. Is there a difference in your answers? ____________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________ 11. What larger outcomes are supported? ____________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________
  • 105. 4 Communication Communication is the essential medium of a creative culture: the communal sea in which we all swim. A company that can’t communicate is like a jazz band without instruments: Music just isn’t going to happen. JOHN KAO This chapter brings us to the topic of communication and connects the previous themes of assumption-building, perception-making and self-mastery. After all, great self-mastery can only achieve so much if we are working within a team that does not communicate effectively. More specifically, we will look at the role dialogue plays and examine how questions can serve a vital function in professional and team settings.
  • 106. 94 TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH Top Down — Bottoms Up The word “communication” can have many meanings. In a business setting it can refer to persuasion, collaboration, issues manage- ment, public relations, or employee communication. Sadly, most business training programs do not cover these topics deeply enough. These skills are increasingly required to enable flattened organizations to operate. We are now discovering that the top down, command and control management philosophy is giving way to the horizontally structured (flattened) company. In this environment good communication skills are essential to provide continuity and interaction across teams and departments. Communication is the single most important human skill and, like anything that is always there, it can easily become invisible. Yet communication is one of the central skills to building stronger CQ within teams and organizations. William Isaacs, president of Dialogos, explains that, “The prob- lems that even the most practical organizations have — in improving their performance and obtaining the results they desire — can be traced directly to their ability to think and talk together, particularly at critical times.” Often treated as a soft skill, communication is the backbone of every organization and affects everything and everybody involved in that organization. All personal and professional relationships are built on rapport. Rapport is defined as a relationship of mutual understanding or trust and agreement between people. It is also described as the process of getting “into sync” with another person. Effective communication cannot occur without it. To expand and develop our communication skills we must first become aware of how we are exercising the skills we have right now. In this chapter we will explore skills that expand our ability to communicate effectively both one-to-one and in groups.
  • 107. COMMUNICATION 95 Manipulation or Influence? Often when people think about learning how to influence others with their communication, they ask, “isn’t that manipulation?” This is an important question. All communication is influence, everyone is influencing everyone else whether they mean to or not. The more relevant question is, “how do I wish to influence this person?” not “will I?” Most influence is directionless and without purpose. The moment we add direction and purpose it runs the risk of being labeled as manipulation. Communication skills are a tool, like a scalpel, for example. A scalpel can be taken to a hospital and used to save someone’s life. The same implement could be used to hold up a convenience store. The sharper the scalpel the more capable it is for either pur- pose. The most significant factor is the intent of the person holding the tool. Responsibility rests with the person using the skill, not with the skill itself. This is where the rubber hits the road — are we taking advantage of the other person? Or are we seeking to discover a win-win situation, where the other person gains from the situation more or less equally? In chapter 1, we explored how the assumptions we hold about life are fundamental to how we operate in the world. In this chapter I am making a specific set of assumptions about communication. I am going to ask you to take on these assumptions and use them as you explore this book. When you have finished the book, only adopt those that work for you. • Rapport is meeting individuals in their map of the world. Rapport is defined here as a relationship of mutual trust and respect. Rapport is established through matching the other per- son’s body language and language patterns and by being willing to enter their world rather than inviting them to visit ours.
  • 108. 96 TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH • Communication is both verbal and non-verbal, both conscious and unconscious. Research in communication shows clearly that a large component of rapport is established non-verbally. To communicate more effectively we must be able to address the non-verbal element first. Not all of our communication lies within conscious awareness and the same is true for the person with whom we are communicating. Communicating respect and positive regard toward the other person non-verbally is therefore an important element to establishing good rapport. • The meaning of the communication is the response that you get. This principle is about responsibility in the commu- nication dance. We are assuming that if we do not receive the response we desire or expect, it is up to us to change our communication. Common sense tells us that it is easier to change our own behavior, than change that of others (tempting as it may be). • There is no failure only feedback. The average person receives strong messages from very early around the concept of right and wrong — it is bad to be wrong and it is good to be right. This mind-set creates distinct limitations to our ability to communicate and learn. In one sense immediate success is much more limiting than failure because exploration ends with the success. Failure forces us to continue exploring the area for more information. In response to a question about becoming discouraged after 700 failed attempts to create the light bulb, Thomas Edison replied, “I have not failed once. I have succeeded in proving that those 700 ways will not work. When I have eliminated the ways that will not work, I will find the way that will work.”
  • 109. COMMUNICATION 97 • Behavior is the highest quality information. Every moment of every day people are giving you huge amounts of infor- mation about their response to your communication. Most of this process goes on unconsciously. It is tempting to focus only on making sense of their words. The words comprise only a small portion of the total message; body language and voice tone make up a surprisingly large portion of the complete message. • If what you are doing isn’t working, do something different. This is directly linked to the assumption about failure and feedback and the meaning of your communication. If you are not getting your point across, it is time to change what you are doing so that you can get a different result. More of the same (repeating or speaking louder) very rarely achieves the desired result. Instead of assuming the other person “just doesn’t get it” — take a different approach. These assumptions can have a real effect on how we communi- cate. For a start, if we do not get the result we want, we are more capable of taking a different approach; instead of assuming the other person “just doesn’t get it”. This brings us back to our own flexibility (which we explore in chapter 7). In other words, assuming that there is something we can do about the way we are communicating is much more useful than trying to get the other person to change their way of understanding. Teeter-Totter Topic All communication is a balance between relationship and infor- mation. In business, as in any other area, effectively communicating
  • 110. 98 TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH with another person requires there to be enough relationship to balance the importance of the information. Professional speakers have an old saying that goes “no one cares how much you know, until they know how much you care”. This principle is equally valid for general professional conversations. If there is insufficient relationship, the other person(s) will not care enough about the information you are trying to convey. On the other hand if there is only relationship and no information, no real progress can be expected from the conversation. Everyone has experienced meetings where the relationships were great and yet very little was achieved. All of the energy went into building and enjoying the relationship; little or nothing into the information aspect. Generally the more important the information, the more imper- ative it is that the relationship aspect is cared for. When we are under pressure we frequently forget or accidentally drop the rela- tionship piece. Our own emotional state is important; managing it when the stakes are high can help direct the conversation in a resourceful direction. When we are anxious about how a message will be received, we can tip over into information-only mode. If we are in a nervous and agitated state, we will communicate this to the other person non-verbally. Indeed, they may be so impacted by that non-verbal message that they don’t notice the verbal message. So we must remember that non-verbals become strong messages in their own right.
  • 111. COMMUNICATION 99 When we take ownership of the teeter-totter and ensure we hold the balance between information and relationship, we rapidly become a more effective communicator. Look closely at very effective com- municators and notice how they manage this balance carefully. Connecting in a Different Way The balance between information and relationship becomes even more important when the information has the potential for damaging the relationship between the people communicating. A study was conducted with senior executives as they prepared to retire from their positions. One of the questions the study asked them was to identify the most stressful part of their jobs. One might expect the executives to talk about big deals or crucial mergers. This was not the case. Invariably, the group surveyed talked about the stress of having to let people go, and of delivering bad news. I think what this says about communication in business life is that it is not always true when people say, “it’s nothing personal it’s just business” (true Godfather-style). It is a natural human tendency to not wish to disappoint others. The question is what can we do when we have disappointed others? Flemons, in his book Completing Distinctions, talks about how couples deal with an affair that occurs during their relationship. He states that, “an affair cannot be forcefully forgotten, cannot be ban- ished from the history of a relationship, but it can be connected to in a different way.” In other words, they have discovered another way to communicate with it, which in turn enables them to communicate differently with each other. Similarly, people within organizations cannot change how they are relating to each other if they are unwilling to connect to others in a different way. Holding grudges is often a psychological strategy
  • 112. 100 TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH people use to defend themselves from future hurt. However the strategy can backfire. A story from southeast Asia relates how the jungle dwellers used to catch monkeys. The story goes that they would put a fig into a narrow-necked earthen jar and leave it at the base of a tree the monkeys frequented. The curious monkey would put its hand into the jar and grab the fig. As long as it held onto the fig, it couldn’t get its hand out of the heavy jar. The monkey’s ability to escape was hampered by the thing it was holding onto and easily caught by the jungle people. The moral of the story is that it’s unwillingness to let go cost the monkey its freedom. We need to ask ourselves what are we holding onto that is preventing us from moving on. Holding on can happen in teams when members are unable to let go of things that have happened in the team’s history. As a result they are hampered by their history. Is Orion Always There? When I think of changing interpretations of an event, constellations come to my mind. Consider the constellation of Orion in the north- ern hemisphere — the magnificent hunter of the winter night sky. The configuration of the stars has represented Orion the We are pattern recognition Hunter for thousands of years. systems — we impose Yet if we traveled a few light patterns and, by doing so, years toward it we would we also impose meaning. find that the hunter has dis- appeared. The stars have not moved — we have and every- thing is different. Before we made the journey those eight stars depicted Orion and yet further out in space they mean something
  • 113. COMMUNICATION 101 different. We are walking pattern recognition systems — we impose patterns and, by doing so, we also impose meaning. We are the meaning makers and how we make those meanings, shapes the way we communicate. A more useful question to consider about an event or expe- rience could be “How can I relate to this in the most resourceful and useful way?” or “What is the most useful meaning I can choose from what they said?” This implies there are a number of ways the event can be interpreted and that we have choice, rather than “what does that mean?” which implies there is one meaning that we have to discover. Types of Communication All communication can be effectively divided in to two types: • Intrapersonal — the way we communicate with ourselves and • Interpersonal — the way we communicate with others. Without adequate awareness and skill at the intrapersonal level, it is impossible for someone to be effective at the interpersonal level. A house without a foundation may appear sturdy, however, when storms rage, it becomes a liability and dangerous to everyone inside it. Intrapersonal Communication According to the National Science Foundation the average person generates approximately 12,000 thoughts per day. It is reasonable to assume that most of us “talk” to ourselves at least as much as we talk to anyone else; this emphasizes the importance of the quality
  • 114. 102 TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH of our intrapersonal communication (self talk). Unfortunately, the majority of self talk is unconscious and is therefore operating below the radar. GO DEEPER Self Talk: www.anthillsite.com High levels of motivation and clarity rely heavily on the kind of message being communicated internally. Negative messages or jumbled contradictory self talk lead to demotivation and lack of affir- mative action. Becoming aware of the nature of self talk is the first step to changing it. The simplest awareness device on the market is an elastic band. Placed on the wrist, it reminds us that thoughts matter. Twanging it when negative thoughts surface helps to begin the process of rewriting the scripts we run in our minds. Our personal resilience is a reflection of the thoughts we have about ourselves and the world in which we live. If we wish to strengthen our own internal resilience, we must first check what thoughts we are running. Of the 12,000-odd thoughts we have each day, very few are critically examined. Most go unchecked or explored for relevance. We know in our heart of hearts that change is a constant and that the world in which we live today is not the world we lived in last year. Yet so many of the assumptions formed a year ago are still running our thoughts. They are fundamental to the quality of our lives. Interpersonal Communication As we work on further improving the quality of our internal com- munication, we can also work on the nature of our interpersonal
  • 115. COMMUNICATION 103 communication (communicating with others). One of the most important areas where we can improve our capacity to successfully communicate with others is with our voice tone. Voice tone plays a significant part in expressing meaning. Remember when you were young — the tone of voice your mother or father used could have a devastating effect. Unconsciously we use voice tone as an important part of the context of verbal information. A great deal of our communication today is conducted over a phone and body language has little impact on how our messages are interpreted. On the phone the tone of our voice becomes the most important source of extra information (meta messages) about what is being said. Our voice tone is affected by our emotional state and this explains why emotional self-mastery (chapter 3) is so important. We may think we can mask or hide strong emotions such as anger or excitement from the other person, but the truth is we are com- municating our emotions unconsciously all the time. Assuming this to be true, it becomes important to decide what emotional state we want to be in when communicating with a particular person or in a specific situation. The skills explored in chapter 3 will enable you to achieve greater emotional self-mastery. The saying that “to mas- ter others first master yourself” could be altered slightly to say “to master your communication, first master yourself”. Communication at the Speed of Light Light travels very fast — 186 thousand miles per second, to be pre- cise. Sound travels at a fraction of this speed — 750 miles per hour. We have all witnessed thunderstorms and know that we see light- ning long before the sound of thunder reaches us. So when you say something, information about what you look like as you say it arrives much sooner than the actual words.
  • 116. 104 TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH When “light and sound” messages match in content we call this congruence. Congruent messages are much more effective than messages that don’t match or that are at odds with each other. It is important for us to be congruent in our communication by ensur- ing our non-verbal messages match our verbal ones. Saying we are pleased to see someone when we have a doubtful look on our face is an example of incongruence. Highly influential communicators also ensure their voice tone closely matches the verbal message they are sharing. When someone responds poorly to something we said, we frequently think it was the words we used. Rarely do we think that it had anything to do with the other messages added to the words — the way we look or the tone of our voice. The expression “you cannot not communicate” represents an interesting assumption in relation to emotions and voice tone. When we are annoyed with someone and we allow that annoyance to affect our emotional state, in turn affecting our voice tone, the other person inevitably picks up on this information. This may then change the direction of the conversation when the person responds to the non-verbal messages (voice tone, body language), rather than the words themselves. Good self-mastery enables us to control our emotions so that we are not adding unwanted emotional content to our communication. Tone of voice does not go entirely unnoticed at the conscious level — people will say, for example, “please don’t use that tone of voice with me”. At times like these it is important to separate what the other person said, from how they said it. One way to separate the two messages — the verbal and non-verbal — is to say, “The tone of voice you used makes me feel ‘X’. Is that what you intended?” Often the other person is unaware that two messages were delivered. The question enables them to clarify what they meant. The process of building and maintaining rapport can now continue.
  • 117. COMMUNICATION 105 A great deal of communication challenges could be avoided if we practice checking or testing the meaning of the other person’s message. One of the most powerful skills is backtracking, where we repeat back to the person what they said to check our under- standing. Does it Matter Who Is Responsible? It is a natural human tendency to hold other people responsible for misinterpreting our communication. This can set off a chain of events (invisible at first) that could blow up into a misunderstanding, argu- ment or worse. Some people find the assumption that “the meaning of your communication is the response that you get” very challeng- ing. They may respond by saying, “that is so ridiculous. How can I be held responsible for how someone interprets what I say?” Actually the point of the assumption is not where the responsibil- ity lies, but where the opportunity for adjustment lies. We cannot really do anything about someone’s ability to comprehend what we are saying. What we can do, is adjust how we are saying it. Highly effective communicators take responsibility for the effect their com- munications have and adjust how they say things when they find themselves misunderstood. Team rapport is achieved when everyone is playing the same tune. Achieving and maintaining group rapport can be a challenge as rapport tends to ebb and flow. The secret is being able to main- tain enough rapport for the team to function fully, at all times. Team rapport should not be mistaken for some kind of “group think”. Rather it is based upon a willingness to embrace diversity of thought and a healthy amount of disagreement. General Patton is famous for the expression, “If everyone is thinking alike, then someone isn’t thinking.” Differences are valuable; it is how they are assimilated
  • 118. 106 TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH by the team that is important. Diversity brings with it multiple ways of responding and strong problem solving capabilities which is the main facet of all resilient systems. A team in rapport is much more resilient and productive than one that is not. Team-building exercises are a great way to build team rapport. However, after the train- ing session or team retreat is over, Differences are valuable; resilience is maintained day-to- it is how they are day through good communication assimilated by the team skills. All human behavior can be that is important. modeled. In other words if you can, I can and if I can, you can. This applies to communication skills. They can be developed further with specific skill-building exercises included at the end of this chapter. Most of the time rapport is established unconsciously. We can also do certain things to accelerate the process or deepen its effect. Typically rapport is achieved by the exchange of a number of non- verbal messages. The exchange occurs within the first few seconds of meeting. The initial impression that is formed by people is based almost completely upon these messages. Some people are very effective at creating great first impressions. This is not an acci- dent, although they may have no idea how they do it. On close examination, they send a specific set of non-verbal messages (a smile or a specific tone of voice for example) that helps establish rapport quickly. People Like Us The first step in building rapport is matching the other person. People like people like themselves and the more you make yourself like
  • 119. COMMUNICATION 107 the other person (though tattoos last a long time) the easier it is for them to like you. With that attraction comes some very valuable attention that will ensure they listen to what you are saying. Body language is the most visible way you can match another person. Body posture, movements, and rhythm all fit in here. You don’t have to be Robin Williams to match another person with your body. You do have to get over the idea of it — and using the words “mimic” or “imitate” does not help you here at all. The whole purpose of match- ing the other person is to honor or to meet them where they are and only to a level that you can feel comfortable also. When you watch people closely in public places, such as malls and cafés, you begin to recognize the dance of rapport. Another way of thinking about this is that there is a natural tendency toward entrainment between people. Given the chance we automatically get into “synch” with each other. It happens unconsciously and most frequently between people who like each other already. The matching I refer to here also applies to voice speed, tone and volume. Of these, speed is probably the easiest to match. People generally talk at the speed at which they think. So what does this suggest? If we wish to help the other person comprehend what we are saying, it makes sense to listen carefully to the speed they talk and match that speed. Too fast and they will not pick every- thing up, too slow and their mind will wander which can be just as harmful. I See You The South African greeting “Sowabona” means “I see you”. When someone says “Sowabona” to you the customary reply is “Ngikona” or “I am”. Because you see me, really see me, I am. In other words you are saying “you exist”, “you have value”. Sometimes we have
  • 120. 108 TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH been so long in a system (e.g., a family, church, or school) that it is almost as if we have become invisible. The system has habituated to our presence. At such times it is tempting to treat those around us as if they too were invisible. Few things could be so detrimental to our ability to effect change and live a productive personal or pro- fessional life. Matching another’s body language is a strong subliminal message to the other person that you “see them”. Attention-Getting Behaviors After establishing rapport, the next task is to gain and hold the other person’s attention. You don’t have to be talking all the time to hold their attention. Listening carefully enough so that you hear what they are saying is a great way to guarantee their attention. Good listening is about making your own mind quiet while they talk. If you have not tried this before, give it a go. Make your mind quiet (harder than it sounds — and practice pays off) while the other person speaks. The first thing that tends to happen is that we panic that we will not have anything intelligent to say when it is our turn. There is a natural tendency to want to impress the other person with what we have to say. Personal experience has The wisest person in the taught me that one of the most room is the one who reliable ways to impress the other knows when to listen person is to really hear what they and how to listen. say. You may be the first person who has really listened to them for a long time. Really listening to another person in a group setting can be a challenge. There is so much going on and we may have our own agenda we wish to have addressed. However in such situations
  • 121. COMMUNICATION 109 thoughtful listening is just as important as thoughtful talking. The wisest person in the room is the one who knows when to listen and how to listen. The Benefit of Great Listening A client once complained about having to take people from their work to have them trained in running effective meetings. What he did not dispute was that their meetings had been quite ineffective in dealing with ongoing departmental challenges. We did a rough estimate of how much money was being “invested” in their ongoing meetings. Calculating the total of the hourly rates of the 11 people attending the meeting (and without factoring in lost productivity because people were not at their desks) came to $4,500 per two- hour meeting. Held twice a month, this amounted to over $90,000 as an annual investment. At this point in the calculations we both realized that making their meetings more effective would be a very good investment. We explored the dialogue process with this client. Before long everyone in the team began to talk about things that really mattered to them. They were also doing this in a way that was respectful of other people’s opinions. This process has been championed by William Isaacs in his book Dialogue and the Art of Thinking Together. He and his partner, Juanita Brown, have also used dialogue (and permu- tations of the method) extensively with their corporate clients for all sorts of purposes. Their model of dialogue consists of four elements. 1. Listening 2. Respecting 3. Suspending 4. Voicing
  • 122. 110 TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH 1. Listening This is a simple process that we all think we are so good at. Yet as we listen to another person it is so easy to add inferences to the things people say. When we do this, we also move into a judging mode that may affect what we hear and what we don’t. In this way judgments can act as filters. When we allow this to happen we are not hearing the other person, we are only hearing our inferences about what they said. 2. Respecting Respecting people’s right to voice their opinion is easier in principle than in real practice. The more significant the disagreement between people (international disagreements, for example), the more impor- tant it is that the parties involved can respect each other’s opinions. Isaacs describes the process of respecting as “making room for all the perspectives and voices without trying to get rid of any of it”. If you practiced the perceptual positions exercise in chapter 2 you will have realized that perspective can have a tremendous effect on how people relate to their world. 3. Suspending Suspending is the process of allowing a topic or theme to be sus- pended like a pendulum in the middle of the conversation. Suspending allows doubt to exist around the topic. It also prevents participants from falling into certainty and to access their ignorance more effec- tively. Exploring what we don’t know is not always comfortable, according to Isaacs. Dialogue will be difficult for people “who know what they think and why they think it”. Suspending also helps par- ticipants to broaden their attention to other aspects of the issue being
  • 123. COMMUNICATION 111 discussed. In other words, we are expanding our awareness of other people and how they relate to the important issues. 4. Voicing The fourth and final element of dialogue can be the most challenging. It requires us to speak our truth irrespective of who else is listening. Voicing also involves finding our own voice. It is so easy for us to speak from memory, saying the same old things we have said maybe a thousand times. To speak about something in the moment without knowing exactly what is going to come out, can be a challenge. Doing so can also provide a liberating model for others present. Finding our voice can also enable us to say something that is deeper and truer for everyone present. At this point we are tapping into the collective intelligence in the room, the things that the group wants to speak. GO DEEPER Dialogue: www.anthillsite.com Commitment Versus Compliance Leaders often refer to the challenge of achieving buy-in from their teams. Often this has been caused by the fact that people felt they had insufficient input. Within a top-down organization this can be a major challenge. A manager receives a mandate from above to achieve something. No one had played a part in forming this strat- egy and, therefore, had no sense of ownership as a result. Now the manager has the challenge of selling this idea to the people he leads. It is understandable that some managers apply the same strategy with those who report to them — drop the project on their lap.
  • 124. 112 TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH An organization operating like this will have problems engaging its people in projects and initiatives. All is not lost, however. We can choose to engage our people through dialogue and through the engagement that comes from dialogue. Conversely, if they have had no opportunity to play a part in the creation, they are naturally going to be left wondering why they should support it. People support what they create. — MEG WHEATLEY In the book Presence, Peter Senge states that “engineers know that the best technical solutions often fail to be implemented, or are not successful when they are, because of low trust and failed com- munication.” So improved team communication goes beyond warm fuzzy feelings about team members. There are concrete business reasons why it pays to have people deeply involved in creating solu- tions to team challenges. According to Isaacs, dialogue achieves high levels of collaboration (collaborative intelligence) “by deepening the glue that links people together. This ‘glue’ is the genuine shared meaning and common understanding already present in a group of people. From shared meaning, shared action arises.” This is effective communication in action. At the end of the chapter you will find an outline of the dialogue process that can be used to great effect in a multitude of business environments. In an amazingly compact book, The Thin Book of Naming Elephants, Sue Annis Hammond and Andrea B. Mayfield claim that within a team setting there are three things that are required for team communication to be effective. They are (p. 92): “1. being curious about how every other person sees the world; 2. respecting each person’s perspective of the world as unique and essential to the group’s success; and
  • 125. COMMUNICATION 113 3. making sure every person has a chance to speak and be heard.” These factors rely on each other. Some teams practice some of them and expect great cooperation from everyone. Unfortunately without all three only partial communication (and consequently cooperation) is possible. Teams that “Speak Their Truth” I used the dialogue process with a team of managers within a Canadian health care system recently. One person said, “I love this — I feel I have the chance to say things I have never felt permission to say before.” After that expression, others in the group took the per- mission and said what they also felt. The end result of the session was a group that reached a place they had not been before in terms of closeness and commitment. They had taken the opportunity to share their assumptions and feelings about the team and about the problems they faced. Sharing assumptions is something we have already visited in chapter 1, but doing so within the team setting can improve communication considerably. Meg Wheatley, in A Simpler Way, refers to a group of managers who shifted their definition of “information as power” to “informa- tion as nourishment”. This helped to remind them that information is essential to everyone, and that those who have more of it will be more intelligent workers than those who are starving. The process of dialogue helps that nourishment to reach everyone. David Isaacs and his partner Juanita Brown also evolved the “conversation café” from the dialogue process. Conversation cafés are used to explore topics in a public setting. In their book The World Café — Shaping Our Futures Through Conversations That Mat- ter, Brown and Isaacs share a simple version of the collaborative
  • 126. 114 TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH dialogue process. This can be used in any situation where a group of people wish to address challenging issues. GO DEEPER Conversation Café: www.anthillsite.com That’s a Good Question One of the central themes of all these approaches to enhancing communication effectiveness is the quality of the questions gener- ated. A good coach asks good questions and a great coach asks great questions. Peter Block has written a splendid book on asking good questions. In The Answer to How is Yes, Block contests “We define our dialogue and, in a sense, our future through the questions we choose to address. Asking the wrong question puts us in the philosopher’s dilemma: We become the blind man looking in a dark room for a black cat that is not there.” On the other hand asking the right question can have a miracu- lous effect whether we are trying to help a friend or facilitating a team meeting. A sign that you have asked a good question is the other person saying, “That’s a good question”. They are usually silent for awhile after that because your question has caused them to think new things. Good questions focus our attention and at the same time invite a deeper exploration of the issue. The structure of the ques- tion determines the direction our attention goes. Because of this, it is important that the question is a positive one. Problem-focused questions will help us spend more time with the problem, but not necessarily bring us closer to a solution.
  • 127. COMMUNICATION 115 GO DEEPER Good Questions: www.anthillsite.com In the Encyclopedia of Positive Questions, the authors (Diana Whitney, David Cooperrider, Amanda Trosten-Bloom and Brian S. Kaplin) have provided an entire book devoted to positive questions that can be used in a variety of situations. To help people appreciate the benefits of positive questions they suggest asking the following question (abbreviated version) at the beginning of a team meeting: “Reflecting back on your entire career think about the most mem- orable team experience you have ever had…Tell me…about the time when you were part of a really great team? What made the team a success?” After people have had the opportunity to discuss this ques- tion for ten minutes in pairs, they are asked to report back about the experience. One thing that commonly happens is the energy in the room rises noticeably. When asked to report back about the effect the question had, participants typically report how inspired and deeply connected they felt. The authors of the Encyclopedia use these kind of questions as one of the major interventions in their Appreciative Inquiry (AI) approach to organizational change. WHERE WE’VE BEEN In this chapter we have explored how relatively simple and easy adjustments to our communication style can help us to be more effective in influencing others. The main points of this chapter are: • Influence and manipulation are two sides of the same coin; the only difference is the intent of the communicator and that is our responsibility.
  • 128. 116 TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH • What we assume about communication and other people has a tremendous effect on how successful (or otherwise) our communication can be. • All communication contains the dynamic of information- and-relationship; managing this dynamic is the secret to creating productive and positive results. • There is often a huge difference between what people say and what they mean; getting below the surface is vital to successful communication. • Some information travels at the speed of light, others at the speed of sound; the right non-verbal cues can enhance our communication effectiveness. • Listening is an attention-getting behavior; great listeners are great communicators. • Dialogue is a powerful communication process. • Questions are the most powerful way to connect with others and build rapport; they are also our most potent ally in influencing others. WHERE WE’RE GOING With great communication comes the opportunity to develop great connections with other people, teams, and departments. Connection is the theme of the next chapter. Some of the questions we address in chapter 5 are: How important is connection? How can we achieve deep connection within a team? What part does collaborative intelligence play in flattened organizations?
  • 129. COMMUNICATION 117 CQ Tool 4 Exploring the Conversation Café* One of the ways highly effective communication can be achieved in a team is through deep dialogue. It is common for organizations and teams to discover that although they thought themselves to be good at communication, they were, in fact, only utilizing a small portion of their potential in this area. Conversation Cafés adapt two ancient traditions: the talking-stick circle and deep dialogue. The talking stick ensures that only one person talks at a time and deep dia- logue provides the opportunity for participants to speak to their own truth in meaningful ways. Dialogue also creates an environment that enables those involved to think together about a topic. Prior to running the conversation café process, it is important to have an orienting question that people speak to as a catalyst for the conversation. An example for a team involved in pro- viding customer service might be “What would it take for us to be able to surprise and delight our customers?” * Special thanks to those at conversation café for their kind per- mission to use this guideline for the conversation café process <www.conversationcafe.org>.
  • 130. 118 TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH Note: At least 50 minutes should be allowed for the process. It helps to have someone to volunteer as facilitator to keep a gentle eye on the process. Also it is useful to have someone acting as a recorder for the conversation, keeping track of the themes that emerge. Both of these roles should not prevent the volunteers from participating fully in the conversation. STEP 1: The facilitator begins the session by reading out the six Agreements — six principles common to most dialogue and conversation cafés. • Suspend judgment as best you can. • Respect one another. • Seek to understand rather than persuade. • Invite and honor diversity of opinion. • Speak what has personal heart and meaning. • Go for honesty and depth without going on and on. STEP 2: A simple process: A “talking stick” (any object that has been designated for the task) is passed around the group in a clockwise or counter-clockwise fashion. Only the person holding the talking stick may talk. Once they have finished they hand it to the person next to them. Two rounds of speaking with- out interruption introduce a quality of listening and reflecting that opens people to themselves and one another. People can pass if they like. They can be silent as their way of speaking. Then a lively conversation happens, keeping in mind the agree- ments to inquire rather than assert and debate. At the end, a final “talking stick” round anchors for each participant the gems they are taking away.
  • 131. COMMUNICATION 119 STEP 3: At the end of the session participants are asked to reflect on the process they have just experienced and share their thoughts. They are also asked to comment upon anything that emerged in the conversation which surprised them.
  • 133. 5 Connection Relationships are the essence of the living world. GREGORY BATESON Whether it is two cells sharing information or two nations negotiating international trade, connection is an essential factor in how things play out. Communication is impossible without connection and in many respects it is the core issue of this book. Connection makes communication possible; communication makes collaboration pos- sible which further enhances the state of connection. Connection is a fundamental principle of all living systems and this includes all those that make up human society (teams, organizations, etc.). In this chapter we explore how important connection is in building resilient teams and at the same time further enhancing our own Collaborative Intelligence (CQ). We will also look at the part CQ will play in the increasingly flattened structures of modern
  • 134. 122 TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH companies and the resilient teams that are required to make the whole thing work. Daniel Goleman’s work around the concept of Emotional Intel- ligence (EQ) was a major step forward in the thinking of how we operate as human beings. EQ is especially important because of the extent to which it was accepted by the business community. The concept of EQ has already made its way through early-adopters and into the mainstream. It is time for another set of skills to be introduced — based upon the ability to collaborate. GO DEEPER Emotional Intelligence: www.anthillsite.com Celebrating Interdependence Day Our universe is built on relationships. Relationships outnumber people and create the matrix (social, physical, and psychological) in which we live. Quantum mechanics shows us quite clearly that everything is connected to everything else. Physicists assure us that at the quantum level everything is energy and relationships. Connection is an important aspect of our world. Connections between nations, organizations, groups, team members, individuals, parts of individuals, even the chemicals that make up the human body are arranged in complex systems of interdependent relationships. The level of interdependence is deep and pervasive, yet people, teams, and organizations so often believe they can act with total independence. Biologist Lynn Margulis comments that, “independence is a polit- ical concept, not a biological concept. Everywhere life displays itself as complex, tangled, messy webs of relationships.” In natural systems disconnection and isolation usually represent dysfunction. The simplest definition of cancer is abnormal or uncontrolled cell
  • 135. CONNECTION 123 division where some part of the body ignores the shared interests of the rest of the body. The isolation has become a manifestation and the cause of dysfunction. Maybe some day we will evolve to the extent that there will be a holiday to celebrate interdependence rather than independence. The holiday could be a public acknowledgment (and celebration) of how interdependent we really are. Life did not take over the globe by combat, but by networking. FRITJOF CAPRA We live in a world that is not only changing but the rate of change is accelerating. A tsunami of change is creating a world that places tremendous pressure on our individual ability to adapt. Resilience was earlier defined as the ability to bounce back and recover in harsh or challenging conditions. Certainly, we are all going to have to become more resilient to handle what is ahead of us. A healthy level of connection is an important factor in developing resilience. This is just as true for teams as it is for the organizations they serve. This makes CQ a vital area of concern for individuals and teams that wish to develop deeper, more reliable levels of connection within their organizations. GO DEEPER Resilience: www.anthillsite.com CQ, Community and Organizations We cannot talk about developing CQ within teams and organizations and ignore the importance of building community. Building a sense
  • 136. 124 TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH of community automatically expands the CQ of a group or team. Developing meaningful participation develops community. Chapter 7 will explore the theme of meaningful participation in greater detail. With the development of community within teams and organizations the CQ grows proportionally. There are important lessons we need to learn about the devel- opment of community at all levels of society. At the micro level one of the issues that has become apparent and pressing is the shortage of skilled people and the challenge of retaining staff. An increasing number of business leaders are recognizing that one of the most cost effective ways of addressing these challenges is through the devel- opment of community within the workplace. No matter what the motivation, this is still a reassuring trend. From a business manage- ment perspective, people are less inclined to leave a community than they are an organization. A community is also a healthier place to work — the sense of support is beneficial to everyone’s mental health especially when things get challenging. A healthy corporate community is much more resilient than one that lacks the community factor. So far, this could be viewed as a cynical use of community — to simply address a business challenge. However, once community does begin to develop within The more connected we businesses and teams it become, the more we realize tends to transform the way in we are all part of a system which business is conducted. that supports us. The more connected people become, the more they real- ize the degree to which we are all part of systems that support each other. The skills explored in chapters 1 through 4 enable the further development of CQ and this, in turn, increases the community building capacity of each individual.
  • 137. CONNECTION 125 Kazimierz Gozdz, in his book Community Building, explores the connection between the creation of learning organizations and community building. According to Gozdz we can use a series of questions to ascertain the level of community active within an organization. Here are some he uses. • Is the organization moving toward greater inclusivity of information, people, and ideas? • Is the organization sharing power effectively, becoming more consensual and democratic? • At the organizational level, is the community becoming more capable of contemplative learning? • Is the organization a safe place, a practice field, for exploring each person’s full potential? • Can the group fight gracefully? • Is the group moving toward or away from becoming a group of all leaders? • Is there a spirit of interconnectedness present? What would the answers be to these questions for your team, department, and organization? Assuming that not all of your answers are what you would like them to be, how can we change this? Technology provides some of the answers. George Por, Founder and Chairman, CommunityIntelligence Ltd., states that technology can and should support the four functions that our biological systems provide. These are the following: • communication; • coordination; • memory/knowledge management; and • learning.
  • 138. 126 TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH By helping us to develop these functions beyond our own bio- logical capacities, technology is helping us to develop the CQ of organizations. This will enable us to manage the social and knowl- edge capital more effectively — assets so rarely considered in the business world. In other words, technology will play an important part in developing the CQ of groups and organizations. In relation to the connection between technology, community, and resilience, Por states, “Resilience after all is determined by the ability of the group to sense what is going on in the environment (business and otherwise) and to be able to share ideas with itself about how best to respond to the information that is coming in.” Collaboration software must service the four enabling functions in order that com- plex business groups can further develop and support “community”. Literally thousands of highly effective virtual communities exist on the Internet already — a quick visit to Google will attest to that. GO DEEPER Social Software: www.anthillsite.com Collaborating and Resiling Al Siebert in The Resilience Advantage makes a wonderful obser- vation about resilience. He says that rather than thinking of resilience as something someone has (like a smile or a cough), we should think of it as something someone does. For this he coined the term “resile” — a verb to describe when a person, or any system for that matter, expresses its ability to respond in a resilient fashion. Resiling is a verb or a “doing” word while resilience indicates something we have — a characteristic or quality. So it is with CQ, a group or team actively collaborates.
  • 139. CONNECTION 127 Watching CQ in Action Think of a flock of starlings. In your mind’s eye watch them swirl in the sky, thousands of individual birds creating an aerial dance that demands the coordination of millions of wing beats. On the surface their synchronization appears to be created by each bird’s ability to respond to the movements of its neighbors. However, high speed film demonstrates a fascinating fact. These birds do not actually have the ability to physically respond to the flock. Their nervous sys- tems are physically unable to respond in the timeframes that make the dance of the flock possible. This phenomenon is observed in a wide range of groups, schools of fish, swarms of insects, and even large herds of animals. At a distance watching this group behavior, it would appear that there is some sort of mass mind in effect. In fact this is actually what some research scientists contend is at work. Biologist Rupert Sheldrake has put forward the theory of morphogenic fields to explain the mass mind or swarm intelligence that the creatures appear to be accessing. Sheldrake goes on to claim that by tapping into the mor- phogenic field the birds know which way the flock is going to turn. Morphogenic fields are created, according to Sheldrake, as a field of collective intelligence surrounding groups of living creatures. Sheldrake is not alone in his search to make sense of this field effect. Other field theorists include Ervin Laszlo who puts forward the concept of an “Akashic Field”. This is a much more compre- hensive theory, attempting to explain the basic structure of the universe. The fundamental idea is roughly the same, however — a field of information into which all living creatures can tap, given the correct circumstances. A slightly different example, and no less amazing, is the way cer- tain insects build their homes. The termite, for example, builds the largest structures on earth (compared to the size of the builders).
  • 140. 128 TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH They create intricate architectural wonders (complete with built-in air conditioning) as a group and yet there are no “termite architects” nor “termite engineers”. The knowledge of how to construct these intricate structures resides within the entire population. Only as a group do they have this capability; it does not exist in the individ- uals. This is an example of emergence — the appearance of group behaviors that were not evident within the individuals making up that group. Ants are another great example of individual creatures that man- age to build and maintain complex colonies without the aid of any specialists or even formal leaders. In most species of ant, when there is something that needs to be done to serve the anthill, available ants switch tasks and simply get on with it. The abilities they have together do not exist in individual ants, another example of emergent properties. It could also be perceived as evidence that the group is forming some sort of morphogenic field into which each individual can then tap for guidance in relation to building the nest. Remarkable examples of this kind of behavior are cited in A Simpler Way (Margaret J Wheatley and Myron Kellner-Rogers) and in Emergence (Steven Johnson). These books also represent fasci- nating explorations of how the group behaviors of insects provide useful insights and implications for human group behavior. CQ and Fields The reason we have ventured into field theories is that CQ could be considered to be a field of information that exists within groups. Developing CQ could be an important step forward for human beings and have significant implications for how we operate in groups, teams, and organizations. Individually ants are pretty stupid crea- tures, but collectively they are very smart. Human beings on the other hand are individually very smart and collectively, well? The question
  • 141. CONNECTION 129 running through this entire book is, “What will life be like when we are able to emulate the ant by tapping into the fields of intelligence that already surrounds us?” As CQ rises so does our ability to access collective intel- ligence or tap into the fields Sheldrake and Developing CQ Laszlo are talking about. is an important When we are able to tap deeply into step forward for our CQ, the question will no longer be, human beings. “What can we do?” when faced with global and personal challenges. Instead the ques- tion will be, “What can’t we do?” Developing our ability to merge our intelligences and then tap into that massive resource for the benefit of the group as a whole could literally transform how we live our lives and operate within teams and organizations. Systemically Speaking The systems approach is one of the five disciplines that Peter Senge champions for sustainable organizational change. “Systems think- ing”, as he puts it in his book, had been around for some time before Senge so aptly identified it as a way for business and society to create and respond to change. Based upon systems philosophy it promotes an understanding of the whole by examining the link and interactions between the elements that comprise the whole system. Systems thinking has given us a way of looking at how relationships are the building blocks of everything, including any group of people, whether it is a family or a multinational corporation. This approach enables us to predict more reliably the possible implications of making changes to parts of the system. More specifically systems thinking permits us to better under- stand emergent properties. For example think of your car. All the thousands of pieces have their own properties and capabilities. None
  • 142. 130 TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH of them on their own are able take you down the highway. Yet when they are assembled together the emergent property is the ability to take you where you want to go. Another example is a whirlpool. It would be impossible to predict the emergence of this formation from the chemical or physical properties of water. The emergent property of a whirlpool comes into evidence when a very large num- ber of water molecules come together in a specific arrangement. But what does an emergent property look like within human systems? When a group of people are brought together to work as a team emergent properties appear. Individually the members have certain capabilities and characteristics. However, as every team leader knows, once you have several people working upon a single task a number of things happen. One of the most noticeable phenomenon is how important group dynamics become. How all these people relate to each other effects how productive they are. As far as emer- gent properties are concerned the team working together is able to solve problems that none of the individual members could. Closer to home, and to the theme of this book, emergent prop- erties become important when we consider developing CQ within teams and organizations. High performance can be considered an emergent property of a group of people working together in a cer- tain way. For most organizations the $64,000 question is, “What are the conditions in which a team becomes high-performing?” One of the secret ingredients is to enable the individuals making up the team to tap into the field that is created by the team. As they do this the CQ of the group automatically increases. A refinement of the question could then be, “What can we do to enable teams to more effectively trigger the CQ of which they are capable?” GO DEEPER Emergent Systems: www.anthillsite.com
  • 143. CONNECTION 131 The Power of the Collective Relationship The process of tapping into the collective mind has already been approached by a number of writers and researchers. In his book Presence, Otto Scharmer refers to a new type of collective relation- ship — one in which the individual is further enhanced rather than diminished. In Scharmer’s words, the individual actually “connects …to one’s highest future potential.” A concern of many people when they first encounter ideas about collective intelligence or the collec- tive mind is that they have to sacrifice their individuality and freedom of choice. Scharmer and the colleagues with whom he wrote Presence have tested this concept with a wide variety of groups and organi- zations. Their evidence points to the emergence of a collective mind (Sharmer’s term for CQ) in which individuality is strengthened and enhanced rather than suppressed. The synchronicity of firefighting, police, and emergency response teams cited earlier are good examples. Individual members of such teams refer to how they felt part of a single mind focused upon a single objective; invariably the experience is remembered as an extremely self-enriching and positive one. Village Idiot and Collective Genius Howard Bloom gives us a wonderful example of the power of CQ among our closest relatives in nature. In his book, Global Brain, Bloom compares the behaviors of chimpanzees and baboons. Chim- panzees are more intelligent than baboons; they even make their own tools. This latter fact further highlights the development of their individual intelligence. Comparatively the baboon is the village idiot when left to operate in isolation from the pack. On the other hand, collectively baboons have achieved status as “the most widely distributed non-human primate” in Africa. In fact
  • 144. 132 TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH they have been described as the “rats of Africa”, flourishing in an environment where their smarter chimp-cousins are rapidly disap- pearing. So what are the factors contributing to the baboon’s success? One of the most striking differences between chimps and baboons is that although the chimps have more advanced brain capacity, baboons have much better developed social networks. While chimps live in groups of approximately 40, baboons congregate in troops of three to six times that size. One of the additional advantages of larger groups is that the pack provides greater protection from attack to individual members. In larger groups there is also a much more expansive social database of knowledge and, I would suggest, greater CQ at work. Collaboratively baboons are geniuses when compared to the individually smarter chimp. Because of their larger network they can gather greater quantities of information about their envi- Collaboratively baboons ronment and adapt to changes are geniuses when com- more rapidly. Their capacity to pared to the individually summon the CQ within their smarter chimp. troop has then very distinct (and life saving) advantages. What baboons are achieving shouldn’t really be a surprise. Our own ancestors discovered the strength-in-numbers principle very early. Picture the moment in time when our cave-dwelling ancestors figured out that taking down a hairy mammoth was going to require a large group of fairly well coordinated individuals. Even the African expression “it takes a
  • 145. CONNECTION 133 whole village to raise a child” reminds us that people have relied upon networks to care for the precious things in life. In our modern society the importance of connection is being forgotten or lost in many places. When that occurs there is a disconnection from the collaborative intelligence that has served us so well throughout the evolution of our species. In Bowling Alone, Robert Putnam catalogs a steep drop in the levels of participation with others, as displayed by Americans. The examples of civic disengagement are disturbing — neglected chil- dren, faltering education, spreading mistrust, ill health, income and wealth inequality, religious insularity, and disrespect for the law. This change also displays a shift in our collective values. A shift that may actually be the source of a great many of our social problems. With disconnection comes dysfunction it seems. This is just as true of organizations and the teams within them. On the bright side, more and more organizations are recog- nizing the advantages of developing community. Whether it is within municipalities and cities, or corporate endeavors, there is a grow- ing awareness that if we are to solve problems collectively created, the solutions will be created collectively too. Additionally, the severe challenges our species face right now, are forcing people to think about systemic solutions rather than resorting to silver bullet responses. GO DEEPER Community Building: www.anthillsite.com Top Down — Bottoms Up Top-down hierarchical corporate structures are proving to be inad- equate in the rapidly shifting business and world conditions. And the
  • 146. 134 TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH challenge of change is only increasing. Looking back, that highly effective troop of baboons could be considered as a single, adaptive learning system. Our definition of “adaptive learning system” is any entity that learns from its environment and adapts appropriately to the challenges presented. Christopher Meyer and Stan Davis, in It’s Alive, have made an extensive study of the adaptive learning process and isolated the important elements. Applying these to the business world, they claim organizations must develop the following six basic features. 1. Self-Organize. Rather than top-down management, bottom- up processing should be allowed to govern how the business responds to its environment. This means that general principles should be allowed to affect how individuals solve problems instead of mandating specific responses. 2. Recombine. This refers to the cross-fertilization of ideas and solutions. The team should take full advantage of the diversity within the organization and recombine ideas and responses from throughout the entire system. 3. Sense and Respond. Enable the system to recognize significant changes and respond appropriately without having to refer to many layers of higher authority. According to this principle all parts of the organization act as a sense organ for change and responses do not have to be centrally coordinated. 4. Learn and Adapt. Continually learning from the environment and amassing a social database of successful adaptations will enhance the team. Adaptation is considered to be a continual process. 5. Seed, Select, and Amplify. Many options are tested and winning responses and adaptations are reinforced and amplified. 6. Destabilize. Elements of the random must be continually introduced to enable the system to be sustained in an alive and
  • 147. CONNECTION 135 adaptive state. Within this principle challenge is considered a welcome opportunity for re-invention. Bottom-Up Businesses An important distinction we must become aware of here is the dif- ference between top-down and bottom-up processing. Top-down processing represents hierarchy and command and controls the infor- mation flow. Bottom-up processing, on the other hand, represents information flowing up from the grass roots of an organization. All of these features can be detected in a typical ant colony. This may explain why anthills are some of the most resilient communities within the natural world. Entomologists describe ant colonies as a system that lacks visible hierarchies of command, in other words they function in a bottom-up fashion. (See Figure 5.1 for a geometric explanation of the two processes.) Figure 5.1 Bottom Up/Top Down Center of gravity The question that should be asked is how can we use bottom-up processing more effectively within human organizations? There are lots of examples of the systematic use of this type of processing, such
  • 148. 136 TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH as the rating system used by Ebay. In the Ebay system members con- tribute to each others’ reputation by rating the kind of interaction they had while conducting trade. The telephone/text message voting system established for television shows such as American Idol is another, granted less sophisticated, example of bottom-up processing. The point is that as the speed of change continues to accelerate, we must be able to learn and adapt more quickly. Bottom-up processing is one of the most prevalent ways natural systems respond to the challenge of change. The result of increasing the level of bottom-up processing will enable companies to achieve their business objec- tives with fewer levels of authority. Each individual is guided by a few basic principles that enable them to serve the greater good, in the best way possible at that particular point in time. Meyer and Davis, in their book It’s Alive, referred to leadership models used by Marines. In the book, they quote Colonel Van Riper, “We are very good at instilling certain behaviors in our Marines,” Van Riper states. “They understand our intent, and intent is like an algorithm in a computer or DNA in a biological system…Now we must instill more tactical principles, so that instead of detailed prescriptive orders, everyone on the battlefield would inherently understand what to do. Building from the bottom up, we could have a much more powerful organization.” Here is a great example of bottom-up processing within a human organization. Van Riper goes on to describe his leadership style as one that is “in command and out of control”. This highly respected commander was essentially achieving his objectives by using the bottom-up intelligence of his troops. For most organizations a combination of top-down (via guid- ing principles) and bottom-up processes, enhanced by CQ, will be the best compromise (see Figure 5.1). The balance will depend on the organization and the circumstances. The two forces can be adjusted to provide the optimal mixture of direction or guidance and the ability to respond to environmental changes.
  • 149. CONNECTION 137 GO DEEPER Bottom-up and Top-down Processes: www.anthillsite.com Wise Teams So what are the signs we could indentify that would tell us there was sufficient CQ within our team? In their book, The Wisdom of Teams, Katzenbach and Smith analyzed the reasons behind troubled teams and found they had certain common features. I have included some of my own conclusions after each point. • A weak sense of direction: a sign that the top-down/ bottom-up dynamic was not very well balanced. • Insufficient or unequal commitment to team performance: evidence that the CQ of the team was not high enough to create effective collaboration. • Critical skill gaps: this probably boils down to insufficient or ineffective training. • External confusion, hostility, or indifference: potentially a symptom of insufficient CQ within the organization. It could also be caused by poorly formulated or communicated (or both) team/organizational objectives. There appears to be a trend pointing toward a lack of CQ. On the flip side of the coin, within high performing teams, Katzenbach and Smith discovered an emphasis on shared leadership roles. In contrast to clearly focused leadership roles, individual and mutual accountability was observed as much more important. This is a clear indication that CQ is an increasingly important factor in team performance.
  • 150. 138 TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH If we raised our expectations then it wouldn’t take a crisis for us to experience the satisfaction of working together. MEG WHEATLEY We Don’t Need Another Hero More and more organizations are realizing that what is not required is more heroes to save the day as far as their business performance is concerned. A hero concentrates the capacity for action around themselves and also tends to disempower everyone else (after all why would they have to do anything if someone was going to save them). The DNA that Van Riper referred to negates the need for indi- vidual heroes. Rather everyone inherently knows what to do and that it is up to everyone to save the day. In Guts, the Freiburgs refer to a similar kind of guiding principle as the “heroic cause”. They pro- vide examples of heroic causes that have acted as the DNA, guiding the overall direction of employees’ attention. Here are some from their book (p. 211). • Southwest Airlines: We are in the business of freedom. • Apple Computer: We want to educate the world. • Fannie Mae: We help people achieve the American dream. • Medtronic: We relieve pain, restore health, and give people longer lives. • Schwab: We are the guardians of our customers’ financial dreams. Of course these statements are similar to vision statements but I’m sure you would agree that heroic cause has a much sexier ring to it. These grand callings elevate the significance of what people are achieving who work within the organization. We will visit this
  • 151. CONNECTION 139 approach again in chapter 7 as a part of the exploration of meaning- ful participation — one of the most important emergent properties of teams with high CQ. CoCreation Versus CoReaction The choice of a heroic cause helps teams and organizations to co-create their reality by deciding what they want to have. The oppo- site of this is co-reacting, which is uncoordinated and ineffective group reaction to unfavorable or unwelcome elements of the envi- ronment. In true adaptive learn- ing systems fashion, unexpected challenges should be opportunities In true adaptive for teams to discover more about learning systems themselves and the wide range unexpected challenges of possible responses they have are opportunities for open to them. Teams with low CQ teams to discover more tend to see these as instances of about themselves. inflexible and predictable pat- terns of problem solving behavior. Remember if we always do what we have always done, we will always get what we have always got, and that might not be what we want. The process of co-creation says that one of the best ways a group (especially business teams) can design their response to rapidly changing environments can be achieved by enhancing the quality of conversations. (This topic has been explored in chapter 4 — communication). All change, even very large and powerful change, begins when a few people start talking with one another about something they care about. MEG WHEATLY
  • 152. 140 TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH Raising Arizona and Our CQ Obliviously CQ is something we should be developing proactively in our places of work, rather than searching for when things have gotten out of hand. We have talked a lot about the importance of it in this book, and the question emerges again; “How do we raise the CQ of teams?” There are a number of approaches that can raise the CQ of teams. Three of the most robust approaches are the following: 1. Appreciative Inquiry; 2. Strength-Based Approach; and 3. Solution-Focused Thinking. Looking at all three models we can see common threads in the principles behind each of them. They all take a positive approach toward people. They also all focus on creating something rather than getting rid of something. Let us look at each individually. 1. Appreciative Inquiry As we’ve touched on before, AI was originated by David Cooperrider of Case Western Reserve University. It is rapidly becoming one of the most widely accepted models for evaluating and planning orga- nizational change. Appreciative Inquiry utilizes a four-stage process focusing on the points below: 1. Discover: The identification of organizational processes that work well; 2. Dream: The envisioning of processes that would work well in the future; 3. Design: Planning and prioritizing processes that would work well; and
  • 153. CONNECTION 141 4. Deliver (or Create): The implementation (execution) of the proposed design. The simple act of looking for things to appreciate within systems is one of the key elements of this model. The appreciative filter is applied to all levels of the organization, right down to the indi- viduals that make it up. Rather than being told there is something wrong with you or your team, the approach seeks out what you and your team are good at and focuses on building upon that. The AI approach relies heavily on the generation of questions that are designed to enable people to find things they are proud of and feel good about. GO DEEPER Appreciative Inquiry: www.anthillsite.com 2. Strength Upon Strengths The second of the approaches we are going to examine is the strength-based approach. This has much in common with Appre- ciative Inquiry. As early as the 1950s the social work profession recognized the importance of identifying strengths in people. Building on people’s strengths rather than focusing on their weaknesses achieves essentially the same thing as AI. The strength-based approach has been more recently championed by Marcus Bucking- ham in his book Now Discover Your Strengths. Buckingham’s work in this area has been informed by the 17 years he spent with the Gallop Research Organization. According to Buckingham we achieve several things simultaneously when we build on people’s strengths. We help the person build upon something they already have com- petence in, where their confidence is greatest. By focusing on these
  • 154. 142 TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH areas we are also building positive relationships within the organi- zation which builds healthy levels of CQ. 3. Focusing on Solutions The third approach is the solution-focused approach. This approach is about deciding what we want to have, rather than using our (finite) resources to try to get rid of what we do not want. The concept of creative tension that was referred to in chapter 3 is a central tenet of this approach. The first step in this process is deciding what we do want (rather than what we don’t want) and focusing our energy upon that. According to Robert Fritz what we do want is the goal. This must be then compared with the present set of circumstances, referred to as the current reality. Some people mistake this approach for some sort of rose-tinted perspective toward problem solving. On the contrary if we do not acknowledge the brutal facts of the situation, we cannot establish creative tension. Without creative tension there will be no movement from what is to what is desired. As you can see there are strong similarities between all three approaches. The application of any or all of these will go a long way in raising the CQ within organizations and teams. GO DEEPER Solution Focused Thinking: www.anthillsite.com Technology, Connection and CQ Developments in technology have extended our ability to connect systems and create networks. The impact of the invention of the Internet has been comparable to that of the Gutenberg printing press. Both enabled a large number of people to affordably access
  • 155. CONNECTION 143 vast amounts of information. What the Internet also provided was the ability to connect people with people rather than just people with information. The immense amount of fiber optic cable installed was a side-effect of the dot.com bubble and is one of the technological developments that have had significant social impacts. As a result of the physical networks set down, a huge matrix of virtual human networks have emerged. The bubble did indeed burst, however, and in its wake it left a huge physical network that has transformed the way we connect with each other and how we do business. It seems increasingly obvious that technology, like IQ and EQ, is necessary but not sufficient for any organization to be able to adapt to the changes occurring in the business world. In the past many experts have claimed technology as a panacea for all our problems. This is not always the case. In conjunction with collabora- tive software, technology can help us further develop our CQ. Think about a spider’s web for a few moments — a matrix of finely woven threads that are collectively (or collaboratively if you wish to view a spider’s web as a metaphor) able to withstand tremendous pres- sures. Building teams that emulate this type of strength is what this book is about and technology has its part to play. One of the most important ways humans express their CQ is through conversation — this has been true for literally thousands of years and has not changed substantially. With the Internet at their disposal millions of people are connecting (via chat rooms, forums or messenger services) with other people they have never physically met. With a population of one billion, the Internet has, in just ten years, become the “eighth continent”. It represents the most pervasive form of technology in our society and is transforming the way we live our lives and how business is conducted. There should be no surprise then that it is considered to be a fundamental tool for developing the CQ of planet earth (as well as the businesses and teams that live here). George Por in his article entitled “Quest” states that, “Organi- zations that will succeed in these times of accelerating changes will
  • 156. 144 TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH be social organisms with a collective intelligence to guide them through turbulence and transformations.” CQ and technology will enable groups to tap into their Collective Intelligence more effec- tively. Por goes on to claim that in respect to social capital, “Maximiz- With a population of ing the organization’s human and over one billion, the intellectual capital is the key to Internet has, in just success in the new, knowledge- ten years, become the based economy.” In other words, “eighth continent”. the organization (or team) that can communicate and collaborate most effectively with itself and its envi- ronment will be the one that will thrive in these times of rapid change. In society and business “adapt and respond” will be the mantra for years to come. The impact that technology is having on CQ can be glimpsed by simply googling “collaboration + software” — over 100 million results appear. In the last few years there has been an explosion in the applications of technology in this area. WHERE WE’VE BEEN In this chapter we have explored the very heart of CQ — connection. The main points of this chapter are: • Interdependence is a much more potent force than independence. • CQ could be considered to be an emergent property of groups of people. • Field theories may hold the clue to why none of us is as smart as all of us. • Isolation tends to be dysfunctional while connection promotes healthy systems.
  • 157. CONNECTION 145 • Top-down and bottom-up processing are important forces and finding the optimal balance promotes high levels of CQ. • There are positive alternatives to the old hierarchical methods for managing organizations. • Technology is a strong ally in developing networks of connection and strengthening CQ. WHERE WE’RE GOING Building connection within teams, virtual and otherwise, may require assistance from technology; however everyone knows that it is only part of the story. Building connection through relationships is fundamentally about people discov- ering values that they share and the desire to do something to support those values. In the complex societies in which we operate, finding ways to honor our values and those of others often requires creativity. Finding ways to establish and develop collaboration also demands that we practice high levels of flexibility. Creativity and flexibility are the themes of chapter 6.
  • 158. 146 TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH CQ Tool 5 Building Connection Through Appreciation Appreciation is a powerful force within interpersonal rela- tionships, teams and organizations. Any exercise that makes people more aware of its significance will have a positive effect. For example, when providing feedback to either an individual or a team that you are supervising, building appre- ciation into the feedback can achieve two specific things. First, it gives you an opportunity to attract attention to things that you appreciate about their performance. Second, you can con- nect this appreciation with a call for making specific changes to the performance. One of the best ways to achieve this is by using the “feed- back sandwich”. The feedback sandwich places an appreciative statement about performance before and after a question related to improving or changing performance. Here is an example: “John I really appreciated the way in which the summary of the report you submitted captured the spirit of our program. And I wonder what you could do next time to ensure the report is submitted on time? And also I noticed that you put a lot of care into the physical presentation of the report.” Notice in the statement that two appreciative statements sandwich a question focused on improvement. They are joined by the word “and” rather than “but”. “But” tends to have a neg- ative effect upon the listener as it distracts them from the
  • 159. CONNECTION 147 element of appreciation and causes them to anticipate a neg- ative or critical comment. The question in the middle clearly indicates that an answer is required, and that responsibility for action lies with the person receiving the feedback. By answering the question they are more likely to take responsi- bility for making the changes necessary. STEP 1: In groups of three participants, take turns being the person providing the feedback (A), the person receiving the feedback (B) and the person observing the process (C). STEP 2: The person providing some feedback, A, chooses a context (e.g., someone is consistently late for work) and pro- vides some feedback to that effect (e.g., “John you are always late for work”). B notes what effect this has. STEP 3: A now creates a sandwich of a question directed at creating a change in their behavior, sandwiched by two appre- ciative statements, connected by the word “and”. B notes the effect this form of feedback has and compares the two. C ensures A used the correct structure of the sandwich in the second example and coaches A if adjustments are required. STEP 4: The group rotates through the three roles until each person has experienced each role. STEP 5: As a group spend 5 to 10 minutes discussing the advantages of the sandwich structure and places where it would be particularly useful.
  • 161. 6 Creativity & Flexibility Men are born soft and supple; dead, they are stiff and hard. Plants are born tender and pliant; dead, they are brittle and dry. Thus whoever is stiff and inflexible is a disciple of death. Whoever is soft and yielding is a disciple of life. The hard and stiff will be broken. The soft and supple will prevail. LAO-TZU Although on the surface our everyday world appears reasonably stable, extensive scientific research has uncovered a physical uni- verse that is in continual flux, requiring constant adaptation. To have successfully emerged in such a universe, life has to be adaptive. The process of adapting and responding to change requires a genera- tion of new creative solutions and this demands creativity. In this particular game, the price of failure is extinction.
  • 162. 150 TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH Of the many myths that exist around creativity, one of the most prevalent must be that some people are creative and some are not. Truth be told, the very fact that we are living systems, ensures we are creative. The story of bacteria demonstrates clearly that cre- ativity is a principle of nature rather than a recent discovery of Homo sapiens. Biologist Lynn Margulis describes changes that occurred on our planet approximately two billion years ago (Capra, The Web of Life, p. 241): “In one of the greatest coups of all time, the (blue-green) bac- teria invented a metabolic system that required the very substance that had been a deadly poison…The breathing of oxygen is an ingeniously efficient way of channeling and exploiting the reactivity of oxygen. It is essentially controlled combustion that breaks down organic molecules and yields carbon dioxide, water, and a great deal of energy in the bargain…The microcosm did more than adapt: it evolved an oxygen-using dynamo that changed life and its terrestrial dwelling place forever.” By being creative, life transformed a poison into an important ingredient for its own success. This highlights one of the most amaz- ing facets of true creativity — the ability to turn a liability into an asset. This is also a wonderful example of collaborative intelli- gence — solving a problem by tapping into the combined processing capacity of the whole colony. Turning liabilities into assets is a useful skill when it comes to dealing with human systems. An example of this could be a team handling large amounts of diversity (cultural, ethnic, etc.). In this instance the diversity could be considered a liability that must be overcome (e.g., developing a management style that works for every- one). When the diversity that exists within the team is turned into the capacity for the cross-fertilization of ideas, the problem-solving capacity of the team is expanded considerably. Diversity has been transformed from a liability to an asset.
  • 163. CREATIVITY & FLEXIBILITY 151 CQ plays an integral part in this process of transforming lia- bilities into assets. If the members of that team were unable to collaborate deeply then possibly the liability would have remained. Intelligent Bacteria Eshel Ben-Jacob and James Shapiro, world-reknown scientists in the study of bacteria, have demonstrated that E. coli can learn how to switch from its preferred food source (lactose) to aspirin. This is a feat similar in kind that would be required for us to switch to the digestion of tinfoil. What enables this organism to display such amazing adaptability? Each of the trillions of E. coli in the colony are acting as individual problem solvers, with one very specific con- dition: they are all communicating intensely with each other. With trillions of separate information processors working (in parallel fashion) on the problem and immediately communicating the results they are getting, they collaboratively pull off the seemingly impos- sible. Although the IQ and EQ of an individual E. coli cell may be extremely low, the CQ of the colony enables it to do things that we humans would find very difficult, if not impossible. CQ & Learning I am curious what will be possible when humans have developed the CQ of our colony to the extent achieved by simple bacterium. Our level of creativity will have sky rocketed, as Ken Blanchard has pointed out, “None of us is as smart as all of us”. How smart all of us can be is determined by our ability to collaborate at deeper levels than most of us do right now. Peter Senge’s concept of “learning organizations” touches upon this idea of collaborative intelligence although he does not use this
  • 164. 152 TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH term. Senge defines a learning organization as, “An organization that is continually expanding its capacity to create its future”. Notice that survival is not mentioned. Learning (and the creativity that comes with it) is considered to be something that should be proactive and generative rather than reactive, based solely upon Learning is not about having hindsight, or focused on access to information. surviving. There is also an Learning is about what we obvious link between learn- do with the information. ing and creativity. Learning is not about having access to information. Learning is about what we do with the information. The scene has been set for the transition from the information age to the age of creativity. The Age of Creativity John Kao, author of Jamming, states that we are already in the age of creativity because we are in the age of knowledge and creativity brings value to knowledge. According to Kao we are also in the age of creativity because the speed of change demands that we are able to reinvent ourselves (this is just as true for teams and organiza- tions) and that requires creativity. Kao goes on to point out that the new role of management is that of emancipator of creativity, rather than controlling it. Many companies have already recognized the tremendous value in creativity. This can be seen every time a large multinational buys up one of its smaller but more creative competitors. In this case the larger company is not so interested in the physical equity but rather the creative equity. It would make more business sense, in most cases, for organizations to encourage and nurture creativity within themselves, than buying it from outside.
  • 165. CREATIVITY & FLEXIBILITY 153 Teams that exercise high levels of creativity are more resilient and learn faster and more effectively. So developing creative capacity within teams achieves many things at once. No Two Alike The natural world is so creative and so committed to the creative process that it doesn’t like creating two of anything that are identi- cal. Out of the six billion people living today, apart from identical twins, no two have the same DNA. So life loves to invent and rein- vent. We are most in alignment with our own true nature when we are inventing and reinventing, particularly ourselves. Unless we are able to question some of the assumptions we make about ourselves, as we explored in chapter 1, we are unlikely to be able to do that. For instance, our assumptions also play a central role in how effectively we express our creativity. The assumption that you are not creative prevents you from accessing your creative self. This becomes a self-fulfilling prophesy with very significant implications. The same is true when we make positive assumptions about creativity. The creator of the Stanford Business School course on creativity, Michael Ray, shares three assumptions about creativity with every student. 1. Creativity “is essential for health, happiness, and success in all areas of life, including business.” 2. “Creativity is within everyone.” 3. Although it is in everyone “it is covered over by the voice of judgment.” To live a creative life, we must lose our fear of being wrong. JOSEPH CHILTON PEARCE
  • 166. 154 TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH Learning to be Uncreative What we attend to expands and grows, so it is with creativity. Some of the limiting ideas that surround our creativity were formed dur- ing our formal education. I can’t speak for each of you, but creative expression was not considered an important activity at the schools I attended. If we couldn’t draw we were encouraged to focus our energy on other activities. The implicit message was “if you are not very good at something, don’t do it”. It did not occur to many peo- ple within the education system that a child might enjoy drawing whether they were very good at it or not. Doing something for its own sake wasn’t considered to be time well spent. Simply put, for many people, if they were not naturally artistic, their creativity was not encouraged and they were pointed toward the sciences where rationality held office. Individual creativity is important. Just as you cannot build a resilient team out of non-resilient individuals, you cannot make a creative team out of non-creative individuals. By more fully expressing their adaptability and flexibility — two of the most impor- tant aspects of creativity — team members are able to operate more creatively together. The illiterate of the future are not those that cannot read or write. They are those that cannot learn, unlearn, relearn. ALVIN TOFFLER Creativity Versus Innovation We should stop for a moment and make the distinction between creativity and innovation. Creativity is defined as the ability to create
  • 167. CREATIVITY & FLEXIBILITY 155 new ideas and things. Innovation is the application of creativity to practical problems. Another way to look at the difference is Michael Gerber’s (The E-Myth Revisited) definition: “Creativity thinks up new things, innovation does new things.” Business is obviously more interested in doing new things. The The speed that change speed that change is occurring is occurring in society in society and business means the and business means mantra for most industries is “inno- the mantra for most vate or evaporate”. This probably industries is “innovate explains why creativity is rapidly or evaporate”. becoming a key factor in business success. Creativity and Flexibility Creativity and flexibility are not only important elements of busi- ness competitiveness, they are also good for employee health and wellness and staff retention. Flexibility and adaptability do not happen just by reacting fast to new information. They arise from mental and emotional balance, the lack of attachment to specific outcomes, and putting care for self and others as a prime operating principle. Flexible attitudes build flexible physiology. Flexible physiology means more resilience in times of challenge or strain. Staying open — emotionally — insures internal flexibility. DOC CHILDRE AND BRUCE CRYER, FROM CHAOS TO COHERENCE
  • 168. 156 TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH In chapter 5 we explored the significance of team alignment. However a team that is connecting deeply and aligning its energies will still fail to survive or thrive if it cannot exercise creativity and flexibility in the face of external challenges. In his book Good to Great, Jim Collins states, “The good-to-great companies faced just as much adversity as the comparison companies, but responded to that adversity differently.” What was it that enabled them to respond differently? They were able to stop, take stock of what was happen- ing, and create a response. The difference is the co-creation of a response to the challenge versus a knee-jerk co-reaction. Co-creation instead of co-reaction. With all of the advantages that creativity brings, you would be tempted to think that the study of it as a tool within business has been going on for a long time. Not so. Only in the last 20 years has creativity become a formal part of the business school curricu- lum. So we have not been consciously applying the creative process within business for very long. This seems strange because healthy business is such an inherently creative process. All businesses have their origins with somebody and an idea they thought could be a business. The tricky part occurs when business people try to quan- tify the value that imagination (and creativity) bring to business. This may explain the uncomfortable relationship between the two. It’s time to get over this and begin to embrace creativity and flexibility as important aspects of every business. One of the fundamental questions we must ask is, “How can we develop more creative and innovative teams?” You never change things by fighting the existing reality. To change something, build a new model that makes the existing model obsolete. R. BUCKMINSTER FULLER
  • 169. CREATIVITY & FLEXIBILITY 157 Ways of Tapping into Creativity for Business There are a number of factors associated with developing greater personal/team creativity and innovation and they are as follows: • orientation toward the creative process; • the role of great questions; • specific techniques/processes; and • use of humor. Orientation As mentioned before, the approach we take toward creativity and innovation, our own and that of others, has an impact on how suc- cessful we will be. From an individual perspective it may be worth while to take up a past-time that provides us an opportunity to express our creative side. It could be as simple as taking a water color class or learning to play a musical instrument. Learning a sec- ond or third language can also have very stimulating effects upon the human brain. Actions speak louder than words and doing some- thing that requires we exercise our creativity can be a lot more effective than simply reciting an affirmation about it. The Role of Great Questions The way in which we define challenges can have a huge impact upon the way we relate to them. Therefore the questions we formulate play a pivotal role in framing the issue or challenge. More specifically great questions can do a number of things, including the following: • determine whether we take a problem-focused or solution- focused approach;
  • 170. 158 TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH • focus our attention on particular parts of an issue; • stimulate new ways to think about something; • direct the attention of others; and • challenge hidden assumptions. Each of these effects, in their own right, expands the creativity being employed. Formulating questions should be considered as a discipline and disciplines require practice. In this instance practic- ing the creation of great questions can pay significant dividends in terms of, for example, focused and productive conversations, more effective meetings, and greater clarity with executive decisions. Meg Wheatley has commented that we would all be better off with a “little more curiosity and a little less certainty”. Certainty is very much like deep ruts in the snow, it will take us to very predictable destinations, often the ditch. Some of the responsibility for our approach to asking questions lies with what we were taught in schools. Our educational system encouraged us to supply answers to predetermined questions, not to pose new questions. How much larger and more inter- How much larger and more esting would our conception interesting would our of the world be if we had conception of the world be if been taught to be experts at we had been taught to be asking questions? experts at asking questions? Questions, then, link us to the very center of our creative selves. The bacteria mentioned at the beginning of this chapter was really addressing a question — a question related to its survival and discovering how to use oxygen rather then be poisoned by it was the bacteria’s answer. Questions have been mentioned a great deal throughout this book because they play such a central role in enabling us to be more adaptable and resilient.
  • 171. CREATIVITY & FLEXIBILITY 159 Because questions are intrinsically related to action, they spark and direct attention, perception, energy, and effort, and so are at the heart of the evolving forms that our lives assume… Questions function as open-handed invitations to creativity, calling forth that which doesn’t yet exist. MARILEE GOLDBERG Questions play a role in understanding the assumptions at play in our lives and the teams in which we work (chapter 1). They help us explore how perceptions affect the way we respond to the world (chapter 2). The type of questions we are able to address will have an impact on our sense of self-mastery (chapter 3) and how effective our communication is with other people (chapter 4). We shall be visiting the theme of questions again in chapter 7, when we explore the topic of meaningful participation. Use of Specific Techniques/Processes There are literally thousands of processes and techniques for gen- erating creative solutions to problems. Thousands of books have been written about creativity and how to expand it, personally or as a team, so we shall not explore that topic in depth here. One of the main ways to expand creativity is by exploring different perceptual perspectives. At the end of chapter 2 (perception) there was an exer- cise involving perceptual perspectives. These perspectives can also be used to explore a problem or anything about which you wish to be more creative. This process was developed by Robert Dilts and was originally modeled from the creativity strategies of Walt Disney. At the end of this chapter you will find the “Walt Disney Strategy” exercise and can explore its benefits in relation to expanding creativity.
  • 172. 160 TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH GO DEEPER Creativity: www.anthillsite.com Role of Humor There is an intimate relationship between “Aha” and “Ha-ha”. Inher- ently all humor is based on some form of creativity. As people laugh, they breathe more deeply than normal and send greater quantities of oxygen to the brain. The human brain uses over 20% of the body’s oxygen, so increasing the supply boosts performance significantly and helps learning. A great deal of humor relies upon changing per- spectives (or frames of reference) and this is also an integral part of the creative process. Humor plays a strong social function too. Almost all mythologies have a trickster or fool of some kind. One of the roles this character plays is to make fun of serious subjects, which provides a release of nervous tension. In this case the trickster is acting as a safety valve around important and potentially stressful situations. The trickster/ clown appears often at the most important social/religious rituals. American Indian culture has the great rabbit, the coyote, the ravens, and the blue jay. The fool appears in other cultures as a joker or jester. In such a position — masked and playing a part — they can provide valuable feedback to the ruling class because they are allowed to disregard the norms of the social order. In the Sufi tradition, the wise idiot plays an important role in helping “seekers” to go beyond the logical mind. The story of Mulla Nasrudin and his lost coins in chapter 2 illustrates the point that we fail to recognize our own inherent creativity, simply because we are looking for it in the wrong place. The techniques and processes referred to earlier can help us begin to look in some of the right places for our own latent creativity.
  • 173. CREATIVITY & FLEXIBILITY 161 Laughter is the jam on the toast of life. It adds flavor, keeps it from being too dry, and makes it easier to swallow. DIANE JOHNSON Creativity at Its Natural Best It is becoming increasingly apparent that if teams and companies are to adapt to the rapid changes occurring in society, they will have to tap into their natural creative abilities and turn that capacity into innovation. Smart companies are already doing that. Meyer and Davis provide a fascinating set of examples, in It’s Alive, where companies have emulated the creativity and innovation of natural systems to build strongly adaptive businesses. One example is the John Deere Company. One of their divisions manufactures seeders. The business challenge the company faced was that there were 1.6 million possible permutations for the con- figurations that could be ordered by customers. Trying to create a production schedule to optimize work hours and other resources was challenging, to say the least. John Deere used the services of a company called Optimax Systems. Using genetic algorithms Optimax would “breed” the various possible schedules to test for “fitness” — the fittest schedule would be the one the computers bred over night before each working day. Using powerful comput- ers, the breeding process could be repeated over 40,000 times in a vastly accelerated version of natural selection. The results were so dramatic at John Deere that suppliers had trouble keeping up with John Deere’s requirements and production schedules met target consistently. So here we have an example of principles from natural systems (cross-fertilization) being applied to a real-life business challenge. Organic aspects of “adapt and respond” practices can be seen in the
  • 174. 162 TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH more recent developments of software design. Here the software is able to “learn” from its contact with the environment and change how it operates in response. The Internet sprang out of something called the World Wide Web, the design of which was very much affected by the concept of a spider’s web and its inherent flexibility and strength. GO DEEPER Creative Systems: www.anthillsite.com Room for More? Developing our creativity and flexibility requires that we are open to the “new”. This can be more challenging than it appears. If we are not open to new ways of doing things and, more importantly, new ways of seeing things, it is unlikely that we will be able to learn much. The following story told by Laurence Boldt, in his book Zen and the Art of Making a Living (p. 50), illustrates the pitfalls of not having room for new ideas. A well-educated man once went to a Zen master to inquire about the meaning of Zen. After greeting him, the master instructed the visitor to be seated and proceeded to pour him a cup of tea. The cup was filled, and still he poured. Tea spilled over the sides of the table onto the floor, and still the Zen master poured. Finally, the visitor could contain himself no longer. “The cup is already full! It can hold no more!” The Zen master replied, “So it is. Just as you come to me so full of what you know that you can receive nothing new.” This story reminds me of an elderly in-law of my own, who used to insist he did not read the newspaper because “his mind was so full of stuff already” that he did not need any more. It should be no surprise that the gentleman in question was well known for his
  • 175. CREATIVITY & FLEXIBILITY 163 out-dated and inflexible ideas on most topics. He had inadvertently adopted the sea squirt strategy toward life. D.I.Y. Creativity Exercising our own personal creativity is an important first step toward developing our personal resilience. It also plays an impor- tant role in developing our CQ. By being flexible — and we can’t be that without expressing our creativity — we are automatically open to opportunities for collaboration. As Robert Fritz puts it, “If you do not listen to your own being, you will have betrayed yourself.” Once we have accepted the idea that we have a creative self we will be able to express it more frequently. We will also be able to make a greater creative contribution to our team. When a team expe- riences this contribution, they then shift their perspective on us and come to rely more heavily upon our input. This forces us to tap into our creativity further and so it goes on. What Can Creativity Achieve? A story from the Oswego Valley Peace and Justice Council illustrates a very elegant application of a creative solution. An Indiana sheep
  • 176. 164 TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH farmer was concerned about the effect his neighbors’ dogs were having on his sheep. Rather than resort to legal action or violence, the farmer gave his neighbors’ children pet lambs as gifts. The neigh- bors then voluntarily tied up their dogs and even became close friends with the farmer. The act of searching for and finding creative solutions to problems could divide people and is also central to expanding our CQ. Within the business environment there are a multitude of sto- ries illustrating how fundamental creativity and flexibility is to the CQ of teams and organizations. The story of the 3M Corporation by now is legendary. Their Web site chronicles a century in which they became systematically more effective at applying creativity and innovation to practical problems. The result is a highly successful company and a foothold in many product areas. As the world continues to change rapidly so companies and teams have to adapt to the changing environment. The Phillips Cor- poration is an example of a company that has embraced design as a guiding principle in this new “age of creativity”. “It is not what you do — it is how you do it” could be the mantra of design specialists. As a result of Phillips taking the issue of design very seriously, 49% of their revenue for 2005 was from products introduced in the pre- vious 12 months (the figure for 2003 was 25%). The preoccupation with design is just as pertinent to the design of our teams as it is to our products. Highly effective companies of the new era will be those that have put great thought into the design of their teams. CQ should be a major consideration for those of us involved in the creation and emancipation of functional teams. WHERE WE’VE BEEN A number of myths exists that can interfere with our ability to express our own creativity. In this chapter we explored these points:
  • 177. CREATIVITY & FLEXIBILITY 165 • Creativity and flexibility is a central factor in all successful and sustainable teams. • Innovation is creativity turned into practical action. • Questions play an important role in stimulating our creativity. • Creativity and innovation is not just important to the design of new products, but also to the design and emancipation of functional teams. WHERE WE’RE GOING With all the creativity and innovation in the world, if there is not an answer to the “why” question for teams to perform, chances are, effort will be minimal. Teams with high levels of CQ are not only creative, they also have a strong sense of purpose. This needs to make sense to the individual as well as the team. Each individual needs to be able to feel that they are participating meaningfully within their organization. This is the topic of the next chapter.
  • 178. 166 TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH CQ Tool 6 Developing Creative Capacity There are three modes of thinking we tend to use when creat- ing something or attempting to solve a problem. Walt Disney called these modes “Dreamer”, “Realist”, and “Critic”. The Dreamer mode is associated with ideas and thinking that makes no attempt to connect up with real life. The product of this mode of thinking tends to be very idealistic and can be impractical. The Critic mode is associated with fault-finding and dis- covering the down-side of an idea or situation. The product of this thinking tends to be very pessimistic, and problem-focused. The Realist mode is associated with a mixture of the Dreamer and Critic modes. The product of this mode of think- ing tends to be idealism mixed with practical application and is often a workable and creative solution. None of the modes are better than the others. They each have their strengths and weaknesses, so all are useful. Walt Disney’s strategy (which Dilts so cleverly spotted) is that during the creative or problem-solving process, all modes should be explored systematically. Special thanks to Robert Dilts for allowing us to use this exercise from the Encyclopedia of Systemic Neuro-lingusitic Programming and NLP New Coding.
  • 179. CREATIVITY & FLEXIBILITY 167 By spending time in each position we are able to disen- tangle the different types of thinking. It was Disney’s belief that each of these three elements needed to be represented in any creative process. It is reported that he often toured the various studios where films were being worked on and would spend time working out if any of the rooms were missing one of the modes. When he spotted a lack of dreamer or critic, he would take on that role and become engaged in the creative process with that particular team. His behavior provides us a great example of someone who has expanded his behavioral flexibility to the degree of becoming what the team needs at any particular time. One of the signs of teams with high CQ is that its members are able and willing to express that aspect of themselves (including a mode of thinking) that best serves the team’s objective. STEP 1: Create three physical locations for the three modes of thinking. This can be achieved by placing three pieces of paper on the floor labeled “Dreamer”, “Realist”, and “Critic”. STEP 2: Establish modes of thinking for the Dreamer location. Go to the Dreamer location and think of a time when you were very creative in a very uninhibited way. Assume a physical state of relaxation and evenly balanced body position, with your eyes looking up. This physical state becomes anchored to the dreamer location. STEP 3: Establish modes of thinking for the Critic location. Go to the Critic location and think of a time when you were able
  • 180. 168 TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH to constructively criticize a plan or idea. The physical state you assume is of an angular posture, for example one hand to your chin with eyes down and head tilted down. This physical state becomes anchored to the Critic location. STEP 4: Establish modes of thinking for the Realist location. Go to the Realist location and think of a time when you were able to realistically assess a plan or idea and put them effec- tively into action. The physical state you assume is of a balanced posture, eyes and head pointed straight ahead, hands on hips as if you were ready to take action. This physical state becomes anchored to the Realist location. STEP 5: Choose an outcome you wish to achieve and step into the Dreamer location. Create an image of yourself achieving that goal, almost as if you were a character in a movie. If you notice a critical voice beginning to surface in your mind, simply switch it off and remind yourself that this is the Dreamer location and that you will visit the Critic presently. STEP 6: Repeat Step 5 with the Critic and Realist locations, each time shaking off the effects of each of those modes of thinking. Note thoughts that come up from each of the loca- tions. Criticisms should be turned into questions that can be explored from the dreamer location. STEP 7: After cycling through the three locations several times you may wish to end by going to the realist location and assem- bling a plan of action based upon all the things you have discovered about the desired goal.
  • 181. CREATIVITY & FLEXIBILITY 169 The difference this process makes is that you focus on one type of thinking at a time. If you discover critical thoughts arising while you are in the dreamer space you can do a couple of things. You can step out of the dreamer space and step into the critic space, or you can adjust your thinking back to dreamer. A very useful development of this exercise involves creating a dialogue between the different spaces (you switching between spaces while exploring the different perspectives and vocalizing their perspectives).
  • 183. 7 Meaningful Participation Do more than belong: participate. Do more than care: help. Do more than believe: practice. Do more than be fair: be kind. Do more than forgive: forget. Do more than dream: work. WILLIAM ARTHUR WARD Everyone I know likes to think that what they are doing matters and that their contribution to life makes a difference. This is the essence of meaningful participation — making a difference. By def- inition collaborative intelligence involves meaningful participation. Intelligence that emerges as a result of collaboration must involve participation. The “meaningful” part comes in, of course, when the participants are aware that their contribution matters and is impor- tant to the system as a whole. The challenge comes when we try to
  • 184. 172 TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH achieve meaningful participation everyday. In the flurry of getting things done and meeting deadlines, it is easy to lose sight of the big picture. This goes on until we become exhausted and begin to won- der, “what’s the point of all this?” At this time it is useful to stop and ask ourselves, “What am I assuming about my part in the system?” The only happy people I know are the ones who are working well at something they consider important. ABRAHAM MASLOW Assumptions About Participation The very first skill we explored in this book was assumptions. In many ways, we have come full circle. Meaningful participation is one of the most powerful assumptions you can make. To assume that your life has meaning has many implications, just as the opposite would have. Another assumption that has a very specific (and limiting) effect is that there is a “reality” out there to be discovered. Like a school exam, we are then faced with the task of finding the right answer; finding out as much about it as possible. Nietzsche said that people can “survive any how if they have a sufficient why”. We know that when we attach a great deal of mean- ing to something, like the outcome of a football game or our child’s first word, we get very excited and absorbed in the event. The same is true of our work. When we have a strong sense of meaning attached to what we are doing, we bring more of our attention and energy to it. Sadly, many people have been so disillusioned by their experi- ence of work and, beyond a paycheck, they have stripped it of all meaning. This is one of the reasons volunteer work is so rewarding. As a volunteer we have chosen to discover rewards beyond mone-
  • 185. MEANINGFUL PARTICIPATION 173 tary gain. We feel as if we have made a difference and attach mean- ing to that contribution. Something special goes on — meaning is being made. What Have We Chosen Our Work to Mean? Notice that this question assumes that we can choose meaning. One of the things that we so frequently forget is that we do have choice. It is easy to become distracted by the number of things in which we have no choice. Viktor Frankl took this observation to its logical conclusion and discovered that we are the meaning makers and that ultimately we define our lives by the meanings we choose to adopt. If we wish to change our lives, Frankl advocates that we examine closely the meanings we have assigned to the various parts of our lives. There is an old story about a man who came upon three stone- masons — each carving a piece of stone. When asked what he was doing, the first man replied he was “earning enough money to feed his children”. The second said he was, “applying his art to the best of his ability”. The third said he was, “building a cathedral”. All of the men had the same job — the meaning they applied was quite different. We are fortunate that we live in a society where we can ask the question, “What is meaningful participation at work and how can I find it for myself?” The dynamic between freedom and responsibil- ity emerges here again — with the freedom to ask such questions comes the responsibility to ask the other questions, such as “What are we here for?” — and eventually — “Can I make a difference?” The faint of heart may step back from asking that question, which is one of the reasons we talk about courage in this chapter. “Generation Y” is creating an impact upon the way we organize ourselves at work. One of the defining characteristics of this very
  • 186. 174 TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH large cohort (second only to Baby Boomers) is their concern that the company they work for has values that match their own. Also they need to understand how their work contributes to the organi- zation’s bottom line. In short, Gen Y needs to know they can make a difference; meaningful participation is extremely important to them. Saying Yes This is the true joy in life, the being used for a purpose recognized by yourself as a mighty one; the being thoroughly worn out before you are thrown on the scrap heap; the being a force of Nature instead of a feverish selfish little clod of ailments and grievances complaining that the world will not devote itself to making you happy. GEORGE BERNARD SHAW, MAN AND SUPERMAN, EPISTLE DEDICATORY The whole idea of meaningful participation can be a little over- whelming. I am not suggesting that in order for teams to achieve it they must make some heroic gesture. We all start where we are and work out from there. Small is good. Small enables us not to be dis- couraged by the thought of how much there is to be done and how important it is. To become the force of nature that Shaw talks about does not necessarily mean all our actions must be grand gestures. First steps are often small, and initial visions that focus energy effectively often address immediate problems. What matters is engagement in the service of a larger purpose rather than lofty aspirations that paralyze action. This becomes even more important when we consider teams. The team can provide a context for the individual members, in the
  • 187. MEANINGFUL PARTICIPATION 175 same way that a department provides a context to the team. On the macro level the organization is providing a context to all its groups, divisions, and teams. This is why the values that an organization embraces become so important; they create a context for the activ- ities of everyone who works there. Increasingly employees want to know if their employer operates a “triple bottom line” (financial, social, and environmental considerations What matters is with respect to business planning). engagement in the As people become more systemically service of a larger aware, they want to know if their purpose rather than company is having an adverse or ben- lofty aspirations that eficial effect upon the community paralyze action. and environment. Courage Under Fire The scene in Oliver Twist, in which Oliver goes back to ask for more porridge, reveals the courage he displayed in the face of unknown consequences. To me the request for more is symbolic not of greed but of saying, “I need more and am willing to ask the question”. It could also represent asking to have more meaning. Too often we have learned to keep our heads down, not asking the tricky questions. Earlier in the book I spoke about the possible transformation effects of asking good questions. In this case it could be, “What is the deeper meaning of my work?” or “What could my work mean?” It is said that the Red Sea did not part for Moses until Naashon had waded into the water up to his nose. What better way to demon- strate our own inner leadership than to be willing to wade into the water up to our noses? True courage is never a calculation of risk, a quadratic equation of factors determining what we do — it
  • 188. 176 TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH is a commitment to what needs to be done irrespective of the cost or risk. Deciding to have meaningful participation in our work will even- tually test our courage. A famous bull fighter was once asked to define courage. He said that to step into a ring when you are not afraid is nothing. To not step into a ring when you are afraid is also True courage is never a nothing. To step into the ring when calculation of risk — you are afraid, now that is some- it is a commitment to thing, he added. Sometimes the what needs to be done most fear is associated with doing irrespective of the cost the right thing and tests our dedi- or risk. cation to the ‘higher path’. Work as Contribution Juanita Brown in World Café says, “Contribution has a different tone and feeling than individual participation. Important as it is, the focus on individual participation can lead to an overemphasis on the I: I’m voicing my opinions. I’m speaking up. I’m participating. In contrast, focusing on contribution creates a relationship between the I and the we.” GO DEEPER Contribution: www.anthillsite.com I think this makes a beautiful point about the connection between ourselves and the teams we are on. We are required to let go of ego to make this type of contribution possible. When we can contribute
  • 189. MEANINGFUL PARTICIPATION 177 rather than participate, our team benefits by having a model of what contribution is really about — that is, serving the team and its purpose first, rather than our own ego needs. For most of us, what we do for a living has become an extension of who we are as a person. Eight plus hours per day, five days per week is a lot of life tied up in something. I am reminded of the car- toon of the man lying on his death bed, his family around him, and he shares with them, “I watched a lot of TV, ate a lot of junk food, and sold more ceramic tiles in May of 1998 than anyone else in the northern region. My work here is done.” What will we be able to say on our death beds? Sobering question. The argument is that most of us spend too much time at work for it to have no meaning at all. Helping people to see the part their contribution plays in the grander scheme of things enables them to get the best out of themselves. This goes for teams as well. A good team leader (whether they have been asked to or not) connects the dots for the team members in terms of the larger organizational objectives. Among other things this provides a context for requests around performance. For example if I needed to ask a team to work a portion of the weekend, it helps to make sense of this request if I explain that the department needs the work completed because of an audit that is being carried out the following week. I am sure we have all had to do something like this and such requests can have varying results. The difference in the responses we receive has less to do with the kind of request and more with whether the team members feel as committed to the organization as they are to the team. When the organization is striving to do something with which the individual can identify and support, then commitment (instead of compliance) is much more likely. Freiberg’s heroic causes show how companies can help employ- ees connect with the larger purpose of what they are doing. For example, when Apple says, “We want to educate the world” they are
  • 190. 178 TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH effectively saying people who work for us can say, “I work for a company that is in the business of educating the world” — a lofty ambition indeed. Even the character in the cartoon (the ceramic tile salesman) could have said, “I help people create clean and hygienic homes for their families to grow up in,” if he had chosen to view it that way. The Most Difficult Question of All The most important questions in life also tend to be the most chal- lenging — the question of purpose is no exception. Pema Chodron, in Brach’s Radical Acceptance, relates the story of a lady who sat next to her mother as she lay unconscious, close to death. One morn- ing the dying mother opened her eyes and looked in her daughter’s eyes and said, “You know, all my life I thought something was wrong with me.” She then shook her head as if to say, “What a waste.” The mother then closed her eyes and died shortly after. None of us wish to reach this point where we are viewing our whole life as a waste. This makes meaningful participation the most important issues, not only from a personal perspective but also from a professional one. My wife once accused me of being a little morbid because I liked to read the obituaries. In my defense I explained that I enjoyed read- ing what those closest to them, thought about them and the life they led. Beyond the devoted father, committed Christian, and faithful
  • 191. MEANINGFUL PARTICIPATION 179 friend, there are often singular and surprising comments that pro- vide an insight into the real impact the deceased possessed, when alive. Beyond the clichés these latter comments often indicate how the person engaged with life. When we are born, we are crying and everyone around us is smiling. When we die, may we be smiling while everyone around us is crying. JEWISH PROVERB In many workshops I ask at the beginning for participants to identify a personal hero. When sharing with the group, it is surpris- ing the number of people who have chosen their mother, father, grandmother, or an old high school teacher. Many of the heroes are deceased and continue to have a deep impact upon our lives. If the people are no longer physically around, what is it that continues to affect us? Often as not, it is the values they championed, values that we ourselves wish to honor. And yet we are all a work in progress and every moment is another opportunity to ask the question, “How can I participate more meaningfully in my work?” or “How can I honor the values that matter to me in my work?” Finding Meaning at Work One hundred years ago it would have seemed absurd to write about people’s need to find meaning in their work. In the early 1900s a very small proportion of the population of the world were aware of the value of meaningful work. For everyone else work was only a means of feeding themselves and their family. The industrial revolution created a world in which people were cogs in a giant machine. Society, in first world countries, is emerging from the industrial age
  • 192. 180 TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH to the information age. There are the beginnings of a knowledge or creativity age appearing beyond that. These layers of development can be viewed as levels of evolution. As William Gibson said once, “The future is already here, it’s just unevenly distributed.” We live on a planet where there are people still living in near- stone-age conditions (e.g., the isolated aboriginals of Australia) and where probes are being sent to explore Pluto. For those of you wishing to explore a model that explains the different levels of society and the process of their evolution, refer to the Spiral Dynamics Model (Beck and Cowen, 1998) and the book A Theory of Everything (Wilber, 1996). GO DEEPER Human Society Evolves: www.anthillsite.com It is impossible to explore the topic of collaborative intelligence and resilience properly, without bumping into the issue of meaning. I expect that you are no different from the majority of the popula- tion — you want your life to have meaning and to have it make a difference. If you are to spend on average 20,000 hours of your life at work over the next ten years then does it not make sense to want what you do to contribute to that sense of “making a difference” (the odd hours of voluntary work outside of it hardly makes a splash in comparison). Maslow mentions this connection to a cause when he refers to, “An easy medicine for self-esteem: becomes a part of something important. …This identification with important causes, or important jobs, this identifying with them and taking them into the self thereby enlarging the self and making it important, this is a way of over coming also actual existential human shortcomings e.g. IQ, talent, abilities etc.”
  • 193. MEANINGFUL PARTICIPATION 181 Holding Our Lives Like each strand of the spider’s web, each life is an integral part of the whole. Though at some level it is indistinguishable from all the rest. The paradox of individualism and collectivism is resolved not by choosing one of them as an option, but by realizing that they are a dynamic (just Like each strand of the like freedom and responsi- spider’s web, each life is an bility) and a dynamic is lived integral part of the whole. rather than resolved. Errol Flynn, the 50s Holly- wood actor, got his start in the movies as a stunt man — he had been an Olympic fencer prior to that. A journalist once asked him to reveal the secret of being a great fencer. Flynn’s reply bears some contem- plation. He said that it all depended on how you held the sword. If you held it too tightly your movements would be stiff and predictable and you would be beaten. On the other hand if you held it too loosely, it would be knocked from your hand by your opponent. When pressed to explain how would he know how tightly to hold it, Flynn simply explained that depended on what was going on in the moment. How tightly do you need to hold onto your life? Too loosely and it will be knocked from your hands — it will become part of someone else’s plan. Too tightly and your life becomes a stiff and predictable dance destined to leave you feeling that somehow life walked right past you. One thing seems to be pretty consistent — the universe has a strange and subtle sense of balance — you get back what you put in. Your “outer life” (as much as you would like to believe otherwise) is a mirror of what is going on with the “inner life”. This is the first furrow; this is where personal development meets professional development — you are not two people — the one with the brief
  • 194. 182 TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH case and the one with the golf club in your hand. Laurence Boldt talks about the illusion of the balance between work and life as if they were the opposites of each other. If we choose to perceive them as such so shall it be and never the twain will meet. What a waste I say, what a crying shame that each time you go off to the office you bring just some part of you to the activity and leave another part behind. Work can be (as I’m sure it is for some of you already) another way for us to express ourselves. If it is not, we are technically not different from being a slave. Never have human beings had more choice; never has the call to live our authentic life been easier to hear. It hasn’t got any easier to answer the call. The call will always be challenging to respond to, always have appreciable costs, and always frighten us. Courage Under Fire The question of courage always appears when we begin to factor in the costs of meaningful participation. True courage is never a cal- culation of risk, a quadratic equation of factors determining what we do — it is a commitment to what needs to be done irrespective of the cost or risk. Deciding to have meaningful participation in our work will eventually test our courage. A story from Viktor Frankl’s The Unheard Cry For Meaning provides us with a way of thinking about the courage required (p. 53). “During World War I a Jewish army doctor was sitting together with his gentile friend, an aristocratic colonel, in a foxhole when heavy shooting began. Teasingly, the colonel said, ‘You are afraid, aren’t you? Just another proof that the Aryan race is superior to the Semitic one.’ ‘Sure, I am afraid,’ was the doctor’s answer. ‘But who is superior? If you, my dear colonel, were as afraid as I am. You would have run away long ago.’ What counts are not our fears and anxieties
  • 195. MEANINGFUL PARTICIPATION 183 as such, but the attitude we adopt toward them. This attitude is freely chosen.” Practically every single major contribution humans have made to life was through some aspect of what could have been called “work” — Michael Angelo and his art; Madame Curie and her sci- ence; Schweitzer and his medicine; and Martin Luther King, Jr. and his politics. These people could be perceived as driven, however I’m sure they would have still done what they did even if they thought their work might go unnoticed. They did it because it was an expres- sion of who they were. Everyone’s life (including the work part) can be an expression of who they are. “A Hammer, a Hammer, my Kingdom for a Hammer” We don’t need any more tools, we have piles of them. In Stewardship, Peter Block once counted how many suggestions were made for how people could improve their working life within just four books — Thriving on Chaos, Seven Habits of Highly Effective People, The Empowered Manager, and The Fifth Discipline. He came up with 925 suggestions about how people could make positive changes to their workplace. Block’s conclusion to this observation was that “how” was not the question that needed to be asked — we are awash in “how-tos”. The question is, “What will it take for you to take the next step; to embrace the challenge?” Life requires us to look inside and say “yes” to the challenge. We are drowning in strategies, processes and tools; what we need is commitment. Swallow or Be Swallowed When I was seven, my parents bought me the Larousse Animal Life Encyclopedia. In it I found the most gruesome picture I had ever
  • 196. 184 TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH seen. It was two Egyptian Vipers; each had bitten opposite ends of a single rat. The commentary beside the picture explained that because Egyptian Viper’s fangs are permanently angled backwards, once they have seized their prey they can never let go — they are committed to swallow whatever they bite. I immediately became very curious what was going to happen in this situation — an Egyptian Viper committed to opposite ends of the same prey. The commentary went on to explain that one of the vipers would have to swallow the rat and then the other viper. I realize that this is a pretty gruesome story, but I think that our own lives are no less dramatic and the stakes no less considerable. To have meaningful participation we must be committed. Stop and think about the word for a few moments and what it means to the snake as it strikes its prey, knowing that its fangs are angled backwards. Once impaled upon its prey, it is committed, there is no letting go, no dropping the idea, no “I’ll let this one go and take the next one”, no way out. Sounds so final, drastic. An example of this level of commitment can be found in Mahatma Gandhis battle with the British Empire. Gandhi would never let go, even though his only “weapons” were intent, love, and a philosophy of non-violence. If we do not fully live our lives then who will live them? The cliché of having our children live out our aspirations is a cul de sac at the very least and more commonly, disastrous for everyone involved. No matter what our parents taught us — we now know
  • 197. MEANINGFUL PARTICIPATION 185 that our lives are our responsibility. What we say “yes” to will shape our lives for ever, just as what we are saying “no” to right now is shaping it. If we stand still and ask “how” forever, then that is a choice, though one that will probably not bring us what we seek. Saying “yes” does not necessarily take away the pain, but gives it, and our lives, a richer meaning. If we do not fully Peter Block quotes Sister DeShano live our lives then (the director of a large health care sys- who will live them? tem he worked with). She said, “the call comes from a place that we do not know, that the demands placed on us will be more than we ever expected, and that if we knew what was in store, we never would have said yes. These are excellent tests for the pursuit of what matters.” The “call” she is referring to was, of course, the call to participate meaningfully in her life and her work. The Magic of Action Many people have reached this crossroads in their life. You may have already reached it. When we take that step over the line and commit ourselves, something special happens. W. H. Murray of the Scottish Himalayan Expedition in 1951 put it this way: “Concerning all acts of initiative (and creation) there is one elementary truth, the ignorance of which kills countless ideas and splendid plans: that the moment one definitely commits oneself, then providence moves too. All sorts of things occur to help one that would not otherwise have occurred. A wild stream of events issues from the decision, raising in one’s favor all manner of unfore- seen incidents and meetings and material assistance which no man would have dreamed would come his way. I have learned a deep
  • 198. 186 TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH respect for one of Goethe’s couplets: ‘Whatever you can do, or dream you can, begin it. Boldness had genius, magic, and power in it. Begin it now.’” Rationalizations are described by Steven Pressfield in The War of Art as the right-hand man of resistance. The person who coined the phrase “resistance is useless” obviously hadn’t thought it through. Resistance is very useful — it prevents us from doing a great many things that require commitment. It stops us short of achieving great things many times. It tells us “it’s not worth the bother” and saves us from disappointments in life. It saves us the trouble of discovering deeper levels of our own resiliency. Meaningful Participation Means Creating the Future To be a meaningful participant is to realize that we are creating the future moment–by-moment through what we choose to say “yes” to. When I think of this important aspect of meaningful participation I remember a story from Paul Rogat Loeb’s book, The Impossible Will Take a Little Longer. Rogat Loeb relates a true incident in the life of surrealist poet, Robert Desnos, during the Second World War. He was being taken, with a truck load of other prisoners, to be gassed. Everyone on the truck knew where they were going and there was a dreadful silence as they disembarked beside the gas chambers. Suddenly Desnos stepped into the line and grabbed another prisoner’s hand and began to read his palm. He foresaw many children and much good luck. Soon many others were reaching out their palms to have them read. Each time the story was similar — long life, abundant joy, and many children. By that time the mood among the prisoners and the guards had changed — whether they were so disorientated or moved by
  • 199. MEANINGFUL PARTICIPATION 187 the unfolding scene — the guards became unable to follow their orders and simply loaded the prisoners back into the truck and drove them back to the camp. Desnos had saved the lives of everyone by creating an almost absurd but contagious prediction of the future. By choosing to see something different Desnos was able to carry the imaginations of his fellow prisoners and even the guards to a new place and the result — the creation of a miracle. The fright- ening and beautiful truth is that each moment we live, we can ask the “what if” question. What if my work or the work of my team could be meaningful? On Hope and Fear In Buddhist philosophy hope is not the opposite of hope- If we do not fill our hearts lessness — fear is. Vacal Havel with hope then fear will once stated, “Hope is not the rush in to fill the space. conviction that something will turn out well, but the certainty that something makes sense regardless of how it turns out.” Nature abhors a vacuum and if we do not fill our hearts with hope then fear will rush in to fill the space. It’s our choice. How Real is Real? At work, it can be so easy to assume we have to be a certain type of person to be accepted and make progress within the team and organization. It is so tempting to put on our game face each time we enter the workplace. Palmer J. Parker relates an old Hasidic tale that reveals, with amazing brevity, both the universal tendency to
  • 200. 188 TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH want to be someone else and the ultimate importance of becoming one’s self. Rabbi Zusya, when he was an old man, said, “In the com- ing world, they will not ask me: ‘Why were you not Moses?’ They will ask me: ‘Why were you not Zusya?’” I used to work with a colleague who often joked that 80% of success was showing up, an old Woody Allen joke. In the morning, when he had arrived at the office, he would say, “Well that’s 80% of my work done for the day.” I am quite sure he was unaware of another meaning for the term “showing up”. This second meaning relates to the act of bringing our true selves to work. This enables us to be more authentic with those around us. After all, 20,000 hours over the next ten years is a long time to be playing a part. Like any other attribute, it grows as it is exercised. “What is REAL?” asked the Rabbit one day, when they were lying side by side…. “Does it mean hav- ing things — that buzz inside you and a stick-out- handle?” “Real isn’t how you are made,” said the Skin Horse. “It’s a thing that happens to you. When a child loves you for a long, long time, not just to play with, but REALLY loves, you, then you become real.” “Does it hurt?” asked the Rabbit. “Sometimes,” said the Skin Horse, for he was always truthful. “When you are real you don’t mind being hurt.” “Does it happen all at once, like being wound up,” he asked, “or bit by bit?” “It doesn’t happen all at once,” said the Skin Horse. “You become. It takes a long time. That’s why it doesn’t often happen to people who break easily, or have sharp edges, or who have to be carefully
  • 201. MEANINGFUL PARTICIPATION 189 kept. Generally, by the time you are real, most of your hair has been loved off, and your eyes drop out and you get loose in the joints and very shabby. But these things don’t matter at all, because once you are Real you can’t be ugly, except to people who don’t understand.” MARGERY WILLIAMS, THE VELVETEEN RABBIT Being “real” in the professional arena is not always easy. More and more people want their work to be an extension of their life, an expression of who they are, rather than an uncomfortable appendage that they must accommodate. For these people meaningful partici- pation is a vital ingredient of the work experience. Forward thinking and evolved organizations will increasingly champion opportunities for building meaning into how they function. This will, in turn, enable employees to bring all of themselves to their professional roles. The end result? Employees, teams, and organizations sharing a sense of aligned purpose that brings forth their collaborative intelligence in a meaningful way. WHERE WE’VE BEEN • We need leaders to support us, as we strive to live and work by our values. • “Why” is an important question when it comes to how we relate to our work. • We are the meaning makers and ultimately we decide the meaning of our work. • Being personally authentic is an important part of discovering meaningful participation at work. • Discovering meaningful participation will often test our courage.
  • 202. 190 TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH • Building a sense of meaningful participation within teams automatically builds CQ. • Companies that champion meaningful participation will attract the employees best equipped to take the company into the future. WHERE WE’RE GOING The skills we have explored so far have been designed to help develop the CQ of individuals and teams. We have also touched upon the topic of resilience throughout the book. Building resilient teams is an important way to develop the collaborative intelligence of organizations. The next chapter explores this topic.
  • 203. MEANINGFUL PARTICIPATION 191 CQ Tool 7 Exploring Values to Discover Meaning Values can act as a compass to provide us direction through- out our lives. When life becomes turbulent or we sail through foggy weather, it is useful to have our values close at hand to help us navigate. STEP 1: On a separate sheet of paper recall a time when • You have been most creative; • You have been most committed to something; • You have made your mind up to do something (despite people telling you couldn’t do it) and did it despite all the obstacles; and • You have been so absorbed in something that you ceased to notice time passing. Take a few moments for each question and jot down some notes about what comes to mind. STEP 2: For each of the instances that come to mind, deter- mine the value being suggested. What was it that was motivating you to do what you were doing? Write down your answers. Note: To get the juices flowing you may want to Google values; you will find many sites displaying long lists of values.
  • 204. 192 TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH STEP 3: You should be able to spot some values that have emerged from this exercise. Place them in order of priority. STEP 4: Ask yourself, “How can I honor these values in my work place?” or “If I were honoring these values in my day-to-day work, what would that look like?” Note: Your team might like to explore this exercise together. It could help to bring team members to a deeper understanding of the values that are important to their colleagues. This can lead to the next step — a shared set of values for the whole team. You have now taken some simple steps towards identifying how to bring more meaningful participation into your work life.
  • 205. 8 Building High CQ Teams Experience is a hard teacher because she gives the test first, the lesson afterwards. VERNON LAW So what does a team with high CQ look like? Is it a spectacular sight that takes your breath away when you see it in action? Like the Cirque de Soliel, would it baffle and mesmerize the audience with its death-defying feats? Not really. Such teams metaphorically appear more like a flock of starlings at twilight. As you look at the flock you may recognize it as a group of individuals; however, it seems as if they are informed by the one group mind, as they twist and turn, adapting to their environment. It’s difficult to make out who the leader is and yet the group as a whole behaves in a purposeful and effective fashion. Each member of the flock/team has their own
  • 206. 194 TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH freedom of action and takes every chance it gets to choreograph its flight with that of the flock. Collaboratively Intelligent Teams Are Boring It could be said that teams with high CQ are quite boring. There are very few dramas and no exciting heroes the team relies on to save the day. People pull their weight and support each other to an extraordinary degree. There is a vigorous pursuit for learning, not only at the individual level, but at the team level also. There is a sense of community within the team or department. People from outside sense this very quickly and notice something special is going on. We have all had this experience and most of us can’t put our finger on what it is. Like the difference between listening to a well- rehearsed orchestra and a group of novice musicians A team with high CQ that are playing out of key. expects challenge and meets A team with high CQ it with one eye on results; expects challenge and meets the other on what it can it with one eye on results and learn from each encounter. the other on what it can learn from each encounter with something new. A collaboratively intelligent team realizes that all great teams are a process, not a thing. This is based upon strong bonds between its members. There is an awareness that each person in the team is also a process and not static. Personality profiles are perceived as general guides but each person is encouraged to grow and change in positive ways. Team members know that a great deal of behavior is determined by the situation and they consciously create situations where collaboration is easy and fruitful. The assumption is that no
  • 207. BUILDING HIGH CQ TEAMS 195 matter what the personality of the team member, there will always be opportunities for high levels of collaboration. The purpose of this book was not to make you and your team boring — there are others benefits of building high CQ teams. • A High CQ team is able to share the stress and strain evenly throughout the team — like a tennis racket takes the impact of a ball at one point in the racket and the pressure is spread throughout all the strings. • A High CQ team has a strong network of connection and support between its members. This accelerates learning enabling the team’s reactions to be rapid and responsive to the challenges the team encounters. • A High CQ team looks after its own; individuals are not left to fend for themselves and staff retention is high because people feel a strong sense of belonging. • A High CQ team is well connected with other teams and with corporate objectives. Like a healthy organ in the body — it knows what its function is and serves the greater good through rough times and smooth. • A high CQ team achieves its objectives more through people and less through politics • A High CQ team replenishes itself, growing its members, and is constantly learning to better adapt to its environment. • A high CQ team displays a strong sense of meaningful participation, which the members are all nourished by. So teams with High CQ are already out there and as the impor- tance of collaborative intelligence becomes more recognized, more will emerge. Other factors are at work within this mix, however. There is a “changing of the guard” within businesses, most notice- ably in those countries with large baby boomer populations.
  • 208. 196 TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH Y are They Important? As the baby boomers begin to leave the stage another generation begins to makes its presence more obvious — generation “Y”. North Americans born between 1977 and 2003 make up this generation. “Gen Y” is the second largest cohort after the baby boomers and while much more varied in their characteristics, these cohorts may share many of their values. Asked what their three most important values were when choosing a company to work for, they choose integrity, social responsibility, and loyalty. Asked what they valued most about their work and Gen Y quickly isolated teamwork, work- life balance, stimulating work, and lots of feedback. Honoring these values in the workplace, we will build businesses that will help the Gen Y’s become and remain engaged. Gen Y is also much more mul- ticultural than the baby boomer cohort and so training in the area of diversity will help in the process of developing high CQ teams. The shifting generations are having a huge effect upon how business can work through teams. As Gen Y begins to infuse the work- force with different values and perspectives, we will have to find a way to accommodate their arrival and prepare for the departure of the baby boomers. Mentoring and coaching will become more important as a way to effectively transfer all the soft information and skills between the generations within the business environment. Other manage- ment strategies to assist Gen Y in the process of taking over the reins include: • providing training in time management; • offering community involvement opportunities; • creating a system for frequent public praise for performance; • creating many opportunities for team involvement; and • customizing the career paths for employees.
  • 209. BUILDING HIGH CQ TEAMS 197 GO DEEPER Gen Y and Baby Boomers: www.anthillsite.com Knowledge management is clearly an issue here. Valuable infor- mation the baby boomers are carrying around with them needs to be transferred across to their Gen Y colleagues. For these reasons we have chosen multi-dimensional coaching as the CQ Tool for this chapter. This tool enables coaching to occur in many directions. Multi-Dimensional Coaching With fewer layers of management, employees must assume greater responsibility (with the support of their management team) in tak- ing initiative and sharing in the leadership process. The most resilient companies will be those through which leadership flows. Leadership in such companies will become a fluid process Every employee that touches every one at every level. must be willing to Every employee must be willing to lead and be lead. lead and be lead. A different way of relat- ing to others is required to make the shift from depending on others to contributing through others. Team members who are contributing through others will have the ability to: • develop technical breadth; • broaden business perspective; • stimulate others with ideas and knowledge; • be involved as a leader, mentor or idea-generator in developing others; and • build strong networks (internal and external).
  • 210. 198 TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH Teaching an Anthill to Coach Developing the CQ of teams requires that we look closely at how we interact with each other. One of the most effective ways to accomplish this task is by developing team members’ ability to coach each other. Coaching develops the team’s ability to learn from and contribute through each other. It is a central strategy of a flattened organization. Coaching can be directed in three main ways as demon- strated in Figure 8.1. Figure 8.1 Multi-Dimensional Coaching ‘Up‘ Across (Manager) (Peers) LEAD Coaching Process Supervisory We refer to this approach as “multi-dimensional”. Organizational structure and management accountability taken to one side, the actual process of performance coaching consists of essentially the same process whichever direction it is conducted. A coach is someone that helps others with the tools, knowledge, and opportu- nities they need to develop themselves and become more effective.
  • 211. BUILDING HIGH CQ TEAMS 199 Coaches don’t develop others — they help others develop them- selves. By definition, then, most employees have the potential to be effective coaches in all three directions. Informal coaching processes offer tremendous potential for releasing untapped energy from teams. With informal coaching comes the prospect of every employee becoming involved in the organization’s growth and development. This makes multi-dimensional coaching an important CQ Tool in the development of CQ within teams.
  • 212. 200 TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH CQ Tools 8 The LEADing Change System The LEAD System represents a simple coaching method that can be used in any of the three coaching directions. The acronym ensures that important elements are addressed during each coaching conversation. The system consists of four stages: • Leverage • Environment • Alternatives • Development We can also represent this system in a diagram. LEADing Change Environment Leverage Development Alternatives
  • 213. BUILDING HIGH CQ TEAMS 201 Leverage is the point of entry and represents the opportunity for change. It may be discovered when someone says something about a change they would like to make in their effectiveness or something with which they are unhappy. For all intentional purposes it represents the goal of the coaching session. The leverage stage achieves the following: • discovers a topic for discussion; • explores the reason for desired change; • establishes an objective for the coaching conversation; and • creates a long-term goal when appropriate. Environment represents the present reality. This includes a description of what is presently happening. Jim Collins would describe this stage as the “brutal facts”. It may include behaviors (including those of other people involved) and a description of the situation that lead to the “leverage point”. The environment stage achieves the following: • encourages self-assessment; • provides an appreciative feedback sandwich; • surfaces assumptions; and • discounts immaterial history. Alternatives represent the range of choices available for making changes. It may involve imagining the ideal future or brain- storming paths forward. Assumptions have such a strong impact on our lives; this stage can be a second chance to evaluate any assumptions that may affect the generation of alternatives. This stage achieves the following:
  • 214. 202 TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH • explores the full range of alternatives; • brainstorms with coachee around ways forward; • carefully offers suggestions; and • coaches them to a choice. Development represents the point at which the coachee pre- pares to take action. This is also the place that the coachee identifies how and where they will make changes. The LEAD system is a cyclical process and the final stage is really a con- nection to revisiting the leverage stage. By doing this the coach and coachee are able to have another conversation around the coaching issue. However this time around the issue has been (all being well) moved forward by the coachee. If necessary the LEAD process can help the coachee make further progress. The development stage achieves the following: • gains commitment from the coachee to take action; • anticipates potential obstacles; • creates specific timelines and plans for next step; and • provides support for change process. Use the LEADing Change diagram in this exercise to guide the process. Start with low risk issues to practice with the system. Arrange to have follow-up sessions with the person you are working. This can be achieved by saying you would be interested in hearing how they got on with the next step.
  • 215. 2 So Where Are We Going… Can you teach an anthill to fetch? It depends on how you define “fetch”. If we are using the term as a metaphor for enabling a large number of individuals to achieve an unprecedented level of coordi- nation, then yes it is possible to teach an anthill to fetch. This book has been an exploration of the principles and processes that make that possible for teams and organizations. In this hyper-linked world, harnessing the attention and energy of a team has never been more challenging. IQ and EQ (Emotional Intelligence) are necessary but no longer sufficient to deal with the present rate of change. Getting people onboard and keeping them there demands a new level of collaboration. Teaching an anthill to fetch is a metaphor. A metaphor for all the things we know our team could do. Moving a group of people from one way of operating to another is very like teaching an anthill to fetch. Given the right approach to the challenge and the right tools, we can develop the CQ of our teams and organizations. The Collaborative Intelligence of a team is defined as the capacity to create, contribute to, and harness the intelligence within the group. By raising the level of CQ everyone benefits. This unique combination of practical CQ Tools and processes helps teams to:
  • 216. 204 TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH • attract and retain high quality team members; • create a sense of meaningful participation; • collaborate in highly effective ways; • connect to a strong sense of purpose; and • balance leadership and followship. Developing CQ enables teams to build strong connections and tap into the awe-inspiring power within each of us. It also helps teams realize that none of us is as intelligent as all of us. Good teams and organizations have developed good levels of CQ; great ones have great CQ. There has never been a more opportune moment in time to decide to do something — for our teams, our employees, our organizations, and ourselves.
  • 217. 2 Bibliography Beck, Don Edward and Christopher Cowan. Spiral Dynamics: Mastering Values, Leadership and Change (reprint). Blackwell Publishing, Incorporated, 2005 Block, Peter. Stewardship. Berrett-Koehler, 1996 Block, Peter. The Answer to How Is Yes: Acting on What Matters. Berrett-Koehler Publishers, 2003 Block, Peter. The Empowered Manager: Positive Political Skills at Work. Jossey-Bass, 1991 Bloom, Howard. Global Brain: The Evolution of Mass Mind from the Big Bang to the 21st Century. Wiley, 2000 Boldt, Laurence. Zen and the Art of Making a Living: A Practical Guide to Creative Career Design. Penguin (Non-Classics), 1999 Brach, Tara. Radical Acceptance. Bantam, 2004 Brown, Juanita with David Isaacs and the World Café Community. The World Café: Shaping Our Futures Through Conversations That Matter. Berrett-Koehler Publishers, 2005 Buckingham, Marcus and Donald O. Clifton. Now, Discover Your Strengths. Pocket Books, 2005 Capra, Fritjof. The Web of Life: A New Scientific Understanding of Living Systems. Anchor, 1997 Carroll, Lewis. Alice Through the Looking Glass. Gramercy, 2004 Childre, Doc Lew and Bruce Cryer. From Chaos to Coherence (The Power to Change Performance). HeartMath, 2000
  • 218. 206 TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH Collins, Jim. Good to Great: Why Some Companies Make the Leap... and Others Don’t. Harper Collins, 2001 Covey, Stephen R. The 7 Habits of Highly Effective People, 15th anniversay edition. Free Press, 2004 Csikszentmihalyi, Mihaly. Flow the Psychology of Optimal Experi- ence. HarperCollins Publisher, 1990 Dilts, Robert. Encyclopedia of Systemic Neuro-Linguistic Pro- gramming and NLP New Coding. N L P University Press, 2000 Eidser, John. Global Brain: The Evolution of Mass Mind from the Big Bang to the 21st Century. Wiley, 2001 Flemons, Douglas G. Completing Distinctions: Interweaving the Ideas of Gregory Bateson and Taoism into a unique approach to therapy. Shambhala, 2001 Frankl, Viktor E. Man’s Search for Meaning. Beacon Press, 2006 Frankl, Viktor Emil. The Unheard Cry For Meaning. Touchstone Books, 1979 Freiberg, Kevin and Jackie. Guts! Companies that Blow the Doors off Business-as-usual. Currency, 2003 Fritz, Robert. The Path of Least Resistance. Butterworth-Heinemann Ltd., 1994 Gerber, Michael, The E-Myth Revisited: Why Most Small Businesses Don’t Work and What to Do About It. Collins, 1995 Goleman, Daniel. Emotional Intelligence. Bloomsbury Publishing PLC, 1996 Gozdz, Kazimierz (ed). Community Building: Renewing Spirit and Learning in Business. New Leaders Press, 1996 Hammond, Sue Annis and Andrea B. Mayfield. The Thin Book of Naming Elephants: How to Surface Undiscussables for Greater Organizational Success. Thin Book Publishing Co., 2004 Hankins, Gerald W. Rolling On: The Story of the Amazing Gary McPherson. The University of Alberta Press, 2003
  • 219. BIBLIOGRAPHY 207 Isaacs, William. Dialogue: The Art Of Thinking Together. Currency, 1999 Johnson, Steven. Emergence: The Connected Lives of Ants, Brains, Cities, and Software (reprint). Scribner, 2002 Kao, John. Jamming. Harper Collins Canada, 1997 Katzenbach, Jon R. and Douglas K. Smith. The Wisdom of Teams: Creating the High-Performance Organization (reprint). Collins Business Essentials, 2003 Kurzweil, Ray. The Age of Spiritual Machines. Penguin (Non- Classics), 2000 Kurzweil, Ray. The Singularity Is Near: When Humans Transcend Biology. Penguin, 2006 Loeb, Paul Rogat, ed. The Impossible Will Take a Little While: A Citizen’s Guide to Hope in a Time of Fear. Basic Books, 2004 Meyer, Christopher and Stan Davis. It’s Alive: The Coming Conver- gence of Information, Biology, and Business. Crown Business, 2003 Norretranders, Tor. The User Illusion: Cutting Consciousness Down to Size. Penguin Press Science, 1999 O’Connor, Joseph and Ian McDermott. The Art of Systems Thinking: Essential Skills for Creativity and Problem Solving. Thorsons, 1997 Peters, Tom. Thriving on Chaos: Handbook for a Management Revolution. Harper Paperbacks, 1988 Peterson, Christopher. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology. University of Michigan, 1989 Pressfield, Steven. The War of Art: Break Through the Blocks and Win Your Inner Creative Battles. Warner Books, 2003 Putnam, Robert D. Bowling Alone: The Collapse and Revival of American Community. Simon & Schuster, 2001 Scharmer, Otto, et al. Presence: An Exploration of Profound Change in People, Organizations, and Society. Currency, 2005
  • 220. 208 TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH Senge, Peter M. The Fifth Discipline: The Art & Practice of The Learning Organization. Currency, 2006 Senge, Peter M., C. Otto Scharmer, Joseph Jaworski and Betty Sue Flowers: Presence: An Exploration of Profound Change in People, Organizations, and Society. Currency, 2005 Shaw, Bernard. Man And Superman: a Comedy And a Philosophy. Kessinger Publishing, 2005 Siebert, Al. The Resiliency Advantage: Master Change, Thrive Under Pressure, and Bounce Back from Setbacks. Berrett-Koehler Publishers, 2005 Turnbull, Colin. The Forest People. Touchstone Book, 1987 Wheatley, Margaret J. and Myron Kellner-Rogers. A Simpler Way. Berrett-Koehler Publishers, 1998 Whitney, Diana L. and Amanda Trosten-Bloom. Encyclopaedia of Positive Questions: Using AI to Bring Out the Best in Your Organization (Tools in Appreciative Inquiry), Volume I. Lake- shore Communications, 2001 Wilber, Ken. A Theory of Everything: An Integral Vision for Business, Politics, Science and Spirituality. Shambhala, 2001
  • 221. 2 Index 3M Corporation 164 Attention 15, 30, 32-36, 72, 108, 111, Actor’s perspective 56 138, 158, 172 Adaptability 2, 29, 153 Attitudes 61 Adaptation 2, 149 Aurelius, Marcus 42 Adaptive learning system 134, 139 Auto-pilot 10, 32 Adaptive system 2 Awareness 30, 111 Age of Spiritual Machines, The 2 AI 140-141 Baboons 131-132, 134 Akashic Fields 127 Baby Boomers 174, 196 Alignment 62, 80, 83, 153, 156 Back-tracking 105, 110 Allen, Woody 188 Bacteria 150-151, 158 Alternatives 202-202 Bannister, Roger 14 Ambiguity 69 Beck, Dr. Don 180 American Automobile Association 33 Behaviors 80-83, 97 Andes 31 Beliefs 11, 14, 15, 65, 81 Answer to How is Yes, The 53, 54 Believe 18 Answers 23 Ben-Jacob, Eshel 151 Anthill 1,128, 135, 203 Blame 63 Ants 1, 128, 135 Blanchard, Ken 151 Apartheid system 75 Block, Peter 53, 114, 183, 185 Apple computer 138 Bloom, Howard 131 Appreciative inquiry 17, 115, 139-141 Body language 48, 103, 107-108 aRas 15 Bohm, David 40 Art of Systems Thinking, The 69 Boldt, Laurence G. 72, 162 Assumptions 3, 5, 8, 10, 16-24, 29, Bottom-up 70, 71, 94,133-137 38, 43, 49, 68-69, 95, 97, 102, Bowling Alone 133 105, 113, 153, 158, 172 Brain Gym 80 Athletes 33, 67 Branden, Nathaniel 68
  • 222. 210 TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH Brown, John Seely 29 Communication 3, 60, 93-116, Brown, Juanita 109, 113, 176 121, 125 Buckingham, Marcus 141 Community 1,123-126, 193, 196 Buddhist philosophy 52,187 Community building 133 Bull fighter 176 Community Building 125 Community Intelligence Ltd. 125 Campbell, Joseph 23 Competition 7 Capabilities 80-83 Completing distinctions 99 Capital One 1 Compliance 111 Capra, Fritjof 8, 123, 150 Congruence 104 Carroll, Lewis 22-23 Connection 3, 121-147 Certainty 158 Conscious mind 32, Challenging 63, 67 Contribution 163, 171, 176-177 Change 60 Conversation 139, 158 Character 41 café 114, 117 Childre, Doc 155 Cook, Captain 37 Chimpanzees 131 Cooperrider, David 115, 140 Chodron, Pema 178 Co-react 139 Churchill, Winston 78 Co-reaction 156 Cirque de Soliel 193 Cowen, Christopher C. 180 Clause, Santa 14 Cows 11 Coach 33 Cowshed 79 Coaching 196-202 CQ 1 Co-create 139 CQ Tools 27 Cole, Edwin Louis 67 Cray computer 32 Collaborate 122, 126, 144, 204 Creative Collaboration 48, 69, 94, 112, 121, process 156-157 145, 163, 203 tension 74, 75,142 Collaborative Creativity 3, 145, 149-169 intelligence 1, 2, 121, 132, 150, Credit 63 151, 171, 180, 189, 195, 203 Critic 166 relationships 72 Cryer, Bruce 155 software 143 Csikszentmihalyi, Mihaly 34-35 Collective intelligence 6, 111-12, 129 Curie, Madame 183 Collective mind 131 Collectivism 181 Davis, Stan 134, 136, 161 Collins, Jim 61, 156, 201 De Vinci, Leonardo 47 Commitment 111 Dennison, Dr Paul and Gail 80
  • 223. INDEX 211 Desnos, Robert 186 EQ 67, 122, 143, 151, 203 Destabilize 134 Evidence 18, 19 Development 201-202 Dialogue 93, 109-112 Failure 63, 96 Dilts, Robert 159, 166 Fannie Mae 138 Director’s perspective 56 Fantasy 15 Disconnection 133 Fear 67 Dishonest 17 Feedback 63, 96 Disney, Walt 159, 166 Feedback sandwich 147, 201 Diversity 106, 150 Filter 17, 30, 41, 42, 110 DNA 5,136, 138, 153 First furrow 60, 61 Donehey, Jim 1 First position 45 Don Juan 65 Fish 9, 68 Dreamer 166 Flemons 99 Flexibility 3, 72, 97, 143, 149-169, 154 E. coli 151 Flock 127, 193 EBay 136 Flow 34-35 Edison, Thomas 96 Flynn, Errol 181 Education 154 Followship 62, 69, 71, 204 Egyptian Vipers 184 Forrest People, The 44 Eidser, John 9 Four noble truths 52 Eighth continent 143 Frames 30, 48, 49 Einstein, Albert 24 Framing 48 Electric fence 11 Frankl, Viktor 65, 77, 173, 182 Elephant 44, 48 Freedom 173 Emergence 128 Freiburg, Nancy & Kevin, 24, Emergent properties 128-130, 138, 177 139, 144 Fritz, Robert 4, 73, 74, 142, 163 Emotional From Chaos to Coherence 155 intelligence 6, 67, 122, 203 Fundamental attribution error 42 management 62, 67, 68 self-mastery 103 Gallup Research Organization 141 Emotions 36,103-104 Gandhi, Mahatma 184 E-Myth Revisited, The 155 Generation ‘Y’ 173, 196-197 Encyclopedia, of Positive Questions, Gerber, Michael 155 The 115 Gibson, William 180 Entanglement 6 Gilbert, Daniel 42 Environment 80-83, 201 Global Brain 131
  • 224. 212 TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH Goal-setting 41 Inukshuk 35 Goethe, Johann Wolfgang 186 IQ 1, 143, 151, 203, Gold coins 43 Isaacs, David 113 Goldberg, Marilee 159 Isaacs, William 94, 109 Goleman, Daniel 67, 122 It’s Alive 134, 136, 161 Good to Great, 61, 156 Gozdz, Kazimierz 7 Jailor 76 Guts 24, 138 Jamming 152 Gutenberg 142 John Deere 161 Johnson, Diane 161 Habituated 12 Johnson, Steven 128 Hammond, Sue Annis 112 Happiness 52 Kao, John 152 Havel, Vacal 187 Kaplan, Brian S. 115 Helplessness 13 Katzenbach, Jon R. 137 Heroes 14, 138, 179 Kellner-Rogers, Myron 128 Heroic cause 138-139, 177 King, Martin Luther 183 Hierarchy 70 Koans 16 High CQ 61, 195-196 Kurzweil, Raymond 2 Hopelessness 13 Humor 157, 159 La Rocefoucauld, Duc De 62 Ladder 23 Identity 81-83 Lao-Tzu 149 Imagination 156 Larousse Animal Life Encyclopedia Immune system 65 183 Impossible Will Take a Little Longer, Laszlo, Ervin 127, 129 The 186 Law, Vernon 193 Incongruence 104 Leadership 2, 62, 70, 204 Individualism 181 Leading Change System 200-202 Influence 94 Learning 152 Information 97-99, 103, 113 Learning organization 125, 151 Information age 180 Leverage 200-201 Innovation 154-157 Limitations of our beliefs 12 Intention 15, 41, 62, 72, 73 Limiting assumptions 37 Interconnectedness 125 Limiting beliefs 13, 14 Interdependence 122 Listening 108-109 Internet 142, 143, 162 Loeb, Paul Rogat 186, Interpersonal 101-102 Logical levels 80-83 Intrapersonal 101-102 Logotherapy 66
  • 225. INDEX 213 Making meaning 62, 65, 67 Nervous system 37, 40, 41, 127 Man and Superman 174 Networks 1, 143 Man’s Search for Meaning 65 Newton, Sir Isaac 70 Mandela, Nelson 75 Ngikona 107 Manipulation 94 Nietzsche, Friedrich 172 Margulis, Lynn 122, 150 Norretranders, Tor 32 Maslow, Abraham, 24, 180 Northern Ireland 11, 30, 46 Maslow’s hierarchy 41 Now Discover Your Strengths 141 Matching 107-108 Matrix, The 16 O’Connor, Joseph 69 Maturana, Humberto R. 37, 51, Oliver Twist 175 Mayfield, Andrea B. 112 Optical Illusion 38, 42 McDermott, Ian 69 Optimax Systems 161 McPherson, Gary 19-21 Optimistic strategies 62, 63 Meaning, 18, 66 Organization 94 Meaning makers 66, 189 Organizational development 17 Meaningful participation 3, 159, Orion 100 171-192, 195 Ornstein, Dr Robert 80 Mechanistic view 70 Ownership 111 Meditation 34 Oxygen 150 Medtronic 138 Mental models 62, 68, 69 Palmer, Parker J. 187 Mentoring 196 Path of Least Resistance, The 73 Meyer, Christopher 134, 136, 161 Patton, General 105 Mind-body connection 65 Pearce, Joseph Chilton 153 Monkey 100 Perceive 50, 53, 67, 68 Monks 78, 79 Perception 3, 16, 29-57, 59, 67, 73, 159 Morhpogenic Fields 127-128 Perceptual Moses 175 filters 41 Mount Everest 13 flexibility 39, 40, 45, 50, 62-64 Multi-dimensional coaching 198-202 perspectives 159 Multiple reframe 50 position 46, 47 Murray, W.H. 185 strategies 62 Periscope 32 Naashon 175 Persistence 62, 78-80 Nasrudin, Mulla 43, 160 Personality 42 Natural systems 7, 8, 122, 161 profiling 41 Necker tube 39 Perspectives 30, 43-48, 63, 73, 110, Negative messages 14 159-160
  • 226. 214 TEACHING AN ANTHILL TO FETCH Pessimist strategies 63 people 63, 67 Peterson, Christopher 64 systems 7, 106 Philippians 37 teams 6, 9, 22, 59, 61, 71, 85, Phillips Corporation 164 121-122 Piece of string 11 Resiling 126 Polio 19 Responsibility 77, 95, 173 Por, George 125, 143-144 Rogers, Kenny 79 Presence 112, 131 Rose-tinted glasses 63 Pressfield, Steven 59 Rubber-necking 33 Prisoner 65 Russell, Peter 36 Problem 18, 68, 69, 112, 133 Problem-focused 73, 114, 157 Salesperson 74 Professional development 54 Santa Claus 14 Psychiatrist 76 Scalpel 95 Psychoneuroimmunology 64 Scharmer, Otto 131 Putnam, Robert 133 Schwab 138 Pygmy 44 Schweitzer, Albert 183 Scientific breakthrough 24 Quantum mechanics 122 Sea squirt 5, 163 Questions 23, 33, 34, 61, 114-115, Second position 45 157-159 Second World War 66 Self-esteem 14, 68, 85, 180 Radical Acceptance 178 Self-expression 62, 84, 85 Rapport 95, 104-107 Self-fulfilling prophesies 17, 18 Rating system 136 Self-Mastery 3, 52, 59, 61-64, 68, 71, Ray, Michael 153 72, 77, 80, 93, 104, 159 Realist 166 Self-organizing 71, 134 Reality 38, 39, 51, 139 Self-perception 53 Recombine 134 Self talk 102 Reframing 49 Seneca 30 Relationship 53, 61, 69, 85, 97-99, Senge, Peter 112, 129, 151 121-122, 129 Sense and respond 134 Relativity, theory of 24 Shapiro, James 151, Resilience 2, 16, 19, 21-24, 29, 33, 59, Shared assumptions 38 65, 102, 123, 126, 163, 180 Shaw, George Bernard 65, 174 Resilience Advantage, The 126 Sheldrake, Rupert 127, 129 Resilient 2, 16, 65, 69, 123, 124, 135, Siebert, Al 126 153, 158 Signal lights 77 individuals 22, 72 Simpler Way, A 113, 128
  • 227. INDEX 215 Six blind men 44 Unheard Cry for Meaning, The Smith, Douglas K. 137 65, 182 Social capital 143 United States 77 Social software 126 User Illusion, The 32 Socrates 59 Software 12, 41 Values 81-83, 191-192 Soldier 76 Van Riper Colonel 136, 138 Solution-focused 73, 75, 142, 157 Velveteen Rabbit, The 189 Southwest Airlines 138 Varela, Francisco J. 37 Sowabona 107 Voice tone 103 -104 Spiral Dynamics 180 Volunteer 172 Spirit 81-83 Stanford Business School 153 War of Art, The 59 Statue of Liberty 77 Ward, William Arthur 171 Stewardship 183 Water 9, 67 Strategies 62, 63, 73, 74 Web of Life, The 52 Strength-based approach 141-142 Well-formed outcomes 72, 75, 77 Stress 99 Wheatley, Meg 112, 113, 138, 139, Stress management clinic 46 158 Sufi 16, 43, 159 Whirlpool 130 Systems thinking 68, 129 Whole Foods Company 24 Williams, Margery 189 Team alignment 84 Williams, Robin 107 Teams 143, 193-199 Wilson, Timothy 42 Technology 125-126, 142-144 Wise teams 136 Termite 127-128 With Every Breath I Take 21 Thin Book of Naming Elephants, World Café, The 113, 176 The 112 World Wide Web 162 Third position 45 Worthlessness 13 Through the Looking Glass 22-23 Toffler, Alvin 154 Yin and Yang 71 Top-down 94, 111, 133-137 Young soldier 75-76 Trickster 159 Triple bottom line 175 Zen 9, 16, 50, 68, 162 Trosten-Bloom, Amanda 115 Zen and the Art of Making a Truman, Harry S. 60 Living 162 Trustworthiness 17 Zukav, Gary 15 Turnbull, Colin 44
  • 228. 2 Go Deeper Index This is an alphabetical listing of the Go Deeper topics found throughout the text. You can explore these ideas in more depth through the Web site www.anthillsite.com. There you will find web links connected to various topics. Appreciative Inquiry, 141 Gary McPherson, 21 Assumptions about Reality, 16 Gen Y and Baby Boomers, 197 Attention, 35 Good Questions, 115 Bottom-up and Top-down Human Society Evolves, 180 Processes, 137 Making Meaning, 67 Brain Gym, 80 Maslow’s Hierarchy of Needs, 41 Building Character, 42 Mind Body Connection, 65 Community Building, 133 Natural Systems, 8 Contribution, 176 Perceptions, 40 Conversation Café, 114 Resilience, 123 Creative Systems, 162 Self Talk, 102 Creativity, 160 Self-Esteem Survey, 68 Dialogue, 111 Solution Focused Thinking, 142 Emergent Systems, 130 Social Software, 126 Emotional Intelligence, 67, 122
  • 229. Speaking & Consulting Contact us at: WWW.CQatWork.com Toll Free 1 866 912 5210 @ info@CQatWork.com Take the CQ Challenge When has your teams’ CQ been at its most obvious? We would love to hear about it. • What was going on? • What made it special? • And what did the team achieve? The example you send us could be featured in the next edition of Teaching an Anthill to Fetch, so send us your CQ stories, we’d love to see them. In the meantime you could also go to WWW.CQatWork.com and take the CQ Quiz. Everyone who takes the quiz receives a free report on the ten ways of developing more CQ @ work.
  • 230. 2 About the Author Stephen’s first presentation was to a large group by anyone’s stan- dards; 40,000. However, at the tender age of 12 he realized that chickens are a tough audience. Inspiring them to change their lives was very hard work. He often wonders where those chickens who did listen to him are now. Stephen comes from a long line of story-tellers. After all, in Ireland it is a national sport. But everything wasn’t sweetness and light as he grew up during the “troubles” in early 70s Northern Ireland. The farm he grew up on was situated in the so-called “murder triangle”. Political violence was an everyday reality. Although the Irish are bright people, they had very poor collaborative intelligence. This was where Stephen’s fascination with what enables people to “get-on” was born. An accomplished psychotherapist and business consultant Stephen has been consulting for over ten years in health care, non- profit, professional associations, education, and government. He is the founder and principle of Zenergy PD and acts as the resilience content expert for one of Canada’s largest health authorities. For over a quarter of a century Stephen has been researching the dynamics of change, problem resolution, group dynamics, and his greatest passion — collaborative intelligence. Extensively trained in NLP (neuro-linguistic programming), facilitation, improv, and group dynamic techniques, Stephen engages his audiences with
  • 231. ABOUT THE AUTHOR 219 customized “one-off” events that bring each participant deeply into the topic. Just as important for Stephen, he is a father, husband, and an active participant in his community. He serves on several boards associated with socio-economic development and is a staunch advo- cate of the triple bottom line as a path towards a sustainable society. Little Known Facts about Stephen Joyce At one point in his life he managed to run himself over with his own car. Not a great idea granted, but you must give him some credit for sheer inventiveness. In 1982, while at Bristol University, Stephen held the UK Guinness Book of Records title for the most live earth worms eaten in 60 sec- onds (long before the days of Fear Factor). Stephen claims he did it to raise money for charity and that he had the written permission of every last worm. When he was a child, Stephen’s best friend was a paraplegic pig called Herbie to whom he told all his darkest secrets. Unfortunately Herbie disappeared one day when Stephen was at school and was never seen again. It’s a cruel blow to discover you’ve eaten your best friend. Stephen lives “outside the box” but drops in occasionally to collect his mail — stephenjoyce@CQatwork.com